Title_Page_PG · Web viewCompetency - This is a dynamic area and is populated based on competencies created in Competency Models under Performance Management. Compliance - Name of

Custom Reports August 2020

Custom Reports: Custom Reports Overview

Table of ContentsCustom Reports Overview.................................................................................................................................. 1

Configuration................................................................................................................................................. 15

Manage Custom Reports........................................................................................................................... 16

Custom Reports Builder Overview.............................................................................................................21

Custom Report Types................................................................................................................................ 78

Custom Charting...................................................................................................................................... 276

Publish Charts to Dashboards Overview..................................................................................................300

Master List of Custom Report Fields........................................................................................................308

Create/Manage Custom Report Folders...................................................................................................439

Share Custom Reports within a Folder.....................................................................................................441

Analytics - Summarized Report View.......................................................................................................444

Create Calculated Field............................................................................................................................ 449

Users Direct Subordinate Constraint........................................................................................................460

Delivery........................................................................................................................................................ 468

Create Custom Report - Delivery Tab......................................................................................................469

Scheduling................................................................................................................................................... 472

Create Custom Report - Schedule Tab....................................................................................................473

Transcript Status Groups for Reporting.......................................................................................................478

i


Custom Reports OverviewCustom Reports Deprecation: Cornerstone will be deprecating the legacy reporting solution "Custom Reports" with the February ’21 Release. For more information, see the announcement in the August '20 release notes and in the August '20 Release Summary & Matrix.

Custom Reports is the custom reporting tool that allows users to develop reports that are tailored to your needs. Custom reports can be created from hundreds of available data points in one comprehensive report. The data that is included in the report can be taken from different areas of the system and filters can be applied to present a precise view of the appropriate information. These reports can be easily shared with other users in the organization and the data contained in the report can be refreshed as needed.

Permissions are required to view and create the various reports within Custom Reports. Because a unique permission is required to view or create the various types of custom reports, information is more secure as the functionality can be applied on an as-needed basis. The information is protected and can only be viewed by users with access to those report types.

To access custom reports, go to REPORTS > CUSTOM REPORTS.

The following list indicates the permission needed to create the custom report type; to view the available output requires the corresponding "View" permission. To give an administrator access only to the results of the report created, select only the appropriate "View" permission for the report type chosen. "View" permissions are selected automatically when the appropriate "Create" permission is chosen for a Security Role.

Permissions

PERMISSION NAME

PERMISSION DESCRIPTION CATEGORY

Custom Certification Report - Create

Grants ability to create and edit Custom Certification reports. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, User, and User's Direct Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Certification Report - View

Grants ability to view results of Custom Certification reports created by self or shared by others. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, User, and User's Direct Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Compensation

Grants ability to create and edit custom Compensation reports. This permission can be

Reports - Analytics

1

https://clients.csod.com/phnx/driver.aspx?routename=Social/Topic/Posting/DiscussionPostingDetails&Posting=83030&Root=20



Report - Create constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, User, User's Subordinates, and User's Direct Subordinates.

Custom Compensation Report - View

Grants ability to view results of custom Compensation reports created by self or shared by others. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, User, User's Direct Subordinates, and User's Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Competency Report - Create

Grants ability to create and edit custom Competency reports. This permission can be constrained by User Self and Subordinates, OU, User’s OU, User's Direct Subordinates, and User.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Competency Report - View

Grants ability to view results of custom Competency reports created by self or shared by others. This permission can be constrained by User Self and Subordinates, OU, User’s OU, User's Direct Subordinates, and User.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Compliance Report - Create

Grants ability to create and edit Custom Compliance Reports. This permission should only be enabled if a client has not yet converted compliance certifications to the new certifications module.

Limited Use/Obsolete

Custom Compliance Report - View

Grants ability to view results of custom compliance reports created by self or others. This permission should only be enabled if a client has not yet converted compliance certifications to the new certifications module.


Custom Connect Communities Report - Create

Grants access to view, create, and edit the Connect Communities Report in Custom Reports, which gives a way to measure success of communities in connect. This permission can be constrained by User's Direct Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Connect Communities Report - View

Grants access to view the Connect Communities Report in Analytics, which gives a way to measure success of communities in connect. This permission can be constrained by User's Direct Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

2


Custom Connect Report - Create

Grants ability to create and edit custom Connect Communities reports.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Connect Report - View

Grants ability to view results of custom Connect reports created by self or shared by others.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Development Plan Report - Create

Grants ability to create and edit custom Development Plan reports. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, User, and User's Direct Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Development Plan Report - View

Grants ability to view results of custom Development Plan reports created by self or shared by others. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, User, and User's Direct Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Evaluations Reports - Create

Grants ability to create and edit custom Evaluation reports (training evaluation levels 1, 2, and 3). This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and User's Direct Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Evaluations Reports - View

Grants ability to view results of custom Evaluation reports (training evaluation levels 1, 2, and 3) created by self or shared by others. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and User's Direct Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom FINRA User Report: Create

Grants ability to create and save custom FINRA reports. (Banking/Financial industry)


Custom FINRA User Report: View

Grants ability to view custom FINRA reports created by self or others. (Banking/Financial industry)


Custom Forms Report: Create

Grants ability to create and edit custom Forms reports. This permission refers to creating custom reports for the Forms functionality. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, User's Subordinates, and User.

Reports - Analytics

3


Custom Forms Report: View

Grants ability to view results of custom Forms reports created by self or shared by others. This permission refers to viewing custom reports for the Forms functionality. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, User's Subordinates, and User.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Goal Report - Create

Grants ability to create and edit custom Goals reports. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User's Direct Subordinates, and User Self and Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Goal Report - View

Grants ability to view results of custom Goal reports created by self or shared by others. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User's Direct Subordinates, and User Self and Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Job Pool Succession Report - Create

Grants ability to create and edit custom Job Pool Succession reports. This permission can be constrained by Position and User's Direct Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Job Pool Succession Report - View

Grants ability to view results of custom Job Pool Succession reports created by self or shared by others. This permission can be constrained by Position and User's Direct Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Multi-Module Report - Create

Grants ability to create and edit custom Multi-Module reports. This permission works in conjunction with other Custom Report - Create permissions. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, User's Direct Subordinates, and User.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Multi-Module Report - View

Grants ability to view results of custom Multi-Module reports created by self. This permission works in conjunction with other Custom Report - View permissions. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, User's Direct Subordinates, and User.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Observation Grants ability to create and edit Observation Reports -

4


Checklist Report - Create

Checklist Reports in Analytics. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User, User's Self, User's Manager, User's Subordinates, User's Direct Reports, User's Superiors, User's Direct Subordinates, and User Self and Subordinates.

Analytics

Custom Observation Checklist Report - View

Grants ability to view Observation Checklist Reports in Analytics. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User, User's Self, User's Manager, User's Subordinates, User's Direct Reports, User's Superiors, User's Direct Subordinates, and User Self and Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Onboarding Report - Create

Grants ability to create and edit custom Onboarding reports. This permission refers to creating custom reports for the Onboarding module. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, and User's Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Onboarding Report - View

Grants ability to view results of custom Onboarding reports created by self or shared by others. This permission refers to viewing custom reports for the Onboarding module. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, and User's Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Performance Reports - Create

Grants ability to create and edit Custom Performance reports. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User's Self and Subordinates, User's Direct Subordinates, and User's Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Performance Reports - View

Grants ability to view results of Custom Performance reports created by self or shared by others. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User's Self and Subordinates, User's Direct Subordinates, and User's Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Performance Review Report - Create

Grants ability to create and edit custom Performance Review reports. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User's Self and Subordinates, User's Direct Subordinates, and User's Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

5


Custom Performance Review Report - View

Grants ability to view results of custom Performance Review reports created by self or shared by others. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User's Self and Subordinates, User's Direct Subordinates, and User's Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Recruiting Report - Create

Grants ability to create and edit Custom Recruiting reports. This permission can be constrained by Division, Position, Location, and User's Direct Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Recruiting Report - View

Grants ability to view results of Custom Recruiting reports created by self or shared by others. This permission can be constrained by Division, Position, Location, and User's Direct Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Resume Report - Create

Grants ability to create and edit custom Resume reports. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User, User's Direct Subordinates, and User Self and Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Resume Report - View

Grants ability to view results of custom Resume reports created by self or shared by others. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User, User's Direct Subordinates, and User Self and Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Succession Report - Create

Grants ability to create and edit Custom Succession Management (SMP) Reports. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, User's Direct Subordinates, and User's Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Succession Report - View

Grants ability to view results of Custom Succession Management (SMP) Reports created by self or shared by others. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, User's Direct Subordinates, and User's Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Test Reports - Create

Grants ability to create and edit custom Test reports (Test Engine data). This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and

Reports - Analytics

6


Subordinates, and User's Direct Subordinates.

Custom Test Reports - View

Grants ability to view results of custom Test reports (Test Engine data) created by self or shared by others. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, and User's Direct Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Training Forms - Curricula Report - Create

Grants ability to create and edit custom Training Forms - Curricula reports.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Training Forms - Curricula Report - View

Grants ability to view custom Training Forms - Curricula reports.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Training Form Management Reports - Create

Grants ability to create and edit custom Training Form Management reports. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and User's Direct Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Training Form Management Reports - View

Grants ability to view custom Training Form Management reports. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and User's Direct Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Training Plan Report - Create

Grants ability to create and edit training plan (Training Demand Forecast) custom reports. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User, User's Direct Subordinates, and User Self and Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Training Plan Report - View

Grants ability to view results of training plan (Training Demand Forecast) custom reports created by self or shared by others. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User, User's Direct Subordinates, and User Self and Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Training Reports - Create

Grants ability to create and edit Custom Training (Catalog) reports. This permission can be constrained by Provider. Note: When the constraint is set for the permission, users will only be able to

Reports - Analytics

7


view training data for the constrained providers.

Custom Training Reports - View

Grants ability to view results of Custom Training (Catalog) reports created by self or shared by others. This permission can be constrained by Provider. Note: When the constraint is set for the permission, users will only be able to view training data for the constrained providers.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Training Unit Distributor Reports - Manage

Grants access to view, create and edit Training Unit Distributor Report in Analytics, which displays training unit information for distributed training units. This permission can be constrained by User, User's OU, and User Self and Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Training Unit Distributor Reports - View

Grants access to view the Training Unit Distributor Report in Analytics, which displays training unit information for distributed training units. This permission can be constrained by User, User's OU, and User Self and Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Training Unit Key Code Reports - Create

Grants access to view, create and edit the Training Unit Key Code Report in Analytics, which displays training unit information for key codes. This permission can be constrained by OU, User’s OU, User Self and Subordinates, User, User’s Self, User’s Manager, User’s Superiors, User’s Subordinates, User’s Direct Reports.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Training Unit Key Code Reports - View

Grants access to view the Training Unit Key Code Report in Analytics, which displays training unit information for key codes. This permission can be constrained by OU, User’s OU, User Self and Subordinates, User, User’s Self, User’s Manager, User’s Superiors, User’s Subordinates, User’s Direct Reports.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Transaction Reports - Create

Grants ability to create and edit Custom Transaction (Billing) reports.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Transaction Reports - View

Grants ability to view results of Custom Transaction (Billing) reports created by self or shared by others.

Reports - Analytics

8


Custom Transcript Reports - Create

Grants ability to create and edit Custom Transcript (Training Record) reports. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, and User's Direct Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Transcript Reports - View

Grants ability to view results of Custom Transcript (Training Record) reports created by self or shared by others. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, and User's Direct Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom User Reports - Create

Grants ability to create and edit Custom User reports. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, and User's Direct Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom User Reports - View

Grants ability to view results of Custom User reports created by self or shared by others. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, and User's Direct Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Dashboard - Create Grants the ability to create a dashboard of one or more graphical standard reports that can be saved and refreshed at-will to update the results on an ongoing basis. User must also have permission for at least one of the standard reports that are designated for use in dashboards. If a user does not have permission to view a report type, the user cannot add that report type to the dashboard.

Reports - Dashboards

Dashboard - Share Grants the ability to share a dashboard created by self with other users within the portal who may then view and refresh the results of the dashboard at-will. This permission works in conjunction with the Create Dashboard permission.


Dashboard - View Grants the ability to view dashboards created by self or shared by others. User must also have permission to view the standard or custom reports that are included in any shared dashboards. If a user does not have permission to view a report type, the user cannot view that report type within the dashboard.


9


This is an end user permission.

Preview Custom Reports

Grants ability to preview custom reports when creating and editing, before changes are saved. This permission works in conjunction with custom report create permissions. This permission cannot be constrained.

Reports - Analytics

Report Delivery - Email

Enables creators of custom reports to schedule delivery of the report to their email address. This permission works in conjunction with custom report - create permissions.

Reports - Analytics

Report Delivery - FTP Enables creators of custom reports to schedule delivery of the report to an FTP directory. This permission works in conjunction with custom report - create permissions.

Reports - Analytics

Reports Inside a Folder - Share

Grants only users with this permission the ability to share all custom reports within a report folder in a single action. This permission can be constrained by User, OU, or User's OU. Note: You must also have permission to create the corresponding report type to share the report.

Reports - Analytics

10


Real Time Data WarehouseCustom reports are refreshed in real time via the Real Time Data Warehouse (RTDW). Once a custom report is refreshed, the report output will run using the RTDW. This means that the data in the report is just a few minutes old. The data warehouse will refresh every 10-20 minutes.

Custom Report FoldersCustom reports are organized into folders. All reports must be within a folder and a report can only belong inside one folder at a time. The same report cannot exist in multiple folders. Note: For users using Internet Explorer, this functionality is only supported by Internet Explorer 6 and newer versions.

Create, Copy, Edit, or Move a Custom ReportFrom the Reports page, users with the appropriate permissions can create, copy, edit, or move a custom report. See Manage Custom Reports on page 16 for additional information.

Create, Rename, or Delete a Custom Report FolderFrom the Reports page, users can create, rename, or delete a custom report folder. See Create/Manage Custom Report Folders on page 445 for additional information.

Share Custom Reports within a FolderFrom the Reports page, users can share the reports that are within a custom report folder. See Share Custom Reports within a Folder on page 447 for additional information.

For additional information about sharing reports, see the following topics in Online Help, which also include frequently asked questions about sharing and scheduling reports:

o See Create Custom Report - Sharing Tab on page 70 for additional information.o See Create Custom Report - Schedule Tab on page 478 for additional information.

View Existing Reports

Reports TableBy default, reports appear in the Reports table in alphabetical order. However, all columns are sortable.

The following information is displayed for each report in the Reports table:

o Title - This displays the name of the custom report, as specified during creation. The reports are listed in alphabetical order. If the report is a summarized report, you can click the report title to open the View Report page.

11


o Type - This displays the report type.o Creator - This displays the user who created the report.o Folder - This displays the folder in which the report is currently located. You can move

the report to a different folder by dragging and dropping the report from the Reports table to the appropriate report folder within the Folders panel. Note: Reports cannot be dragged and dropped into the All Folders folder.

o Last Run - This displays the date on which the report was last run. This date is only updated for the individual user that refreshes the report.

The following actions appear within the Actions drop-down list:

o Copy - Click this icon to copy the custom report. You are taken to the Select Fields page to begin copying the custom report. See Create Custom Report - Overview on page 24 for additional information. Note: When you copy a report that has been shared with you, any settings that were configured on the User/OU, Share, or Schedule tabs are not copied.

o Delete - Click this icon to delete the custom report. Published Widget Note: If a custom report that includes a published widget is deleted, then the widget is also deleted from the Published Widgets category for dashboards and any dashboard containing that widget. The widget is deleted for both the report creator and shared users.

o Edit - Click this icon to edit the custom report. You are taken to the Select Fields page to begin editing the custom report. See Create Custom Report - Overview on page 24 for additional information. Note about Deleting Custom Charts in a Report: When editing a custom report, if the chart for a custom report is deleted in the report, then the widget is also deleted from the Published Widgets category for dashboards and any dashboard containing that widget. The widget is deleted for both the report creator and shared users.

o Excel - Click this icon to export the report to Excel.o History - Click this icon to view the Run History pop-up for the report. This pop-up

displays the date and time for the past three instances of the report along with the number of records that were returned in the report. You can export each instance to Excel or to text.

o Refresh - Click this icon to refresh the report data and generate an updated version of the report. This option is only available if the report has already been run. A user can refresh a custom report independently of other users with different permission constraints. Each user with unique report constraints can refresh, view, and preview a custom report independently. If the report is processing for another user, all other users sharing the report that have different constraints can still access and refresh the report themselves. Note: Users sharing a report with the same permission constraints cannot refresh the report independently.

o Print - Click this icon to export the report to a printable version. This option does not display when the report output exceeds 30,000 rows.

o Text - Click this icon to export the report to text. This output is ideal when the report results are larger than 65,000 rows of data.

12


o View - This option is only available for the report creator. Click View to open the report viewer page. This page show the fields that were selected for the report, as well as the filters that were used. The report results also display. You can edit the report by clicking Edit Report. Options are available from the Actions drop-down, depending on your permissions and the functionality that is enabled in your portal. You can share or assign the report, as well as create a goal. You can also launch a performance review and award compensation. See Analytics - Summarized Report View on page 450 for additional information. Note: If the report has more than 10,000 records, the report will not display the "View" in the drop down actions list.

Search ReportsTo search for an existing report by report name, enter a search term in the search box and click the SEARCH button. The system searches all available custom reports for a custom report with a matching title. After a search is performed, the Custom Reports folder is selected.

Permission FilterBy default, the Custom Reports page displays all reports that are available to you. Use the permission filter drop-down next to the search field to change the reports that are displayed. When a new filter option is selected, the system automatically updates the list of displayed reports to match the search criteria. The following Permission views are available:

o All Reports - This option is selected by default and displays all available reports, regardless of who created the report.

o Shared with Me - This option displays reports that have been shared with you.o Created by Me - This option displays reports that you have created.o Published by Me - Select this option to filter the list by reports that you have published.

The name of the Last Run column changes to Last Published, which displays the most recent date on which the report/widget was run.

o Published with Me - Select this option to filter the list by published reports that have been shared with you. The name of the Last Run column changes to Last Published, which displays the most recent date on which the report/widget was published.

Runtime FilterBy default, the Custom Reports page displays reports that were ran at any time. Use the runtime filter drop-down next to the permission filter to change the reports that are displayed. When a new filter option is selected, the system automatically updates the list of displayed reports to match the search criteria. The following Runtime views are available:

o Ran Anytime - This option displays all available reports, regardless of when the report was last run.

o Running now - This option displays reports that are running currently and are in the queue.

o Ran past hour - This option displays reports that were run in the past hour.

13


o Ran past 24 hours - This option displays reports that were run in the past 24 hours from the current time.

o Ran past week - This option displays reports that were run in the past week from the current time.

Folders PanelBy default, the All Folders folder is selected on the Folders panel. This selection displays reports from all reports folders that match the selected filters. To view only reports from a single folder, select the appropriate reports folder. When a new folder is selected, the system automatically updates the list of displayed reports to match the selected folder.

If a reports folder has sub-folders, an arrow appears to the left of the folder name. Click the arrow to expand and collapse the folder.

Expand/Collapse Reports ListThe list of reports in the table can be expanded and collapsed by clicking the Close/Open arrow in the left-center of the panel.

Custom Field DescriptionsCustom field descriptions are available for certain custom field types in the OnDemand Support folder:

o See Custom Reporting Field Descriptions - ILT Instructors Fields for additional information.

o See Custom Reporting Field Descriptions - ILT Session Schedule (Part Level) Fields for additional information.

o See Custom Reporting Field Descriptions - Training Request Forms Fields for additional information.

o See Custom Reporting Field Descriptions - Training Fields for additional information.o See Custom Reporting Field Descriptions - Transaction Fields for additional

information.o See Custom Reporting Field Descriptions - Transcript Fields for additional information.o See Custom Reporting Field Descriptions - User Fields for additional information.

User's Direct Subordinate ConstraintFor detailed information about the User's Direct Subordinate constraint, see the User's Direct Subordinate Constraint topic in Online Help.

See AlsoSee Custom Report Types on page 79 for additional information.

See Create Custom Report - Overview on page 24 for additional information.

14


For reports troubleshooting, see the Reporting Troubleshooting Guide in the OnDemand Support folder.

15


Configuration

16


Manage Custom ReportsCustom Reports Deprecation: Cornerstone will be deprecating the legacy reporting solution "Custom Reports" with the February ’21 Release. For more information, see the announcement in the August '20 release notes and in the August '20 Release Summary & Matrix.

To access custom reports, go to Reports > Custom Reports.

Create a Custom ReportTo create a custom report, click the New drop-down, and then select the appropriate report type.

17




You can also create a custom report by right-clicking the folder in which the new report will be stored and selecting New Report.See Create Custom Report - Overview on page 24 for additional information.

Copy a Custom ReportTo copy a custom report, you must first search for the report that you are copying using the search field. See Custom Reports Overview on page 1 for additional information.

After locating the appropriate report, click the Actions drop-down arrow for the report and select Copy. You are taken to the Select Fields page to begin copying the custom report. See Create Custom Report - Overview on page 24 for additional information.

Edit a Custom ReportTo edit a custom report, you must first search for the report that you are editing using the search field. See Custom Reports Overview on page 1 for additional information.

After locating the appropriate report, click the Actions drop-down arrow for the report and select Edit. You are taken to the Select Fields page to begin editing the custom report. See Create Custom Report - Overview on page 24 for additional information.

18


Move a Custom ReportCustom reports can be moved between report folders by dragging and dropping the report from the Custom Reports table to the appropriate folder within the Folders panel. However, a report cannot be dragged and dropped into the All Folders folder.

View an Existing Custom ReportReports that you have created or that have been shared with you appear in the Reports table. The following sections explain the information in the Reports table, as well as the filters that are available and the All Folders section.

Reports TableBy default, reports that you have created or that have been shared with you appear in the Reports table in alphabetical order. However, all columns are sortable.

The following information is displayed for each report in the Reports table:

o Title - This displays the name of the custom report, as specified during creation. The reports are listed in alphabetical order. If the report is a summarized report, you can click the report title to open the View Report page.

o Type - This displays the report type.o Creator - This displays the user who created the report.o Folder - This displays the folder in which the report is currently located. You can move

the report to a different folder by dragging and dropping the report from the Reports table to the appropriate report folder within the Folders panel. Note: Reports cannot be dragged and dropped into the All Folders folder.

o Last Run - This displays the date on which the report was last run. This date is only updated for the individual user that refreshes the report.

The following actions appear within the Actions drop-down list:

o Excel - Click this icon to export the report to Excel.o Print - Click this icon to export the report to a printable version. This option does not

display when the report output exceeds 30,000 rows. o Text - Click this icon to export the report to text. This output is ideal when the report

results are larger than 65,000 rows of data.o History - Click this icon to view the Run History pop-up for the report. This pop-up

displays the date and time for the past three instances of the report along with the number of records that were returned in the report. You can export each instance to Excel or to text.

o Edit - Click this icon to edit the custom report. You are taken to the Select Fields page to begin editing the custom report. See Create Custom Report - Overview on page 24 for additional information.Note about Deleting Custom Charts in a Report: When editing a custom report, if the chart for a custom report is deleted in the report, then the widget is also deleted from the Published Widgets category for dashboards and any dashboard containing that widget. The widget is deleted for both the report creator and shared users.

19


o Copy - Click this icon to copy the custom report. You are taken to the Select Fields page to begin copying the custom report. See Create Custom Report - Overview on page 24 for additional information.Note: When you copy a report that has been shared with you, any settings that were configured on the User/OU, Share, or Schedule tabs are not copied.

o Refresh - Click this icon to refresh the report data and generate an updated version of the report. This option is only available if the report has already been run. A user can refresh a custom report independently of other users with different permission constraints. Each user with unique report constraints can refresh, view, and preview a custom report independently. If the report is processing for another user, all other users sharing the report that have different constraints can still access and refresh the report themselves. Note: Users sharing a report with the same permission constraints cannot refresh the report independently.

o Delete - Click this icon to delete the custom report. Published Widget Note: If a custom report that includes a published widget is deleted, then the widget is also deleted from the Published Widgets category for dashboards and any dashboard containing that widget. The widget is deleted for both the report creator and shared users.

Search ReportsTo search for an existing report by report name, enter a search term in the search box and click the SEARCH button. The system searches all available custom reports for a custom report with a matching title. After a search is performed, the Custom Reports folder is selected.

Permission FilterBy default, the Custom Reports page displays all reports that are available to you. Use the permission filter drop-down next to the search field to change the reports that are displayed. When a new filter option is selected, the system automatically updates the list of displayed reports to match the search criteria. The following Permission views are available:

o All Reports - This option is selected by default and displays all available reports, regardless of who created the report.

o Shared with Me - This option displays reports that have been shared with you.o Created by Me - This option displays reports that you have created.o Published by Me - Select this option to filter the list by reports that you have published.

The name of the Last Run column changes to Last Published, which displays the most recent date on which the report/widget was run.

o Published with Me - Select this option to filter the list by published reports that have been shared with you. The name of the Last Run column changes to Last Published, which displays the most recent date on which the report/widget was published.

Runtime FilterBy default, the Custom Reports page displays reports that were ran at any time. Use the runtime filter drop-down next to the permission filter to change the reports that are

20


displayed. When a new filter option is selected, the system automatically updates the list of displayed reports to match the search criteria. The following Runtime views are available:

o Ran Anytime - This option displays all available reports, regardless of when the report was last run.

o Running now - This option displays reports that are running currently and are in the queue.

o Ran past hour - This option displays reports that were run in the past hour.o Ran past 24 hours - This option displays reports that were run in the past 24 hours

from the current time.o Ran past week - This option displays reports that were run in the past week from the

current time.

Folders PanelBy default, the All Folders folder is selected on the Folders panel. This selection displays reports from all reports folders that match the selected filters. To view only reports from a single folder, select the appropriate reports folder. When a new folder is selected, the system automatically updates the list of displayed reports to match the selected folder.

If a reports folder has sub-folders, an arrow appears to the left of the folder name. Click the arrow to expand and collapse the folder.

For more information about creating and managing custom report folders, See Create/Manage Custom Report Folders on page 445 for additional information.

Create a Chart for a Custom ReportChart features are available for custom reports, allowing you to configure and view your report data in chart form. See Chart Designer Overview on page 283 for additional information.

Publish a Custom Report as a Dashboard WidgetCustom reports can be published as dashboard widgets. Once the report is published as a widget, the widget is available to add to a dashboard from the Published Widgets category when creating or editing the dashboard. See Publish Charts to Dashboards Overview on page 304 for additional information.

21


Custom Reports Builder OverviewCustom Reports Deprecation: Cornerstone will be deprecating the legacy reporting solution "Custom Reports" with the February ’21 Release. For more information, see the announcement in the August '20 release notes and in the August '20 Release Summary & Matrix.

22




Copy Custom ReportCustom Reports Deprecation: Cornerstone will be deprecating the legacy reporting solution "Custom Reports" with the February ’21 Release. For more information, see the announcement in the August '20 release notes and in the August '20 Release Summary & Matrix.

When copying a custom report within the Custom Report Builder, the following information is copied:

o Report folder locationo Report type in the report type drop-downo Field types in the Fields panelo Filters defined in the Field Filters tabo Filters defined in the User/OU Filters tab (Note: When copying a shared report, the only

criteria that are copied are the criteria that are available for the user with whom the report is shared.)

o Data in the report preview panelo Sort configurations in both the Sort tab and the report preview panelo Summary configurations in both the Summary tab and the report preview panelo Currency options configured on the Currency tab

PermissionsFor users with permission to create a custom report, the Copy link will appear in the Actions drop-down on the Reports page in Analytics.

For users who only have permission to view a custom report, the Copy link will not appear in the Actions drop-down. This also applies to shared users of a report; if the shared users do not have permission to create the report, then they will not have permission to copy the report when it is shared with them.

23




Create Custom Report - OverviewCustom Reports Deprecation: Cornerstone will be deprecating the legacy reporting solution "Custom Reports" with the February ’21 Release. For more information, see the announcement in the August '20 release notes and in the August '20 Release Summary & Matrix.

The Custom Report Builder interface is a one-page report creation process that includes the ability to preview report data while creating the report. Being able to preview the report as you select fields and filters enables you to redefine the report criteria as you go so that you can easily swap out unnecessary fields and define the filter options to quickly and accurately fit your custom reporting needs.

Use CaseAn administrator would like to create a custom report to track the training progress of the users in her organization. While building the report, she would like the ability to preview and filter the report data. She creates the report using the Custom Report Builder functionality. This allows her to preview the report as she creates it and easily determine if there are any fields that are not necessary to include based on the report results in the preview. She is also able to quickly ensure that the appropriate fields are included prior to generating an Excel version of the report. This saves her time when creating reports so that the guesswork is removed from the report results.

To create a custom report, go to REPORTS > CUSTOM REPORTS. Then, click the New drop-down and click the name of the report type. This opens the Custom Report Builder page.

Permissions

PERMISSION NAME


Calculated Fields - Modify

Grants ability to view, modify, create, and delete any calculated fields that have been created by themselves or public fields in Analytics. This permission cannot be constrained. This permission works in conjunction with other Custom Report - Create permissions.

Reports - Analytics

Calculated Fields - View

Grants ability to view any calculated fields that have been created by themselves or public fields in Analytics. This permission cannot be constrained. This permission works in conjunction with other Custom Report - Create permissions.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Assignment Report -Create

Grants ability to create and edit custom Assignment reports. This permission can be constrained to User

Reports - Analytics

24




Self and Subordinates, User's OU, OU, and Provider.

Custom Assignment Report - View

Grants ability to view results of custom Assignment reports created by self or shared by others.

Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics

Custom Compensation Report - Create

Grants ability to create and edit custom Compensation reports. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, User, User's Subordinates, and User's Direct Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics

25




Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics

26




Reports - Analytics

Custom Onboarding Report - Create

Grants ability to create and edit custom Onboarding reports. This permission refers to creating custom reports for the Onboarding module. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, and User's Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Onboarding Report - View

Grants ability to view results of custom Onboarding reports created by self or shared by others. This permission refers to viewing custom reports for the Onboarding module. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, and User's Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics

Custom Performance Review Report -

Grants ability to create and edit custom Performance Review reports. This permission can be constrained

Reports - Analytics

27


Create by OU, User's OU, User's Self and Subordinates, User's Direct Subordinates, and User's Subordinates.



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics


Grants ability to create and edit custom Test reports (Test Engine data). This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, and User's Direct Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics

28




Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics


Grants ability to create and edit Custom Training (Catalog) reports. This permission can be constrained by Provider. Note: When the constraint is set for the permission, users will only be able to view training data for the constrained providers.

Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics

29




Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics

Preview Custom Reports

Grants ability to preview custom reports when creating and editing, before changes are saved. This permission works in conjunction with custom report create permissions. This permission cannot be constrained.

Reports - Analytics

Report Delivery - Email

Enables creators of custom reports to schedule delivery of the report to their email address. This permission works in conjunction with custom report - create permissions.

Reports - Analytics

Report Delivery - FTP Enables creators of custom reports to schedule delivery of the report to an FTP directory. This permission works in conjunction with custom report - create permissions.

Reports - Analytics

30


FEATURE

DESCRIPTION

Report Title

This field enables you to name the report. See Create Custom Report - Name the Report on page 54 for additional information.

Close Click CLOSE to close the report. If the report contains unsaved changes, then clicking CLOSE opens a confirmation pop-up. The pop-up indicates that closing the report will erase any unsaved changes. Click YES to close the report, or click NO to cancel the close action. Note: Attempting to close the browser window has the same effect as clicking CLOSE if there are unsaved changes to the report.

Save Click SAVE to save the report. This option is only enabled when the report contains unsaved changes. Clicking SAVE closes the report and returns you to the main Analytics page. The report displays in your list of reports in the reports table. Note: A report must include at least one field before the report can be saved.

31


FEATURE

DESCRIPTION

Report Type Drop-Down

The report type drop-down enables you to determine which type of custom report to create. See Create Custom Report - Select Report Type for additional information.

Report Folder Drop-Down

The report folder drop-down displays the custom reports folder hierarchy and enables you to move reports into a designated folder. See Create Custom Report - Report Folder Options for additional information.

Fields Panel

This panel enables you to select the fields to include in the report. See Create Custom Report - Select Report Fields for additional information.

Custom Report Panel

The following information displays in the Custom Report panel:

o Field Filters - This tab enables you to filter the report fields in order to narrow down the report results. See Create Custom Report - Field Filters Tab for additional information.

o User/OU Filters - This tab enables you to filter the results by user and OU criteria. See Create Custom Report - User/OU Filters for additional information.

o Sort - This tab enables you to define the sort order of the fields you selected for the report. See Create Custom Report - Sort Tab for additional information.

o Summary - This tab enables you to summarize the data in the report based on certain fields. See Create Custom Report - Summary Tab for additional information.

o Sharing - This tab enables you to define the users with whom to share the report. See Create Custom Report - Share Tab for additional information.

o Schedule - This tab enables you to create a schedule for the report. See Create Custom Report - Schedule Tab on page 478 for additional information.

o Delivery - This tab enables you to deliver the report to an FTP site or to yourself via email. See Create Custom Report - Delivery Tab for additional information.

o Currency - This tab displays the currency options available for custom Compensation reports. See Create Custom Report - Currency Tab for additional information.

Refresh

Click the REFRESH button to manually update the report results in the report preview panel. When the report data is out of date, an Exclamation icon displays in the REFRESH button to indicate that the report data needs to be refreshed. If the report data cannot be refreshed, a pop-up displays indicating that the results

32


FEATURE

DESCRIPTION

cannot be updated. See Create Custom Report - Report Preview on page 55 for additional information.

Maximum Number of Records

Enter the maximum number of records that should be returned in the report. If the maximum is set to zero, then no limit is placed on the report. An Excel output accommodates 65,000 rows and the HTML Printable Version is only recommended when viewing less that 20,000 rows. The maximum value that can be entered is 999,999. See Create Custom Report - Report Preview on page 55 for additional information.

As a best-practice, it is not recommended to place a value of zero in this field, nor is it recommended to put 999,999, as larger reports will experience a delay in processing or potential time-out error. This is because while the report may have 999,999 records, the quantity of Fields and Field Filters must also be calculated. If you experience an error in your report we recommend significantly reducing this field, running your report, and increasing if successful.

Options

The following options are available in the OPTIONS button drop-down. The options are only available if the report is summarized and only apply to the printable and Excel versions of the report, as well as when the report is run.

o Show/count unique rows only - Select this option to filter the summarized report results not to repeat report rows that display identical summarized information. For example, if a Transcript report only contains the field User Full Name, and the report results include 50 different users with the name Sample User, then checking the Show/count unique rows only will only display one row of name Sample User in the report.

o Show record counts in report - Select this option to create a report that displays the record count for each combination of fields selected. For example, to determine the total number of active versus inactive training types in the catalog, check the Record Count box, then include the Training Active and Training Type fields in the report. The report displays a total count of inactive and active training types, listed by type.

o Show report headers in report - Select this option to show the name of the fields in the header row of the report output.

Actions The following actions are available in the ACTIONS button drop-down:

o Print - Click the Print icon to create a printable version of the report. This option only appears for users with permission to preview custom reports.

o Export to Excel - Click the Export to Excel icon to export the report results to Excel. This option only appears for users with permission to preview custom reports.

33


FEATURE

DESCRIPTION

o Remove All Columns - Click Remove All Columns to remove all of the fields that you have selected for the report. This opens a confirmation pop-up. Click YES to remove all fields in the report. This clears the report preview panel and all selections in the tabs above the preview. Or, click NO to cancel the removal action.

When viewing a printable or Excel version of a report with more than 5000 records, only the first 5000 records display. If your report contains more than 5000 records, be sure to save the report in order to view all of the records. When custom reports are saved, they are subject to 30,000 records for printable version or 65,000 records for Excel.

See Create Custom Report - Report Preview on page 55 for additional information.

Report Preview

This panel enables you to view the report results based on the field, filter, sort, and summary selections. See Create Custom Report - Report Preview on page 55 for additional information.

General Usability Informationo Each panel of the Custom Report Builder interface can be expanded or collapsed by

clicking the expand/collapse button on the top or side of the panel.o Each panel of the Custom Report Builder can be widened or narrowed. Hover the

mouse over the expand/collapse bars. The mouse turns into a two-sided arrow. Drag the panel up or down to widen or narrow the panel.

o The Save, Run, Print, Excel, and Refresh options are not selectable until at least one field is added to the report.

o When a tab name displays in red, this indicates that an error has occurred on the tab. Click the tab name to view the tab and resolve the error.

o The Custom Report Builder supports Internet Explorer 7 and higher.o Custom fields are only available for custom reports for users who meet the availability

criteria configured for the fields.o Opening the Custom Report Builder from the Analytics page may take several seconds

in order for the page to load.

34


o Reports can be outputted to a printable view or an Excel version via the ACTIONS button drop-down.

Steps to Create a Custom ReportThe following are the steps for creating a custom report in the Custom Report Builder:

1. Choose a report type.2. Select the fields to include in the report.3. Define the filters, sort, and summary options.4. Configure the sharing options.5. Schedule the report and configure the delivery options.6. Save the report.

Troubleshooting InformationThe following page contains a quick reference card to guide you through the process of creating a custom report:

o See Custom Reporting Quick Reference Card.

35


Create Custom Report - Currency TabCustom Reports Deprecation: Cornerstone will be deprecating the legacy reporting solution "Custom Reports" with the February ’21 Release. For more information, see the announcement in the August '20 release notes and in the August '20 Release Summary & Matrix.

When creating custom Compensation reports, a Currency tab displays. The Currency tab enables you to define the currency in which all currency fields display on the report.

Note: The Currency tab only displays for custom Compensation reports.

The following options are available on the Currency tab:

o Original Currency - Select this option to keep currency fields in the original currency defined for either the user or task. If the currency field is from a compensation task, then the corporate currency is used. If the currency field is not from a compensation task, then the user's currency is used.

o User's Currency - Select this option to convert all currency fields to the currency of the users in the report. For currency fields that are from a compensation task, the conversion uses the exchange rate that is current at the time of the task. Note: The salaries will display in the report output in the corresponding user's currency.

o Pick a Currency - Select this option to convert all currency fields to the currency selected in the drop-down. The drop-down displays all currencies that are enabled for the portal. If the currency field is from a compensation task, then the conversion uses the exchange rate that is current at the time of the task. If the currency field is not from a compensation task, then the conversion uses the exchange rate that is current at the time the report is run.

Click here to view output examples.

OutputThe output assumes the following configurations:

FIELDS SELECTED FOR REPORT VALUE

User Name Curtis Simms

36




FIELDS SELECTED FOR REPORT VALUE

Current Salary 150,000 USD

Task Bonus 24,000 INR

Original Currency

User's Currency

Pick a Currency (JPY)

37


When editing the currency options, click the REFRESH button to update the results in the report preview.

38


Create Custom Report - Field Filters TabCustom Reports Deprecation: Cornerstone will be deprecating the legacy reporting solution "Custom Reports" with the February ’21 Release. For more information, see the announcement in the August '20 release notes and in the August '20 Release Summary & Matrix.

The Field Filters tab enables you to filter the report fields in order to narrow down the report results or get more specific results, such as selecting a date range for your data. Once the filters are defined, you can refresh the report preview panel to update the report results.

The data that is available to you when you filter a report is dependent upon the same constraints that are defined for you for the custom report. For example, if you filter by an organizational unit (OU), and your permission is constrained to users within a certain Division OU, then you will not be able to see report data for users in any other Division OUs.

Add Filters - Drag and Drop FieldsFields can be added by dragging the field from the Fields panel and dropping it into the Type or drag a field here box on the Field Filters tab. An operator drop-down and value field automatically populate to the right of the field name. Select an operator, and then enter a value.

You can add additional filters by dragging and dropping fields into the Type or drag a field here box. The box automatically appears each time you add a new filter.

Add Filters - Manually Enter Field NameEnter a full or partial field name in the Type or drag a field here box in the Field Filters tab. When text is entered, the box filters to display the matching field names. Select the desired field from the drop-down to add the field to the Field Filters tab.

You can add additional filters by entering new key words into the Type or drag a field here box. The box automatically appears each time you add a new filter.

39




Change Filter SelectionYou can change the field that is selected in an individual filter on the Field Filters tab in the following ways:

o Click the drop-down in the filter and select a different field. All fields available for the report display in the drop-down.

o Enter a different field name in the Type or drag a field here box.

Changing the field selection clears any operator or value entered for the previous field.

Multi-Select ValuesFor filters that have multi-select options for the field value, the options display in a drop-down. One or more values can be selected by clicking the box to the left of the value. Click the Check all option to select all values for the field. Click Uncheck all to deselect all values for the field.

40


Refresh Report PreviewOnce the filters are defined, click the REFRESH button to update the report results. The report preview panel updates to display all report results that match the filter criteria.

Remove FilterYou can delete a filter by clicking the Remove icon to the right of value field.

Additional Custom Reporting ResourcesSee the following additional custom reporting resources:

o Create Custom Transcript Report - This page provides detailed instructions for creating Custom Transcript Reports.

o Create Performance Review Report - This page provides detailed instructions for creating Custom Performance Review Reports.

o Custom Reporting Field Descriptions - Connect Communities - This page provides field descriptions for Custom Connect Communities Reports.

o Custom Reporting Field Descriptions - ILT Instructors Fields - This page provides descriptions for ILT Instructors fields.

o Custom Reporting Field Descriptions - ILT Session Schedule (Part Level) Fields - This page provides descriptions for ILT Session Schedule (Part Level) fields.

o Custom Reporting Field Descriptions - Job Pool Succession - This page provides field descriptions for Custom Job Pool Succession Reports.

o Custom Reporting Field Descriptions - Training Request Forms Fields - This page provides descriptions for Training Request Forms fields.

o Custom Reporting Field Descriptions - Training Fields - This page provides descriptions for Training fields.

o Custom Reporting Field Descriptions - Transaction Fields - This page provides descriptions for Transaction fields.

o Custom Reporting Field Descriptions - Transcript Fields - This page provides descriptions for Transcript fields.

41


o Custom Reporting Field Descriptions - User Fields - This page provides descriptions for User fields.

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)How can I set a date field to give me a date range of data?When working with date fields, filters are a great way to limit your results to a specific time period or a date range. The first step is to add to the date field to the Field Filters tab. To add the field to the tab:

1. Hover over the field column. This enables a down arrow to appears to the right of the field name.

2. Click the down arrow. This enables a drop-down list to appear.3. Click the Add Filter option in the drop-down. This adds the field to the Field Filters tab.

Note: You can also add the field from within the Field Filters tab by entering the field name into the text box on the Field Filters tab and selecting the field from the predictive search results.

The next step is to define the date range for the field. To do this:

1. Click the drop-down to the right of the field name. This displays the list of date options.2. Select a date filter. If using a filter that requires a specific date, then select the date in

the date field to the right of the date filter.

3. Click REFRESH to refresh the report preview and view the filtered data.

42


Create Custom Report - Field Options Drop-DownCustom Reports Deprecation: Cornerstone will be deprecating the legacy reporting solution "Custom Reports" with the February ’21 Release. For more information, see the announcement in the August '20 release notes and in the August '20 Release Summary & Matrix.

For each field in the report preview panel, field configuration options are available in a drop-down. From here, you can add the field to the Field Filters, Sort, and Summary tabs. You can also delete a field and configure aggregate functions.

Field OptionsThe following options are available, depending on the field types:

Add FilterThis option is available for all field types. Click this option to add the field to the Field Filters panel. This allows you to quickly apply a filter to the field.

SumThis option is available for numeric fields only. This displays the sum of all values for the field. When selected, the column name changes to <Sum [Field Name]>. To remove the sum function, select Remove Sum from the drop-down.

AverageThis option is available for numeric fields only. This displays the average of all values for the field.

Minimum

43




This option is available for numeric fields only. This displays the minimum value for the field.

MaxThis option is available for numeric fields only. This displays the maximum value for the field.

CountThis option allows you to get a total count of the values within a field. When you select the Count option, the word "Count" is added to the title of the column.

For example, you are creating a Transaction Custom Report and would like to know the total number of credit and debit transactions in your portal. You add the Transaction User field and the Transaction Type field to the report. You apply the Count option to the Transaction User field, and then you click REFRESH. The report preview shows an aggregate of the number of transactions within each transaction type. You click the Add Filter option in the field filters drop-down for the Transaction Type field. This adds the Transaction Type field to the Field Filters tab. You configure the filter on the Field Filters tab so that the Transaction Type field is equal to "Credit" and "Debit." You refresh the report so that only credit and debit transactions appear in the count. This gives you to the total number of credit and debit transactions in your portal.

Count UniqueThis option allows you to get a total count of the unique values within a field. When you select the Count Unique option, the words "Count Unique" are added to the title of the column.

For example, you are creating a Training Custom Report and would like to know the total number of training items that are in each training type. This will help you see which training types have the most training items and which training types have the least training items. To do this, you add the Training Type field and the Training Title field to the report. For the Training Title field, you apply the Count Unique option from the field options drop-down. You click REFRESH. The report preview shows a list of each training type along with the number of training items within each training type.

44


SortClick the Sort link to add the field to the Sort tab. This opens the Sort tab and allows you to configure the sort options for the field. The report results can only be sorted by a maximum number of columns. Once the maximum number is reached, additional columns cannot be added to the sort order. The columns still appear in the results but appear in the order in which they display in the report preview panel after the sorted columns. Note: This option is disabled when the maximum number of sorted fields has been reached on the Sort tab.

Summarize

45


Click the Summarize link to add the field to the last row of the Summary tab. This automatically opens the Summary tab and allows you to configure the summarizing options for the field. Only a maximum number of fields can be summarized. Once the maximum number is reached, additional fields cannot be summarized.

Note: If there are no fields on the Summary tab when the field is added from the report preview panel, then the field displays as the first field on the Summary tab.

Note: The Summarize option is disabled when the maximum number of summarized fields has been reached on the Summary tab.

Remove This option is available for all field types. Click the Trash Can icon to remove the field from the report. Note: Fields cannot be removed from the Field Filters panel if the field also appears as a filter.

Note: For numeric fields that are already aggregated, the associated and other aggregate option is disabled. For example, if viewing the Sum Training Hours field, the Sum option is disabled in the drop-down, and the Average, Minimum, and Maximum options are also disabled. To change the aggregate function configured for a field, you must click the Remove <Function Name> option from the drop-down before you can select a different aggregate function for the field.

Duplicate an Aggregated FieldFields that are configured with aggregate functions (sum, average, minimum, max) can be duplicated in the report preview. This allows you to configure two or more aggregate functions for the same field. Note: Fields can only be duplicated up to the maximum number of aggregate options available for the field.

There are two ways to duplicate an aggregated field:

1. Drag the aggregated field to a Type or drag a field here box. This duplicates the field and also automatically applies the next available aggregate option to the field.

2. Type the field name directly into a Type or drag a field here box. This searches for the field and allows you to add the field from the search results. Once the field is added, the next available aggregate option is automatically added to the field.

When there are no additional aggregates left to add, the field can no longer be duplicated. An error message displays indicating that the field cannot be added and that you must remove all of the aggregates in order to add the field.

46


Create Custom Report - Report Folder OptionsCustom Reports Deprecation: Cornerstone will be deprecating the legacy reporting solution "Custom Reports" with the February ’21 Release. For more information, see the announcement in the August '20 release notes and in the August '20 Release Summary & Matrix.

The report folder drop-down displays the custom reports folder hierarchy and enables you to move reports into a designated folder. By default, the Custom Reports folder displays in the drop-down.

Move ReportTo move a report to a specific folder, click the report folder drop-down. This opens a list of available folders. Click the folder name. This adds the report to the folder.

47




Create Custom Report - Multi-Module ReportsCustom Reports Deprecation: Cornerstone will be deprecating the legacy reporting solution "Custom Reports" with the February ’21 Release. For more information, see the announcement in the August '20 release notes and in the August '20 Release Summary & Matrix.

Custom Multi-Module Reports allow you to create a custom report that include fields from multiple different modules in a single report.

When configuring a Multi-Module report in the Custom Report Builder, the Fields panel displays a Module drop-down. The Module drop-down displays all modules that are available based on your permissions and your portal's configurations. Selecting a module displays all available field types from which you can select the desired fields for that module. Select a different module to display the fields that are available for that module.

The process of selecting fields, defining field filters, sorting, summarizing, etc., is the same as when creating other types of custom reports with the Custom Report Builder.

Competency/Performance Review Tasks Note: Multi-module reports for competency tasks and performance review tasks are associated only by user; they are not associated by task. If you are reporting on competencies assessed as part of review tasks, it is recommended that you use the Performance Review Report instead.

PermissionsThe permissions for Custom Multi-Module Reports control the visibility of the modules (i.e., Performance, Recruiting) for the report, as well as the field sections that are available for each module. For example, the Transaction section will not display in the Fields panel for the Learning module if you do not have the Custom Transaction Report - Create or Custom Transaction Report - View permission.

PERMISSION NAME




Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics

Custom Compensation

Grants ability to create and edit custom Compensation reports. This permission can be

Reports - Analytics

48




Report - Create constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, User, User's Subordinates, and User's Direct Subordinates.



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics

49




Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics

Custom Recruiting Grants ability to create and edit Custom Recruiting Reports -

50


Report - Create reports. This permission can be constrained by Division, Position, Location, and User's Direct Subordinates.

Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics

51




Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics


Grants ability to create and edit Custom Training (Catalog) reports. This permission can be constrained by Provider. Note: When the constraint is set for the permission, users will only be able to view training data for the constrained providers.

Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics

52


53


Create Custom Report - Name the ReportCustom Reports Deprecation: Cornerstone will be deprecating the legacy reporting solution "Custom Reports" with the February ’21 Release. For more information, see the announcement in the August '20 release notes and in the August '20 Release Summary & Matrix.

Naming the report in the Custom Report Builder is required in order to save the report. The SAVE button is not enabled until a report title is entered. The name of the report displays at the top left of the Custom Report Builder page and can be defined and edited at any time during the report configuration process. The report name should be descriptive and meaningful.

To name the report:

1. Enter a title in the Report Title field in the upper left corner of the page. The field accepts alphanumeric characters and the following special characters:o -o _o (o )o "o 'o .o ,o [o ]

2. Once a report name is entered, the SAVE button is enabled.

54




Create Custom Report - Report PreviewCustom Reports Deprecation: Cornerstone will be deprecating the legacy reporting solution "Custom Reports" with the February ’21 Release. For more information, see the announcement in the August '20 release notes and in the August '20 Release Summary & Matrix.

The report preview section allows you to view the report results as you build the report. The preview helps you decide which fields to include in the report to ensure that you ascertain the desired report data.

Up to 50 rows of report data display in the preview. If a field's value is longer than 20 characters, hover over the value to display a pop-up of the full value.

Note: The report preview is not considered the actual report. In order to view your actual generated report, enter a title in the Report Title field and click Save to save the report. Then, navigate to the main custom reports page and select View, Excel, or Print in the Actions drop-down for the specific report to view your report results.

Refresh ResultsEach time you add a field to the preview, the results update automatically. You can also manually update the results by clicking the REFRESH button. When the report data is out of date, an Exclamation icon displays in the REFRESH button to indicate that the report data needs to be refreshed.

When filters in the Field Filters panel are added or modified, the report results must be manually refreshed.

55




Maximum Number of RecordsEnter the maximum number of records that should be returned in the report. The default value is 75,000. The maximum value that can be entered in the field is 999,999. Enter a value of zero to not have a limit.

An Excel output accommodates 65,000 rows. The HTML Printable Version is only recommended when viewing less than 20,000 rows.

As with existing functionality, the value in the Maximum number of records field must be a positive whole number.

OptionsThe following options are available in the OPTIONS button drop-down. The options are only available if the report is summarized and only apply to the printable and Excel versions of the report, as well as when the report is run.




ActionsThe following actions are available in the ACTIONS button drop-down:

o Print Preview - Click Print Preview to create a printable preview of the report. This option only appears for users with permission to preview custom reports. This option does not display when the report output exceeds 30,000 rows.

o Excel Preview - Click Excel to export the report preview to Excel. This option only appears for users with permission to preview custom reports.



56


Remove All ColumnsClick Remove All Columns to remove all of the fields that you have selected for the report. This opens a confirmation pop-up. Click YES to remove all fields in the report. This clears the report preview panel and all selections in the tabs above the preview. Or, click NO to cancel the removal action.

Column SortingAscending/DescendingThe columns in the report preview panel can be sorted in ascending and descending order by clicking the arrow to the right of the column name. Clicking the down arrow resorts the column in descending order. Clicking the up arrow resorts the column in ascending order. Note: This option is disabled when the maximum number of sorted fields has been reached on the Sort tab.

View Sort OrderTo view the sort order for the column, hover the mouse over the column name. This opens a tooltip that displays "<Field Name> is sorted <Ascending/Descending> and is the <Sort Order Number> sort level."

See also:

o See Create Custom Report - Field Options Drop-Down on page 43 for additional information.

57


Create Custom Report - Requisition/OU FiltersCustom Reports Deprecation: Cornerstone will be deprecating the legacy reporting solution "Custom Reports" with the February ’21 Release. For more information, see the announcement in the August '20 release notes and in the August '20 Release Summary & Matrix.

When configuring custom Recruiting reports, the User/OU Filters tab is named Requisition/OU Filters. The Requisition/OU Filters tab allows report data to be constrained by the Location organizational unit (OU) that is defined for the job requisition.

Requisition/OU FiltersThe Requisition/OU Filters tab displays a Requisition Criteria option. This option allows the report to be constrained by the employees/applicants who meet the OU criteria defined in the field. The following criteria options are available in the Select Criteria drop-down:

o Divisiono Positiono Location

The number of results displays in parentheses to the right of the drop-down.

Constraint BehaviorThe reporting constraints use the OR logic within the same OU criteria and use AND logic for inter-OU type.

For example, an organization sets up constraints for Location OU Korea and Position OU Sales. By using the OR logic within the same OU criteria and the AND logic for inter-OU type, the report only shows Location OU Korea and Position OU Sales.

Reporting works this way to account for privacy laws. If OR logic was used for inter-OU type, when the report is run it would include requisitions from Location OU Korea or Position OU Sales. With such a report, requisitions for Location OU Germany and Position OU Sales might also be returned.

58




Create Custom Report - Select Report FieldsCustom Reports Deprecation: Cornerstone will be deprecating the legacy reporting solution "Custom Reports" with the February ’21 Release. For more information, see the announcement in the August '20 release notes and in the August '20 Release Summary & Matrix.

The Fields panel that displays on the left side of the Custom Report Builder page enables you to select the fields to include in the report. You can select fields from the list of fields that display in each field type section of the Fields panel. Or, you can use the Type or drag a field here box that displays above the report preview panel.

Fields PanelOnce you select a report in the report type drop-down, the associated fields display in the Fields panel.

The following options are available in the upper portion of the panel:

ShowThe Show drop-down enables you to filter the field types that display in the Fields panel. By default, all fields display for each field type.

The selections made in the Field Type section enable you to display fields defined as standard custom report fields or custom fields. The filters in the Data Type section enable you to only display only fields that are defined as a text, numeric, date, or yes/no type fields. The filter options can be selected in either or both sections.

59




Click the Show drop-down to select one or more of the following field categories by which to filter each field type in the Fields panel:

o Standard Fields - Checking this box displays all applicable standard fields for the report type. You can filter the standard fields that display by selecting the Text, Numeric, Date, or True/False box.

o Custom Fields - Checking this box displays all applicable custom fields for the report type. You can filter the custom fields that display by selecting the Text, Numeric, Date, or True/False box.

o Text - Checking this box filters the standard and custom fields that display in each field type section to display only text fields.

o Numeric - Checking this box filters the standard and custom fields that display in each field type section to display only numeric fields.

o Date - Checking this box filters the standard and custom fields that display in each field type section to display only date fields.

o Yes/No - Checking this box filters the standard and custom fields that display in each field type section to display only Yes/No fields.

Clicking the Field type link selects/deselects all filters in the Field Type section. Clicking the Data type link selects/deselects all filters in the Data Type section.

As the filters are selected, the fields in each field type section update to display only the fields that meet the filter criteria.

To close the Show field drop-down, click anywhere outside the drop-down.

60


Show All FieldsThe Show All Fields option at the top of the Show field drop-down provides a one-click way to clear all of the filter selections in the drop-down and display all fields in the panel.

SearchThe search feature allows you to filter the Fields panel so that only field sections that contain fields that match the search criteria display. To filter the panel, enter a search term in the search box, and then click the Search icon. The Fields panel refreshes to display only the field type sections that contain fields that match the search criteria. The number of matching fields displays in parentheses to the right of the field section name.

Field Type SectionsEach field type section displays the fields associated with the field type. Each field is

identified within the section as text , numeric , date , or True/False .

Add Fields to ReportThe following are the various ways to add fields to the report:

o Click the field name in the field type section.o Drag and drop the field into the Type or drag a field here box.o Enter a field name in the Type or drag a field here box.

In addition, there are two areas to which fields can be added:

61


o Report preview sectiono Field Filters tab - Note: Fields can only be added to this tab by dragging and dropping

the field name from the Fields panel or by selecting the field from the field selection drop-down on the Field Filters tab.

When you click a field name, the field is automatically added to the report preview section as a separate column. Any report data associated with the field displays in the preview section.

Add Fields - Click Field NameClick the name of a field in the field type section. This automatically adds the field to the first available column in the report preview section. Note: Double-clicking the field name is not necessary. Clicking once will add the field to the report.

Add Fields - Drag and DropWhen dragging and dropping a field, you can add the field to either the report preview section or the Field Filters tab.

Report Preview SectionTo drag and drop a field to the report preview section, click the field name and drag it to the Type or drag a field here box. The field displays in the preview panel and creates a new Type or drag a field here box in the panel.

Field Filters TabTo drag and drop a field to the Field Filters tab, click the field name and drag it to the blank field box in the tab. An operator drop-down and value field automatically populate to the right of the field name.

Add Fields - Manually Enter Field Name - Report Preview PanelEnter a full or partial field name in the Type or drag a field here box. When text is entered, the drop-down in the Type or drag a field here box filters to display the matching field names. Select the desired field from the drop-down to add the field to the report.

62


Add Fields - Manually Enter Field Name - Field Filters TabEnter a full or partial field name in the blank box in the Field Filters tab. When text is entered, the box filters to display the matching field names. Select the desired field from the drop-down to add the field to the report.

Field OptionsOptions are available in a drop-down for each field that displays in the report preview section. The following options are available, depending on the field type:

o Filter - This option is available for all field types. Click this option to add the field to the Field Filters panel.

o Sum - This option is available for numeric fields only. This is current functionality that displays the sum of all values for the field.

o Average - This option is available for numeric fields only. This is current functionality that displays the average of all values for the field.

o Minimum - This option is available for numeric fields only. This is current functionality that displays the minimum value for the field.

o Maximum - This option is available for numeric fields only. This is current functionality that displays the maximum value for the field.

o Sort - Click this option to add the field to the Sort tab. Fields display in the tab in the order in which they are added. See Create Custom Report - Sort Tab on page 72 for additional information.

o Summarize - Click this option to add the field to the Summary tab. Fields display in the tab in the order in which they are added. See Create Custom Report - Summary Tab on page 75 for additional information.

63


o Remove - This option is available for all field types. Click Remove in the drop-down to remove the field from the report. Note: This does not remove the field from the Field Filters, Sort, or Summary tab.

Note: For numeric fields that are already aggregated, the associated aggregate option is disabled. For example, if viewing the Sum Training Hours field, the Sum option is disabled in the drop-down.

Calculated FieldsAdd Calculated FieldThe option to add a calculated field displays in the Calculated Fields field type section. Clicking the plus icon opens the Calculated Field Wizard. Once the field is created, the field is added to the list of fields in the Calculated Fields field type section and adds the field to the report preview.

Note: Calculated fields can only be used in summarized reports.

Edit/Copy/Remove Calculated FieldThe options to edit, copy, or delete a calculated field still appear in a drop-down but are now available by hovering over the right arrow icon at the end of the field row. This enables the following options to appear:

o Edit - Click Edit to open the Edit/Copy Calculated Field Wizard. When editing a calculated field, the report preview does not automatically update to show the changes to the report results. You must click REFRESH to update the report preview.

o Copy - Click Copy to open the Edit/Copy Calculated Field Wizard. When copying a calculated field, the field is added to the list of fields in the Calculated Fields field type section and adds the field to the report preview. You must click REFRESH to update the report preview.

o Remove - Click Remove to delete the calculated field from the field type section.

See Create Calculated Field on page 455 for additional information.

64


OU Parent ValueYou can report on the parent value for all organizational units (OU) in custom reports. The parent OU of all OU types will be available in the User section of custom reports. This also includes the Multi-Module Custom Report.

The field will display the parent OU values for the user. Standard and custom OU types will be supported.

65


66


Additional Custom Reporting ResourcesSee the following additional custom reporting resources:

o Create Custom Transcript Report - This page provides detailed instructions for creating Custom Transcript Reports.

o Create Performance Review Report - This page provides detailed instructions for creating Custom Performance Review Reports.

o Custom Reporting Field Descriptions - Connect Communities - This page provides field descriptions for Custom Connect Communities Reports.

o Custom Reporting Field Descriptions - ILT Instructors Fields - This page provides descriptions for ILT Instructors fields.

o Custom Reporting Field Descriptions - ILT Session Schedule (Part Level) Fields - This page provides descriptions for ILT Session Schedule (Part Level) fields.

o Custom Reporting Field Descriptions - Job Pool Succession - This page provides field descriptions for Custom Job Pool Succession Reports.

o Custom Reporting Field Descriptions - Training Request Forms Fields - This page provides descriptions for Training Request Forms fields.

o Custom Reporting Field Descriptions - Training Fields - This page provides descriptions for Training fields.

o Custom Reporting Field Descriptions - Transaction Fields - This page provides descriptions for Transaction fields.

o Custom Reporting Field Descriptions - Transcript Fields - This page provides descriptions for Transcript fields.

o Custom Reporting Field Descriptions - User Fields - This page provides descriptions for User fields.

67


Create Custom Report - Select Report TypeCustom Reports Deprecation: Cornerstone will be deprecating the legacy reporting solution "Custom Reports" with the February ’21 Release. For more information, see the announcement in the August '20 release notes and in the August '20 Release Summary & Matrix.

When creating a custom report you can select the report type by defining it on the Analytics page or by selecting the type in the report type field on the Custom Report Builder page.

The report types that are available to select are dependent upon the user's permission constraints.

Select Report Type from Analytics PageFrom the Analytics page, click the New drop-down. This displays a list of custom report types that are available for you to create. Click the name of the custom report type. This opens the Custom Report Builder with the selected report type populated in the report type drop-down.

Select Report Type from Custom Report Builder PageFrom the Custom Report Builder page, click the report type drop-down. This displays a list of custom report types that are available for you to create. Click the name of the custom

68




report type. This refreshes the page to displays the fields that are available for the selected report type.

Changing the Report TypeYou can change the report type at any time while creating a report. However, if at least one filter or field is defined for the current report type, the configurations for the current report type are not saved.

69


Create Custom Report - Sharing TabCustom Reports Deprecation: Cornerstone will be deprecating the legacy reporting solution "Custom Reports" with the February ’21 Release. For more information, see the announcement in the August '20 release notes and in the August '20 Release Summary & Matrix.

The Sharing tab enables you to define the users with whom to share the report. The selected users cannot modify or edit the report. The selected users must have the appropriate permissions to view the custom report.

Share ReportTo share the report:

1. Click the Select Criteria drop-down. This displays the OUs from which you can select to view the report.

2. Select an OU. This enables the Select icon to appear to the right of the Select Criteria drop-down.

3. Click the Select icon . This opens the Select [OU Name] pop-up. Note: If "User" is selected in the Select Criteria drop-down, then the Select User pop-up opens.

4. Click the Add icon to the left of the OU name. Note: If "User" is selected in the Select Criteria drop-down, then select the individual users with whom to share the report.

5. Click DONE. This closes the pop-up and adds the selections to the Sharing tab.

For shared reports, the data is refreshed once per day, which is the same rate as the refresh rate for the report that the report creator sees.

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)Do the shared users receive the same report that I receive?When sharing a scheduled report, the users you select on the Sharing tab will receive the same report that you receive at the scheduled interval that you set on the Schedule tab. However, the data that is visible in the report is dependent upon the permission constraints for each shared user.

What will the shared users see in the report if their report permission is constrained?The information that is available to the shared users is the information that is within their permission constraints. For example, you share a Custom Transcript Report with managers

70




in other departments. The managers have the Custom Transcript Reports - View permission, and the permission is constrained by User Self and Subordinates. In the report you have included the User Full Name field, which means that users' names will be visible in the report. When the other managers receive the shared report at the scheduled interval, the report will only show data for the managers' direct reports.

Why aren't my shared users getting the report?o Be sure to check the Schedule report for shared users also field on the Schedule tab

when configuring the report schedule.o Be sure that the users with whom you have shared the report have the associated

report permission. All custom reports have a Create permission and a View permission. If you are the user who created the report, then you will have the Create permission (this permission also allows you to view the report you have created). Your shared users will need the View permission, which allows them to view the report that is shared with them. If they do not have this permission, then they will not get the report, regardless of whether or not you have added their name to the Sharing tab.For example, you add three users to the Sharing tab for a Custom Transcript Report. You schedule the report to run weekly and select the Schedule report for shared users also field on the Schedule tab. When the report runs, none of your users receive the report. You check their permissions and see that none of the users have the Custom Transcript Reports - View permission. You assign the permission to the users to ensure that the users receive the report.

How can my shared users edit a shared report?Shared users cannot edit the report that is shared with them. However, if they copy the report, they can edit the copied version.

A report was shared with me. Why aren't I getting the report in an email?Shared reports are not sent via email. The shared report is only available to you in your list of reports on the main custom reports page.

I set up delivery for my report, but the users I shared it with aren't getting it in their email. Why not?Report delivery via email is only available for the user who created the report. The report cannot be delivered via email to the shared users.

For shared users, the report is only accessible from their main custom reports page.

71


Create Custom Report - Sort TabCustom Reports Deprecation: Cornerstone will be deprecating the legacy reporting solution "Custom Reports" with the February ’21 Release. For more information, see the announcement in the August '20 release notes and in the August '20 Release Summary & Matrix.

The Sort tab enables you to define the sort order of the fields you selected for the report. By sorting the report fields, you can define which column displays first, and so forth, in the report output.

The report can only be sorted into a maximum number of four fields. Once the maximum number is reached, the report cannot be sorted into additional fields.

Sort ReportTo sort fields on the report, the fields must be added to the Sort tab. Fields are added by dragging and dropping fields from the Fields panel to the blank sort boxes on the Sort tab.

You can also add fields by clicking the name of the field in the Report Preview panel, which automatically places the field in the next available sort box, up to the maximum of four fields. Once you have reached the maximum number of sorted fields, an additional field cannot be added until at least one field is removed from the Sort tab.

Each sort row in the tab can only contain one field.

Note: Columns can also be sorted within the report preview panel. See Create Custom Report - Report Preview on page 55 for additional information.

72




Reorder Fields on Sort TabIf multiple fields are added to the Sort tab, you can define the sort order by dragging and dropping the fields into the desired order on the tab.

Show All ItemsThe Show All Items drop-down displays to the right of each sort box. Clicking the drop-down shows all fields that are available for sorting, as well as the "None" option. You can select one of the fields from the drop-down to add the field to the sort. Or, select "None" to not sort the report by additional fields.

Sort Field Data in Ascending/Descending OrderThe data in the sorted fields can be sorted in ascending or descending order by clicking the Ascending or Descending icon to the right of the field.

73


Delete Sorted FieldYou can delete fields from the Sort tab by clicking the Delete icon to the right of the field name. This deletes the field from the Sort tab but does not delete the field from the report.

Update Report ResultsTo update the report preview panel with the new sort order, click REFRESH. This updates the sort order number of the column in the report preview.

74


Create Custom Report - Summary TabCustom Reports Deprecation: Cornerstone will be deprecating the legacy reporting solution "Custom Reports" with the February ’21 Release. For more information, see the announcement in the August '20 release notes and in the August '20 Release Summary & Matrix.

The Summary tab enables you to summarize the data in the report based on certain fields.

Summarize Fields Example:1

Summarize FieldsTo summarize fields for the report, the fields must be added to the Summary tab. Fields are added by dragging and dropping fields from the Fields panel to the blank summary boxes on the Summary tab. Up to four fields can be summarized. Once you have reached the maximum number of summarized fields, an additional field cannot be added until at least one field is removed from the Summary tab.

Each summary row in the tab can only contain one field.1 A Human Resources Manager would like to create a report that displays all direct reports for all managers in the organization. She creates a custom User report that includes the User First Name, User Last Name, and User Manager Name fields. On the Summarize tab, she selects User Manager Name in the Summarize By field. She also sorts the report on the Sort tab by User Manager Name, then by User First Name, and then by User Last name. The first column in the report results displays all of the managers in the organization who have direct reports and also groups each manager's direct reports under each manager's name. This allows the Human Resources Manager to quickly view all of the direct reports for each manager in the organization in a single report.

75




The following options are available for each field:

o Ascending/Descending - Click the Ascending/Descending icon to the right of the field to put into ascending or descending order.

o Delete - Click the Trash Can icon to delete the field from the Summary tab. This does not delete the field from the report.

o View as Hierarchy - If an OU criterion is selected from the Summarize by drop-down list, then a View as hierarchy option is available to the right of the field. If this option is selected, the report data is automatically displayed in a hierarchical manner. The Then by drop-down option is automatically set to User Full Name and cannot be modified. If the View as hierarchy option is not selected, the Then by drop-down is active.

o Include Percentage summary column - Check the box to display the percentage in the report. The percentages only display in the report output. The percentages in the report output display based on the value in the Maximum number of records field.

o Overall Percentage - Select this option to display percentages relative to the total record count of the report.

o Hierarchical Percentage - Select this option to display percentages relative to the parent level in the hierarchy or summary. These percentages are a flexible percentage that is configurable at different levels of the report. For example, if Division A has a Transcript status of Completed, the percentages are calculated based on the total number at the Division level. If Division A has 500 people and Completed has 50 people, the hierarchical percentages are calculated out of 500 people (10%).

o Include grand summaries at bottom - Select this option to include a grand summary row at the bottom of the report for all summarized fields. Note: This option is only available if the data is summarized.

Note: Columns can also be summarized within the report preview panel. See Create Custom Report - Report Preview on page 55 for additional information.

Reorder Fields on Summary TabIf multiple fields are added to the Summary tab, you can define the sort order by dragging and dropping the fields into the desired order on the tab.

Update Report ResultsTo update the report preview panel with the new summary order, click REFRESH. The report preview panel is updated to display the summary view of the report results.

In the summary view of the report preview panel, a drop-down displays for each summarized field. The drop-down includes the following options:

o Summarize - Click this option to open the Summary tab. This option does not display for fields configured to display percentages.

o Remove <Name of Summarized Field> <Number of Summary Field> - This option displays as a separate option in the drop-down for each summarized field. Clicking the option removes the associated summarized field. Note: If the Hierarchical Percentage view is checked on the Summary tab, then the Remove option displays for the top level summarized field.

76


o Remove All Summarization - Click this option to remove all summary configurations from the Summary tab.

77


Create Custom Report - User/OU FiltersCustom Reports Deprecation: Cornerstone will be deprecating the legacy reporting solution "Custom Reports" with the February ’21 Release. For more information, see the announcement in the August '20 release notes and in the August '20 Release Summary & Matrix.

The User/OU Filters tab enables you to filter the results by user and OU criteria. The selected criteria filter the results to display only the results that apply to the criteria.

To filter by user/OU, select the user or OU criteria from the drop-down in the Select Criteria field. Then, click the Select icon in the drop-down to select the user or OU filter. This adds the filter to the User Criteria section. The number of filter criteria selected displays in parentheses above the drop-down. Check the Include Subordinates box to include subordinates.

To view the results in the report preview, click the REFRESH button. This updates the report preview panel with the matching results.

78




Custom Report Types

79


Custom Report TypesCustom Reports Deprecation: Cornerstone will be deprecating the legacy reporting solution "Custom Reports" with the February ’21 Release. For more information, see the announcement in the August '20 release notes and in the August '20 Release Summary & Matrix.

Below is a list of the available reports types in the custom reports tools and available field sections within each report type.

o Assignment: Assignment, User, Training, Transcripto Certification: User, Training, Transcript, Certifications, User Status Informationo Compensation: User, Current Compensation, Compensation Task, User Status

Informationo Competency: User, Competency, User Status Informationo Connect Communities: Community, Topic, Postingo Connect (Old): Connect Profile, Community, Topic, Posting (This report type returns

results on old Connect functionality)o Curriculum Training: Curriculum, Training (Use this report to compare curriculum data

from multiple system areas)o Curriculum Transcript: Assignment, User, Training, Transcript, Training Request Forms,

On the Job Training, Curriculumo Development Plan: User, Dev Plan, Dev Plan Comments (available for organizations

using the redesigned Development Plans functionality), User Status Informationo Engage Response: Campaigns, Questions, Responseso Evaluations: User, Training, Transcript, ILT Session Schedule (Part Level), Evaluations,

User Status Informationo Forms: User, Form Tasks, Form Attributes, Form Fields, Form Approvalso Goals: User, Goal, Targets, Tasks, User Status Informationo Job Pool Succession: Job Pool Task, Position Criteria, Incumbent, Successoro Multi-Module: All

Recruiting Report Permission Note: The permission for creating Recruiting custom reports is not needed in order to view the Recruiting Module of the Multi-Module Custom Report. However, even if the user has permission to view the Recruiting Module and add the fields to the Multi-Module Custom Report, the data that is visible in the report is dependent upon the permissions needed to view the data within the system.

Recruiting Report Permission Constraints Note: The constraints for the Multi-Module report permission apply to the Recruiting Module section of the report. Constraints for the Multi-Module Custom Report are based on the organizational unit (OU) of the user listed in the report results, whereas constraints for Recruiting Custom Reports are based on the OU of the job requisition to which the user applied. Thus, if the permissions for Recruiting Custom Reports and Multi-Module Custom Reports have

80




the same constraints configured, then the data displayed in the two report types can still differ. Click here for an example.

Recruiting Report External Applicants Note: External applicants who were hired but who did not become internal users through the Manage Hired Applicants page will not have their internal data tied with external data. This means that the Multi-Module Custom Report will not be useful for external applicants, because internal data cannot be tied to the user as a result of their 's internal account being created in a different way and not having the same user name as the external applicant data.

User's Direct Subordinate Constraint: For detailed information about the User's Direct Subordinate constraint, see the User's Direct Subordinate Constraint topic in Online Help.

o NASD User: User, Training, Transcript, FINRA User, Regulatory Approvals, User Status Information

o Observation Checklist: User, Checklists, Competency, User Status Informationo Onboarding: Form, Form Approval, Onboarding - This report allows you to create

customized reports on employee onboarding data. The onboarding data can be used to make informed decisions about where new hires are having trouble in the onboarding process.

o Performance: User, Dev Plan, Competency, User Status Informationo Performance Review: User, Performance Review Task, Performance Review Step,

Performance Review Section, Performance Review Question, User Status Informationo Playlist - Playlist, Training, Usero Recruiting: Requisition, User, Recruiting Agency, Compliance Questions (both default

and custom compliance questions can be included in the report), Application Forms, Applications, Pre-Screening Questions, Historical Applicant Status, Interview Management and Scheduling, Offer Letter, Offer Letter Approval, Offer Letter Communication, Background Check, Cost Tracking, External Assessments, External Vendors, Selection, User Status Information, Calculated Fields

o Resume: User, Resume, User Status Informationo Succession: User, Succession Metrics & Planning, Career Preferences, User Status

Informationo Talent Pool: Talent Pool, Talent Pool Modification History, Nominations, Nomination

Modification History, Usero Test: User, Transcript, Test, User Status Informationo Training Form: User, Form Template, User Status Information - This report type returns

results on old forms completed via a curriculum.o Training Form Task: Training Form Task, Training Form Template, User, User Status

Information - This report type returns results on old forms completed via form tasks.o Training Plan: Training Plan Template, Training Plan, Training Request, Training

Forecast, Organizational Unit, User, Training, User Status Informationo Training: User, ILT Session Schedule (Part Level)o Training Unit Distributor: Assignment, Availability/Distribution

81


o Training Unit Key Code: Key Code, Assignment/Purchaseo Transaction: User, Training, Transcript, Transaction, ILT Session Schedule (Part Level),

ILT Seat Allocation, ILT Facility, User Status Information (Note: This report only reports on inventory purchase transactions when the purchased learning object (LO) is added to the user's transcript. For LOs that were purchased using inventory, there is no monetary amount associated with the transaction that places the LO in the user's transcript. The amount is tied to the initial inventory purchase, which is not included in the report.)

o Transcript: User, Training, Transcript, ILT Session Schedule (Part Level), ILT Seat Allocation, ILT Facility, Training Request Forms, SF-182 Request, User Status Information

o User: User, ILT Instructors, Social Feedback, Peers, User Status Information

Custom Field DescriptionsCustom field descriptions are available for certain custom field types in the OnDemand Support folder:

o See Custom Reporting Field Descriptions - ILT Instructors Fields for additional information.

o See Custom Reporting Field Descriptions - ILT Session Schedule (Part Level) Fields for additional information.

o See Custom Reporting Field Descriptions - Training Request Forms Fields for additional information.

o See Custom Reporting Field Descriptions - Training Fields for additional information.o See Custom Reporting Field Descriptions - Transaction Fields for additional

information.o See Custom Reporting Field Descriptions - Transcript Fields for additional information.o See Custom Reporting Field Descriptions - User Fields for additional information.

Custom Report TemplatesCustom report templates are available in the OnDemand Support folder. The templates provide basic set-up guidance to help you configure common custom reports.

o Custom Training Reportso Training Review Reporto Course Catalog Audit

o Custom Transcript Reportso Compliance Tracking

o Custom Evaluations Reportso Course Evaluations

o Custom User Reportso User Audit

o Custom Test Reports

82


o Test Scores Review

Sample Field TypesWithin each of these reports are columns that allow you to aggregate information in a variety of ways. Below is a sample list of types of fields available by section:

o Career Preferences - Comments, Completed, Date Career Profile Last Modified, Long-term Career Goal, Next Career Move, Relocation Areas, Willing to Relocate

o Competency - This is a dynamic area and is populated based on competencies created in Competency Models under Performance Management

o Compliance - Name of Certification, Current Status, Renewal Status, Credits Needed, Credits Earned, Training Area Name

o Connect - Connect Profile, Community, Topic and Posting sectionso Posting Average Rating field will pull in suggestion posting votes o Posting Number of Ratings field for suggestion posting types will pull in the

number of votes o Comments will now pull in Responses if the posting is a forum or Q&A posting

type o Dev Plan - Approval Date, Date Created, Description, Due Date, Status, Titleo Evaluations - Evaluator's name, response, type of evaluation, type of question askedo Form Task - Template Title, Status of Form, User Task Status, Start and End Date of

Task for Form Submissiono Form Template - Question, Question Type, Question Response, Template Titleo ILT Session Schedule - All of the fields in this category refer to details of an ILT Session

Part. Each part may have different times, locations, and instructors, so these fields allow users to report on that information. If any of the fields in the ILT Session Schedule field are activated, then a separate row for each session part will appear in the report output.

o Performance Report - Development plan fields will appear in this report typeo Resume - This section contains dynamically generated fields, based on the user who is

generating the report. If a resume field is inactive, it is not available in the Resume section. If a resume section is inactive, then none of the resume fields that correspond with the section are available in the Resume section.Note: If a resume field is included in a custom report and is made inactive after the report is generated, then the inactive resume field continues to appear in the custom report.

o Succession Management - Includes fields for all custom metrics and fields created as well as Task Name of SMP task. The fields will display the most recent score or value found based on the user selected for the report

o Tests - Score Received, Max Attempts, Question ID, Question Category, Question Type, Section, Title, Versiono Max Attempts - Displays the maximum number of attempts that is currently

allowed for that test. Please note that this number may have changed since the time the user took the test attempt.

83


o Question - Displays the text of the question answered. If the question is a multi-part question, only the main question is displayed, not the sub-parts.

o Question Correct Response - Displays the correct response for the questiono If the question is a multiple choice multiple answer question with multiple

correct answers, then they are separated by commaso If the question is a text-only question with multiple correct answers, then

they are separated by commaso Question User Response - Displays the response that the user selected. If it was

a multiple choice question, the responses selected are separated by commas. If the user did not answer the question (but the question was on n test submitted by the user) then this field will display "Not Answered".

o Question User Response Correct - Displays "Correct" if the Question User Response equals the Question Correct Response and "Incorrect" if not.o If the question is a text-only question with multiple correct answers, then the

Question User Response only has to equal one of the listings in the Question Correct Response field

o Training - Type (what training type is it), Version, Locator ID (session only), Description, Active (whether or not the course is currently active in the course catalog). *Fields created in "Custom Fields for Training" will also appear in this area in alphabetical order within the standard list of fields available.

o Transaction - Cost Center Charge, Type, Training Price, Delivery Fee, Processing Fee, Withdrawal Charge

o Transcript - Completion Date, Due Date, Registration Date, Score, Status, Time in Training (how much time was spent by the user in the course)o Assign Comments - Will display comments made from a proxy enrollment

assignment.o Registration Number - The number represents the incremental registration number

for recurring training. Each new registration will increase the registration by one. Use minimum and Maximum to get the most recent or oldest registration or include all. Note: Registration Number will not increment in the following scenario, thus making it possible to have two of the same registration number: If a new version of the training is assigned to a user when the user had the old version of the same training in any status that is NOT Complete. In this scenario, it is expected the user will have two line item registrations in the report, with the same registration number.

o User - Username, User ID, Original Hire Date, Manager Name, User Status (whether or not the user is active or inactive). This area can also include custom user fields that are fed over via client feed.

Note: If the "Location" or "Instructor" fields are selected in the Training category for an ILT session, then they will list the location and instructor for the first part of the session, even though these may differ for a multi-part session. To list the instructors and locations of each part of a session, the "Part Location" and "Part Instructor" fields must be selected in the ILT Session Schedule category.

84


Create Curriculum Training Custom ReportThe Curriculum Training custom report allows administrators to report on details from a curriculum structure, curriculum details from the Course Catalog, and curriculum version information from the user's transcript. Administrators can use the report to compare curriculum data from multiple system areas. This report type is available in Custom Reporting and in Reporting 2.0.

To create a custom Curriculum Training report, go to: REPORTS > CUSTOM REPORTS and click the NEW button to create a new report. Select the Curriculum Training report type.

Permissions

PERMISSION NAME


Custom Curriculum Training Report - Create

Grants ability to create and edit custom Curriculum Training reports. This permission can be constrained by provider.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Curriculum Training Report - View

Grants ability to view the results of custom Curriculum Training reports created by self or shared by others. This permission can be constrained by provider.

Reports - Analytics

85


Curriculum TrainingThe Curriculum Training report type includes the following two report field sections:

o Curriculum (new) Note: The fields in this new section are largely inherited from the custom Curriculum Transcript report.

o Training (existing)

Curriculum SectionThis new section is the ONLY section that should be used to filter for curriculum information related to the below listed fields. For example, to filter the report according to a curriculum's title, use the Curriculum Title (Curriculum) field within the Curriculum Training report. The Curriculum section includes the following fields:

FIELD NAME REPORT SECTION

FIELD DESCRIPTION FIELD TYPE

AFFECTED REPORTS

Course Code (Curriculum)

Curriculum This is the Course Code of the curriculum.

Text Curriculum Training Report

Created By (Name) (Curriculum)

Curriculum This is the name of the user who created the curriculum.


Created By (User ID) (Curriculum)

Curriculum This is the User ID of the user who created the curriculum.


Curriculum Title (Curriculum)

Curriculum This is the title of the curriculum.


Curriculum Version (Curriculum)

Curriculum This is the version number of the curriculum.

Numeric Curriculum Training Report

Keywords (Curriculum)

Curriculum This field displays the keywords associated with the curriculum via the Course Catalog.


Language (Curriculum)

Curriculum This field displays the language(s) in which the curriculum is available.


Latest Curriculum Version?

Curriculum This field displays a yes/no value, indicating whether or not the curriculum is the latest version.

Yes/No Curriculum Training Report

86




AFFECTED REPORTS

Last Modified By (Curriculum)

Curriculum This is the name of the user who last modified the curriculum.


Last Modified By (User ID) (Curriculum)

Curriculum This is the User ID of the user who last modified the curriculum.


Last Modified Date (Curriculum)

Curriculum This is the date on which the curriculum was last modified.

Date Curriculum Training Report

Training Active (Curriculum)

Curriculum This field displays whether or not the training is currently active.


Training Description (Curriculum)

Curriculum This is the description of the curriculum.


Training Deactivation Date (Curriculum)

Curriculum This is the deactivation date set for the curriculum (if applicable).


Training Object ID (Curriculum)

Curriculum This is the Object ID of the training. The Object ID will be propagated to all child training and curriculum sections to aid in filtering.


Training Purpose (Curriculum)

Curriculum This is the Training Purpose associated with the curriculum (if available).


Training Status (Curriculum)

Curriculum This is the training status of the curriculum.


Training Subject (Curriculum)

Curriculum This field displays the subjects that are associated with the curriculum via Course Catalog.


Training Type (Curriculum)

Curriculum This field displays the training type.


87




AFFECTED REPORTS

Training Version Effective Date (Curriculum)

Curriculum This is the training version effective date of the curriculum (if available).

Curriculum Training Report

Training SectionThe existing Training report field section that is included in the Curriculum Training report now contains the following new fields:

FIELD NAME

REPORT SECTION


AFFECTED REPORTS

Section Parent

Training This field displays the section title for the training, indicating what training belongs to which section. If a training item does not have sections, the curriculum title will display.


Required Training per Section

Training This field displays the number of required training items per section.


Display Sequence

Training This field is not visible in the field section and cannot be added as a report column, but administrators can use this field as a sorting option. It allows administrators to organize the report according to the order in which the sections and child training items are configured in the curriculum structure.


Sequence Training This field displays the order of training items within the curriculum structure.


Pay-Upfront Training This field displays a yes/no value, indicating whether or not the Pay-Upfront option was selected for the training.


Pre-Approved

Training This field displays a yes/no value, indicating whether or not the Pre-

Yes/No Curriculum Training

88


FIELD NAME

REPORT SECTION


AFFECTED REPORTS

Approved option was selected for the training.

Report

Auto-Register

Training This field displays a yes/no value, indicating whether or not the Auto-Register option was selected for the training.


Auto-Launch Training This field displays a yes/no value, indicating whether or not the Auto-Launch option was selected for the training.


Reassign Curriculum

Training This field displays a yes/no value, indicating whether or not the Reassign Curriculum Upon Test Failure option was selected for the training.


Max Attempts

Training This field displays the maximum number of times a user may attempt a test.


Due Date Criteria

Training This field displays the due date option selected at the training level. There are six possible values for this field:

o No Due Dates o Relative to Initial Assignment

Date o Relative to Most Recent

Assignment Date o Relative to Hire Date o Relative to Previous Step o Fixed Date


Fixed Due Date

Training This field displays the fixed date selected for the training. The date will display with its time stamp.


Relative Days (Due Date)

Training This field displays the number of days configured for each relative due date options, such as Initial


89


FIELD NAME

REPORT SECTION


AFFECTED REPORTS

Assignment Date, Most Recent Assignment Date, Hire Date, Previous Step, etc.

Training Latest Version?

Training This field displays a yes/no value to indicate whether or not training items in the curriculum are the latest versions from the Course Catalog.


Considerationso The Training section in this report is not intended to display information for the curricula

on users' transcripts; it is meant to report on training items within the curriculum. To report on data at the curriculum level, use Reporting 2.0 or the Transcript custom report.

o In the Training Type field, section type does not display.

Best PracticeTo optimize this report, sort the report by Curriculum Version and then by Display Sequence.

Basic Curriculum Training Report ExampleSee the table below for the fields recommended for a basic Curriculum Training report, along with additional considerations and recommendations.

FIELD NAME

EXPLANATION


This is the curriculum title that will propagate to all child training items and sections, for filtering purposes.

Training This is the Curriculum Object ID that will propagate to all child

90


FIELD NAME

EXPLANATION

Object ID (Curriculum)

training items and sections, for filtering purposes.

Display Sequence

The display sequence allows administrators to view the exact display order of the training in the curriculum structure. It is recommended that administrators use the Display Sequence as a secondary filter for the report.

Training Title

Use this field to display the training title of the child training or the section.

Training Object ID

Use this field to display the Training Object ID of the child training

Training Version

This field shows the training version for each child training item in the curriculum. Note: This is an existing field contained within the Training section.

Training Type

Use this field to show the training type of the child training. Note: A blank values indicates the item is a section.

Training Latest Version?

Use this field to quickly check if the training items inside the curriculum structure are the latest versions from the Course Catalog.

Section Parent

This field displays the parent section title. First-level sections and training without a section are tied to the curriculum training title.

Required Training per Section

This field displays the number of required training items in a section. This field is only populated for sections.

Sequence This field displays the order in which training items are configured in the curriculum structure.

Pay-Upfront This field only displays for child training, observation checklists, forms, and notes. Sections return a blank value.

Pre-Approved

This field only displays for child training, observation checklists, forms, and notes. Sections return a blank value.

Auto-Register

This field only displays for child training, observation checklists, forms, and notes. Sections return a blank value.

Auto-Launch This field only displays for child training, observation checklists, forms, and notes. Sections return a blank value.

Max Attempts

This field only returns a value for tests.

91


FIELD NAME

EXPLANATION

Reassign Curriculum

This field only returns a value for tests.

Due Date Criteria

This field only displays for child training, observation checklists, forms, and notes.

Relative Days (Due Date)

This field is only populated if the due date criteria is relative.

Fixed Due Date

This field is only populated if the due date criteria is fixed.

Latest Curriculum Version?

This field propagates the yes/no value indicating whether or not training is the latest version from the Course Catalog to all child training items. To only receive report results with the latest version, set this field to a value of Yes.

92


Create Curriculum Transcript Custom ReportThe custom Curriculum Transcript report is available through Custom Reporting, and allows administrators and managers to report on curricula and child learning objects (LOs) within curricula, as they exist on users' transcripts. This report allows administrators to generate a clear output of the curriculum data available on users’ transcripts. The following information is available only in this report:

o The statuses of child training items within curricula (Not activated and Pending Prior Training)

o Learning Assignment Tool assignment information for child training within curriculao The specific due dates of child training within curricula (instead the earliest due date)o The latest version of the training within the transcript for curricula and child training

within curricula

To create a Curriculum Transcript custom report, go to REPORTS > CUSTOM REPORTS and click the NEW button. Select Curriculum Transcript Report from the drop-down menu.

Permissions

PERMISSION NAME


Custom Curriculum Transcript Report - Create

Grants ability to view results of custom Curriculum Transcript reports created by self or shared by others. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User, User Self and Subordinates, User's Direct Reports.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Curriculum Transcript Report - View

Grants ability to create and edit custom Curriculum Transcript reports. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User, User Self and Subordinates, User's Direct Reports.

Reports - Analytics

The following report sections are included in the custom Curriculum Transcript report type:

o Curriculumo Assignment sectiono On the Job Training sectiono Training sectiono Transcript sectiono User section

93


Curriculum FieldsThis section is the ONLY section that should be used to filter for curriculum information related to the below listed fields. For example, to filter a report by a curriculum's course code, the administrator should use the Course Code (Curriculum) field within the Curriculum Transcript Report.

The following fields are included in the Curriculum section of the Curriculum Transcript report:

FIELD NAME FIELD TYPE FIELD DESCRIPTION

Course Code (Curriculum)

Text This is the Course Code associated with the curriculum.

Created By (Name) (Curriculum)

Text This is the full name of the user who created the curriculum.

Created By (User ID) (Curriculum)

Text This is the user ID of the user who created the curriculum.

Curriculum Section Title (Curriculum)

Text This is the title of the section within a curriculum.


Text This is the title of the curriculum.

Curriculum Version (Curriculum)

Numeric This is the version number of the curriculum.

Keywords (Curriculum)

Text This field returns the search keywords associated with the curriculum.

Language (Curriculum)

Text This is the language in which the curriculum is available.

Last Modified By (Curriculum)

Text This is the full name of the user who last made edits to the curriculum.

Last Modified By (User ID) (Curriculum)

Text This is the user ID of the user who last made edits to the curriculum.

Last Modified Date (Curriculum)

Date This is the date on which the curriculum was last modified.

Training Active (Curriculum)

Text This field displays whether or not the curriculum is active.

Training Deactivation Date (Curriculum)

Date This is the deactivation date provided for the curriculum, if applicable.

Training Description Text This is the description of the curriculum.

94


FIELD NAME FIELD TYPE FIELD DESCRIPTION

(Curriculum)

Training Object ID (Curriculum)

Text This is the unique, auto-generated ID associated with the curriculum.

Training Purpose (Curriculum)

Text This field returns the training purpose(s) associated with the curriculum.

Training Status (Curriculum)

Text This field displays the current status of the curriculum or its child training items on the user's transcript.

Training Subject (Curriculum)

Text This is the subject(s) associated with the curriculum.

Training Type (Curriculum)

Text This field displays the type of learning object (curriculum or the training type of child training items within the curriculum)

Training Version Effective Date (Curriculum)

Date This is the effective date of the curriculum version.

Report Field Section ConsiderationsSome exclusions and considerations apply to the report field sections that are included in the Curriculum Transcript report.

Assignment SectionThe following considerations apply to the Assignment report field section within the Curriculum Transcript report:

o Fields in the Curriculum Assignment section track the activation of curricula on users' transcripts, but not the individual activation dates of child training within curricula. The activation information for a curriculum is copied down to all of its child training items.

Training SectionThe following fields in the Training fields section should NOT be used when the Training section is accessed via the Curriculum Transcript report:

o Curriculum Section Title (Training)o Curriculum Title (Training)o Curriculum Version (Training)o Inside Curriculum

95


Using the above Training fields instead of the new corresponding fields in the Curriculum fields section will result in unexpected and potentially inaccurate report results.

Transcript SectionThe following fields in the Transcript fields section should NOT be used when the Transcript section is accessed via the Curriculum Transcript report:

o Curriculum Section Title (Transcript) o Curriculum Title (Transcript) o Curriculum Version (Transcript)

Using the above Training fields instead of the new corresponding fields in the Curriculum fields section will result in unexpected and potentially inaccurate report results.

Curriculum Transcript Statuses ConsiderationsUse the Transcript Status field to report on the curriculum status, because when using the new Transcript Status (from Curriculum) field, any statuses before Registration return a blank value.

Curriculum Transcript Report ExamplesIn the table below, fields for creating a basic Curriculum Transcript report are listed:

FIELD NAME OR TYPE EXPLANATION

User Information Any fields from the User field section can be used to identify the users (for example, User ID, User Last Name, etc.).

Training Type Use the Training Type field from the Training field section to report on the types of training within a curriculum.

Training Type (Curriculum) This field will always generate an output of Curriculum for curricula included in the report. Using this field helps administrators easily identify curricula in the report.

Curriculum Title (Curricula) This field can help administrators see when the titles of curriculum versions have differences.

Training Title This field from the Training field section can be used to display the names of child training items within a curriculum.

Curriculum Version Child training inherits the version number of the curriculum for better filtering capabilities. Use this field when you need to report on a specific curriculum version.

96


FIELD NAME OR TYPE EXPLANATION

Training Version This field from the Training field section displays the training version within the curriculum on the transcript.

Transcript Status (from Curriculum) This field must be used to report on Not Activated and Pending Prior Training statuses of training within a curriculum.

Transcript Status Use this field from the Transcript field section to display curriculum statuses before Registration (Please see the consideration for the Transcript Section, listed on the previous page.).

Transcript Due Date (from Curriculum)

This field displays the due dates of training within the curriculum.

Transcript Due Date Use this field from the Transcript field section ONLY if you want to due dates with the Transcript Due Date field from the Curriculum section, to see if there is another due date for the training.

Assignment Fields Use any assignment-related fields from the User field section to help identify the assignment at the curriculum level.

Use Case #1: Reviewing Learners' Progress on CurriculaAn administrator wants to report on the current version of a curriculum on a user's transcript. The administrator adds the following fields to the report:

o User Full Nameo Training Type o Curriculum Title (Curriculum)o Training Title o Training Version o Transcript Status (from Curriculum)o Transcript Due Date (Curriculum)o Assignment Titleo Assignment IDo Assignment Created By (User ID)o Curriculum Latest Registration?

The administrator sets the following filters for the report:

o Curriculum Title (Curriculum): Curriculum Title starts with "May 2018"o Curriculum Latest Registration: Curriculum Latest Registration? is True.

97


When the administrator generates the report, they are able to view the child training items within the curriculum that are on a user's transcript, the version of the curriculum, the versions of the child training items, the transcript statuses of the child training and curriculum, whether the training is the current registration, and more.

Use Case #2: Reporting on All Registrations or Versions of Curriculum CompletionAn administrator wants to report on all versions and assignments of a curriculum on a user's transcript. The administrator adds the following fields to the report:

o User Full Name o Training Type o Curriculum Title (Curriculum)o Training Title o Curriculum Version (Curriculum)o Training Version o Transcript Statuso Transcript Due Date (Curriculum)o Assignment Titleo Assignment IDo Assignment Created By (User ID)o Curriculum Latest Registration?

The administrator applies the following filter to the report:

o Curriculum Title (Curriculum): Curriculum Title starts with "May 2018"

After generating the report, the administrator can easily view which versions of the curriculum and its child training items are on a user's transcript, when they are due, what learning assignment the training was contained in, whether the curriculum is the latest registration, and more.

98


Use Case #3: Auditors Request Specific Curriculum Version CompletionAn administrator wants to provide proof that a user has completed Version 2 of a curriculum that was assigned to the user via a learning assignment. The administrator adds the following fields to the report:

o User Full Name o Training Type o Curriculum Title (Curriculum)o Training Title o Curriculum Version (Curriculum)o Training Version o Transcript Status (from Curriculum)o Transcript Due Date (Curriculum)o Assignment Titleo Assignment IDo Assignment Created By (UserID)o Curriculum Latest Registration?

The administrator applies the following filters to the report:

o Curriculum Title (Curriculum): Curriculum Title starts with "May 2018"o Curriculum Version (Curriculum): Curriculum version starts with "2"

When the administrator generates the report, they are able to view Version 2 of the curriculum and its associated child training items on a user's transcript, along with the assignment in which the training was assigned and other relevant information.

99


100


Create Performance Review Custom ReportCustom Performance Review Reports allow you to report on performance review tasks, steps, sections, questions, and sign-off data. The Create Custom Performance Review Report page in Online Help provides detailed instructions and use cases for creating this report.

Basic Steps for Creating Custom ReportsTo begin, here are the basic steps for creating any custom report in the Report Designer:

1. Go to REPORTS > CUSTOM REPORTS.2. Select the report type from the New drop-down.3. Name the report. The report cannot be saved until you name it.4. Select a folder in which to store the report. This is optional.5. Select the fields to include in the report.6. Click REFRESH to see a preview of the report output.7. Define the filters and the sort/summary options.8. Configure the sharing options.9. Schedule the report and configure the delivery options.

10. Add/publish custom charts, if desired.11. Save the report.

Use Cases for Performance Review ReportsPerformance Review StatusA Human Resources Manager (HRM) would like to view the status of the organization's 2016 Annual Performance Review Task for each Division Organizational Unit (OU) to which the task has been assigned.

To create the report, the HRM performs the following steps in the Custom Report Builder:

1. Access the Custom Performance Review Report via REPORTS > CUSTOM REPORTS.2. Add the following fields:

A. User Sectiona. User Full Nameb. Division

B. Performance Review Step Sectiona. Step Assigned Tob. Step Titlec. Step Submission Dated. Step Reviewer Namee. Step Due Date

C. Performance Review Task Sectiona. Task Nameb. Task Status

3. Filter the report by the Task Name field and set the filter to Contains "2016." By adding this filter, the report will only show data for the 2016 Annual Performance Review Task.

101


4. Summarize the report by the Task Status field. Then, summarize the report by the Division field. This breaks the report data into status groups. Within each status group, the data will be summarized by Division OU. These summaries helps the HRM to quickly view the task status for each user in each division.

5. Click REFRESH. The report preview updates to display the data.6. Click the Actions drop-down and select Print Preview or Excel Preview to open a

printable version of the data.

Declined to SignA Human Resources Manager (HRM) would like to generate a list of employees who declined to sign their performance review. The list will help her assess the reasons that the employees choose not to sign their review. She intends to use the information in the report to create an anonymous manager review survey that will be sent to all employees who declined to sign their review.

To create the report, the HRM performs the following steps in the Custom Report Builder:

1. Access the Custom Performance Review Report via REPORTS > CUSTOM REPORTS.2. Add the following fields:

A. User Sectiona. User Full Nameb. User Manager Namec. User Indirect Manager Name

B. Performance Review Task Sectiona. Task Name

C. Performance Review Sign-Off Sectiona. Sign-off Commentsb. Sign-off Declined

3. Filter the report by the Sign-off Declined field and set the filter to "True." Filtering the report by the Sign-off Declined field constrains the data to only users who declined to sign the review. Users who signed the review will not be included in the report output.



102


Additional Field OptionsThe HRM could also choose to add the User Email, User Manager Email, and User Indirect Manager Email fields so that she has quick access to each user's contact information.

Help Video

Click the Help Video icon in the upper-right corner of the page to view a help video for custom reporting. For additional information about help videos, see the Help Video Overview topic in Online Help.

Permissions

PERMISSION NAME




Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics

Performance Review Report FieldsThe following fields are specifically available for Custom Performance Review Reports. Click here for a printable version of the Custom Performance Review Report fields.

Performance Review Question

FIELD NAME FIELD DESCRIPTION FIELD TYPE

Question This field displays the full text of the question in the performance review section for the performance review task. The value is pulled from the Question field on the Question Properties pop-up when adding questions to a performance review section.

The value can be viewed from the printable performance review on the Snapshot > Reviews page in Universal Profile.

Text

103


Question Responder This field displays the name of the user who responded to the rating scale question in the performance review task section. The value displays as [Last Name], [First Name]. The value is pulled from the user record of the responder.


Text

Question Response Rating Score

This field displays the rating entered by the user when responded to the rating scale question in the performance review task section. The value is pulled from the performance review.


Text

Question Response Rating Title

This field displays the title of the rating, as defined on the Define Rating Scale pop-up when configuring the performance review section.

Text

Question Response Comment

This field displays the response or comment entered by the user or reviewer in the comments box for the question in the performance review task section. The value is pulled from the performance review. The value can be viewed from the printable performance review on the Snapshot > Reviews page in Universal Profile.

Text

Question Type This field displays the question type, as defined in the Response Type field on the Question Properties pop-up when adding questions to a performance review section.


Text

Performance Review Section

FIELD NAME FIELD DESCRIPTION FIELD

104


TYPE

Number of Section Questions

This field displays the number of questions that are in a section for a step in the performance review task. The value is calculated by adding the number of questions that have been added to a section when configuring the section on the Create/Edit Section page in Performance Review Form Sections.

Numeric

Reviewer Section Rating

This field displays the reviewer's rating for the section in the performance review task. The value is pulled from the performance review. The value can be viewed from the printable performance review on the Snapshot > Reviews page in Universal Profile.

Numeric

Section Type This field displays the section type within a step in the performance review task. The value is pulled from the Type field on the Create/Edit Section page in Performance Review Form Sections.

Text

Section Version This field displays the version of the section within a step in the performance review task. The value is pulled from the Type column on the Performance Review Form Sections page.

Numeric

Performance Review Sign-Off


Sign-off Comments This field displays the comments entered in the comments box by the reviewer when signing off on the performance review task. The reviewer can be self, manager, etc. Comments are entered on the Sign-Off step.

Comments are only available for performance review sections if enabled by the administrator when configuring the section in the performance review task.

Text

Sign-off Declined This field indicates whether or not the user being Yes/No

105


reviewed declined to sign the performance review. The report displays "Yes" if the user declined to sign and "No" if the reviewer did not decline to sign.

On the performance review, the user can decline to sign in the Decline to Sign field on the Sign-Off step.

Sign-off Signature This field displays the name of the user or reviewer who signed off on the performance review task on the Sign-Off step. The value displays in the report as [First Name] [Last Name].

Text

Sign-off Timestamp This field displays the date and time of when the user or reviewer signed off on the performance review task on the Sign-Off step.

Date

Sign-off Type This field displays the type of sign-off for the performance review task on the Sign-Off step. The sign-off type is set in the Signature Method field when configuring the Sign Off performance review section. Values may be Electronic, Authenticated, or Manual.

Text

Performance Review Step


User ID This field displays the user ID of the co-planner. The value is pulled from the user record of the co-planner for the succession task.

Text

User Full Name This field displays the name of the co-planner. The value displays as [Last Name], [First Name]. The value is pulled from the user record of the co-planner for the succession task.

Text

Number of Step Sections

This field displays the number of step sections configured for the step in the performance review task. The value is pulled from the Sections field on

Text

106


the Review Workflow page of the task.

Overall Step Rating This field displays the user's rating for the step in the performance review task. The value is pulled from the performance review.


Numeric

Step Assigned To This field displays the user type to whom the step was assigned. The value is pulled from the Assigned To field when configuring the step for the task.

Text

Step Due Date This field displays the due date of the step. The value is pulled from the Due Date field for the step on the Review Workflow page of the task.

For steps that are configured to have a relative due date from the date on which the task is assigned, the report output converts the number of days in the Due Date field to a calendar date. The Step Due Date field on the report will not display a number of days; it will only display an exact calendar date.

Date

Step Optional This field indicates whether or not the step is optional. The report displays "Yes" if the step is optional and "No" if the step is not optional. The value is pulled from the This step is optional field when configuring the step for the task.

Yes/No

Step Reviewer ID This field displays the user ID of the reviewer. The value is pulled from the user record of the reviewer for the performance review task step. The reviewer is the user to whom the step is assigned.

Text

Step Reviewer Name This field displays the name of the reviewer. The value is pulled from the user record of the reviewer for the performance review task step. The reviewer is the user to whom the step is assigned.

Text

107


Step Sequence This field displays the due date of the step. The value is pulled from the Sequence field for the step on the Review Workflow page of the task.

Numeric

Step Status This field displays the status of the step. The value is pulled from the Review Details for [Step Assignee Name] pop-up.

The value can be viewed by clicking the View Details icon in the Options column on the Task Details page when viewing the page in Employee view. Or, the value can be viewed in the Status column when viewing the Task Details page in Reviewer view.

Date

Step Submission Date

This field displays the date on which the performance review step was completed.

Date

Step Title This field displays the step title. The value is pulled from the Step Title field when configuring the step for the task.

Yes/No

Step Weight This field displays the weight of the step. The value is pulled from the Step Weight field for the step on the Review Workflow page of the task.

Numeric

Performance Review Task


Completion Date This field displays the date on which the performance review task was completed. The value can be viewed in the Completion Date field on the Snapshot > Reviews page in Universal Profile.

Date

Expiration Date This field displays the due date or expiration date for the off-cycle performance review task. The expiration date is set in the When is the entire review due? field when configuring the Off-cycle Performance Review Task. This value can be viewed on the Task Details page for an off-cycle review task.

Date

108


Is Not Removed From Task

Yes/No

Off-cycle task recurrence number

Off-cycle performance review tasks may be assigned to a user multiple times. This field displays the recurrence number that corresponds with the off-cycle task assignment. This enables administrators to view review data for a specific instance of an off-cycle task assignment.

Numeric

Performance Review Due Date

This field displays the date on which the entire review is due. The value is pulled from the When is the entire review due field on the General tab of the performance review task.

Date

Review Period Start Date

This field displays the date on which the review period starts. The value is pulled from the From field in the Review Period section on the General tab of the performance review task.

Date

Start Date Date

Task Final Rating This field displays the user's performance review rating. The value is pulled from the performance review. The value can be viewed from the Snapshot > Reviews page in Universal Profile. Ratings are configured by the administrator in the Overall Rating Scale section on the General tab of the performance review task.

Numeric

Task Final Rating Text

This field displays the text rating for the user's performance review. The value is pulled from the performance review. The value can be viewed from the printable performance review from the Snapshot > Reviews page in Universal Profile. Text ratings are configured by the administrator in the Overall Rating Scale section on the General tab of the performance review task.

Numeric

Task Name This field displays the date on which the review period starts. The value is pulled from the Task

Text

109


Name field on the General tab of the performance review task.

Task Raw Rating This field displays the user's raw numeric performance review rating prior to any calibrations that may have been made to the user's rating.

Numeric

Task Raw Rating Text

This field displays the user's raw performance review text rating prior to any calibrations that may have been made to the user's rating.

Text

Task Status This field displays the user's status for the performance review task. The value is pulled from the Snapshot > Reviews page in Universal Profile.

Text

Task User Title TextUser


Address Line 1 This field displays the user's Address Line 1. The value is pulled from the Address Line 1 field on the user record.

Text

Allow Reconciliation This field indicates whether or not the user's user record should remain active or be deactivated if the user does not appear in the most recent data feed. The value is pulled from the Allow Reconciliation field on the user record.

If reconciliation is allowed, the user's record will be deactivated if it no longer appears in the feed. The report results display "Yes" in these instances.

If reconciliation is NOT allowed, then the user's record will be not be deactivated if it no longer appears in the feed. The report results display "No" in these instances.

Yes/No

City This field displays the user's city. The value is pulled from the City field on the user record.

Text

110


Cost Center Approver Ref

This field displays the user ID of the user's cost center approver. The value is pulled from the User ID field on the user record.

Text

Cost Center Approver This field displays the name of the user's cost center approver. The value displays as [Last Name], [First Name]. The value is pulled from the Approver field on the Define OU page when configuring OUs.

Text

Cost Center ID This field displays the ID of the organizational unit (OU). The value for this field is pulled from the ID field on the OU configuration page in Manage Organizational Unit Hierarchy.

Text

Cost Center Owner This field displays the owner of the user's assigned Cost Center Organizational Unit (OU). The value is pulled from the Owner field on the Define OU page when configuring the OU.

Text

Cost Center Parent This field displays the parent of the user's assigned Cost Center Organizational Unit (OU). The value is pulled from the Parent field on the Define OU page when configuring OUs.

Text

Cost Center Ref This field displays the ID of the user's assigned Cost Center Organizational Unit (OU). The value is pulled from the ID field on the Define Cost Center page when configuring cost centers.

Text

Cost Center This field displays the name of the user's assigned Cost Center Organizational Unit (OU), as shown on the user record page.

If the Cost Center OU has been renamed for the portal, this value in the report will reflect the updated name.

Text

Display Language This field displays the language in which the user's Text

111


portal displays when they are logged in, as shown on the User Record, when available. The value is pulled from the Display Language field on the user record. If Display Language is not populated on the User Record, the default language for the OU will be displayed. Unless otherwise changed, the default language setting is English.

Division ID This field displays the ID of the organizational unit (OU). The value for this field is pulled from the ID field on the OU configuration page in Manage Organizational Unit Hierarchy.

Text

Division Owner This field displays the owner of the user's assigned Division Organizational Unit (OU). The value is pulled from the Owner field on the Define OU page when configuring the OU.

Text

Division Parent Ref This field displays the ID of the parent of the user's assigned Division Organizational Unit (OU). The value is pulled from the ID field on the Define OU page of the parent Division OU when configuring OUs.

Text

Division Parent This field displays the parent of the user's assigned Division Organizational Unit (OU). The value is pulled from the Parent field on the Define OU page when configuring OUs.

Text

Division Ref This field displays the ID of the user's assigned Division Organizational Unit (OU). The value is pulled from the ID field on the Define OU page when configuring OUs.

Text

Division This field displays the name of the user's assigned Division Organizational Unit (OU). The value is pulled from the Division field on the user record.

If the Division OU has been renamed for the portal, the value in the report will reflect the updated name.

Text

112


Grade ID This field displays the ID of the organizational unit (OU). The value for this field is pulled from the ID field on the OU configuration page in Manage Organizational Unit Hierarchy.

Text

Grade Owner This field displays the owner of the Grade Organizational Unit (OU). The value is pulled from the Owner field on the Define OU page when configuring the OU.

Text

Grade Parent This field displays the parent of the user's assigned Grade Organizational Unit (OU). The value is pulled from the Parent field on the Define OU page when configuring OUs.

Text

Grade Ref This field displays the ID of the user's assigned Grade Organizational Unit (OU). The value is pulled from the ID field on the Define OU page when configuring OUs.

Text

Grade This field displays the name of the user's assigned Grade Organizational Unit (OU). The value is pulled from the Grade field on the user record.

Text

Local System ID The value that displays in the report output for this field is the identifier from a local system. In the system, the field is typically used when Cornerstone is generating User IDs for users and the organization wants to store the identifier from their local Human Resources (HR) or Payroll system in the Cornerstone system.

Text

Location ID This field displays the ID of the organizational unit (OU). The value for this field is pulled from the ID field on the OU configuration page in Manage Organizational Unit Hierarchy.

Text

Location Owner This field displays the owner of the user's assigned Text

113


Location Organizational Unit (OU). The value is pulled from the Location field on the Define OU page when configuring the OU.

Location Parent This field displays the parent of the user's assigned Location Organizational Unit (OU). The value is pulled from the Parent field on the Define OU page when configuring OUs.

Text

Location Ref This field displays the ID of the user's assigned Location Organizational Unit (OU). The value is pulled from the ID field on the Define OU page when configuring OUs.

Text

Mailstop This field displays the user's mailstop, as defined on the user record.

Text

Months of Service This field displays the numeric value provided through data feed only.

Numeric

Photo Exists This field indicates whether or not a photo has been uploaded on the user's user record. The report displays "Yes" if a photo has been uploaded and displays "No" if a photo has not been uploaded.

Text

Position ID This field displays the ID of the organizational unit (OU). The value for this field is pulled from the ID field on the OU configuration page in Manage Organizational Unit Hierarchy.

Text

Position Owner This field displays the owner of the user's assigned Position Organizational Unit (OU). The value is pulled from the Owner field on the Define OU page when configuring the OU.

Text

Position Parent This field displays the parent of the user's assigned Position Organizational Unit (OU). The value is pulled

Text

114


from the Parent field on the Define OU page when configuring OUs.

Position Ref This field displays the ID of the user's assigned Position Organizational Unit (OU). The value is pulled from the ID field on the Define OU page when configuring OUs.

Text

Position This field displays the name of the user's assigned Position Organizational Unit (OU). The value is pulled from the Position field on the user record.

If the Position OU has been renamed for the portal, the value in the report will reflect the updated name.

Text

Postal Code This field displays the user's ZIP or Postal Code. The value is pulled from the Zip field on the user record.

Text

Required Approvals This field displays the number of people (e.g., managers, approvers) from which the user must get approval before being able to register for training. The value is pulled from the Required Training Approvals field on the user record.

Text

State/Province This field displays the user's state or province. The value is pulled from the State field on the user record.

Text

User Absent This field displays the user's absent status. The report displays "Yes" if the user is marked absent and displays "No" if the user is not absent. The value is pulled from the Absent field on the user record.

Yes/No

User Address 2 This field displays the user's Address Line 2. The value is pulled from the Address Line 2 field on the user record.

Text

115


User Approver ID This field displays the user ID of the user's approver. The value is pulled from the User ID field on the user record.

Text

User Approver Name This field displays the name of the user's approver. The value displays as [Last Name], [First Name]. The value is pulled from the First Name/Last Name fields on the user record.

Text

User Country This field displays the user's country. The value is pulled from the Country field on the user record.

Text

User Email This field displays the user's email address. The value is pulled from the Email Address field on the user record.

Text

User Fax Number This field displays the user's fax number. The value is pulled from the Fax Number field on the user record.

Text

User First Name This field displays the user's first name. The value is pulled from the First Name field on the user record.

Text

User Full Name This field displays the name of the user's full name. The value displays as [Last Name], [First Name]. The value is pulled from the First Name/Last Name fields on the user record.

Text

User GUID This field displays the user GUID. GUID is a Data Load Wizard term. The GUID appears in the User Data Load template and can be mapped in the Data Load Wizard. When the GUID is included in the User data load, the GUID is used as the primary key and validates the user record.

Text

User ID This field displays the user's user ID, which is the unique identifier for the user. The value is pulled from

Text

116


the User ID field on the user record.

User Indirect Manager Email

This field displays the email address of the user's indirect manager. The value is pulled from the Email Address field on the user record of the user's indirect manager.

Text

User Indirect Manager First Name

This field displays the first name of the user's indirect manager. The value is pulled from the First Name field on the user record of the user's indirect manager.

Text

User Indirect Manager Id

This field displays the user ID of the user's indirect manager. The value is pulled from the User ID field on the user record of the user's indirect manager.

Text

User Indirect Manager Last Name

This field displays the last name of the user's indirect manager. The value is pulled from the Last Name field on the user record of the user's indirect manager.

Text

User Indirect Manager Name

This field displays the full name of the user's indirect manager. The value displays as [Last Name], [First Name]. The value is pulled from the First Name/Last Name fields on the user record of the user's indirect manager.

Text

User Last Access This field displays thedate and time of the user's most recent, successful login prior to the analytics data refresh. Date criterion is always implemented using UTC (Coordinated Universal Time).

Date

User Last Hire Date This field displays the date on which the user was most recently hired. The value is pulled from the Last Hire Date field on the user record.

Date

User Last Name This field displays the user's last name. The value is Text

117


pulled from the Last Name field on the user record.

User Manager Email This field displays the email address of the user's manager. The value is pulled from the Email Address field on the user record of the user's manager.

Text

User Manager ID This field displays the user ID of the user's manager. The value is pulled from the User ID field on the user record of the user's manager.

Text

User Manager Name This field displays the full name of the user's manager. The value displays as [Last Name], [First Name]. The value is pulled from the First Name/Last Name fields on the user record of the user's manager.

Text

User Middle Name This field displays the user's middle name. The value is pulled from the Middle Name field on the user record.

Text

User Mobile Number This field displays the user's mobile phone number. The value is pulled from the Mobile Phone field on the user record.

Text

User Name This field displays the user's user name, which is used to log in to the portal. The value is pulled from the User Name field on the user record.

Text

User Name Prefix This field displays the user's name prefix. Examples of name prefixes include Mr., Mrs., Ms., Miss, Dr. The value is pulled from the Prefix field on the user record.

Text

User Name suffix This field displays the user's name suffix. Examples of name prefixes include II, III, Jr., Sr. The value is

Text

118


pulled from the Suffix field on the user record.

User Orig. Hire Date This field displays the date on which the user was most originally hired. The value is pulled from the Original Hire Date field on the user record.

Date

User Phone Number This field displays the user's phone number. The value is pulled from the Phone field on the user record.

Text

User Status This field displays the user's status. The value in the report output is Active, Inactive, Pending Approval, or N/A.

Users with an inactive status are unable to log in to the portal.

Pending approval status applies to users who have submitted self-registration requests that are pending approval by the self-registration group approver. Users pending approval cannot log in to the portal until their records are approved.

N/A status applies to external user's added to peer groups in Performance, and External Candidate for external successors added during Succession Planning tasks.

The value for the User Status field in the report is pulled from the User Status field on the user record.

Text

Create a Custom Performance Review ReportName the Report/Select Storage FolderYou can name the report at any point during the report creation process; however, reports cannot be saved until they have been given a name. You can also select a folder in which to store the report.

Name the ReportNaming the report in the Report Designer is required in order to save the report. The SAVE button is not enabled until a report title is entered. The report name should be descriptive and meaningful.

119


To name the report:

1. Enter a title in the Report Title field in the upper-left corner of the page. The field accepts alphanumeric characters and the following special characters:o -o _o (o )o "o 'o .o ,o [o ]

2. Once a report title is entered, the SAVE button is enabled.3. Click SAVE to save the report title. The also saves the report. The report title will display

at the top of the page and can be entered or edited at any time during the report configuration process.

Select Storage FolderSelecting a storage folder is optional. The report folder drop-down displays the custom reports folder hierarchy and enables you to move reports into a designated folder. By default, the Custom Reports folder displays in the drop-down.

To select a folder:

1. Click the report folder drop-down. This opens a list of available folders.2. Click the folder name. This adds the report to the folder.

120


Fields PanelThe Fields panel displays all of the fields that are available for the report. The fields that you add to the report represent the information that you want to report on. For example, if you add the User Full Name and User Address fields, then the report will show the physical address for all of the users in the report.

The fields are organized into sections and can be sorted by field type using the Show drop-down. You can also search for fields in the Search bar by entering a full or partial search term.

When adding fields, it is recommended that you start by adding biographical fields, such as User ID. Then, add the fields on the topic that you are reporting on, such as Training Title or Transcript Status.

121


Using the "Show" Option to Filter the Fields Section by Field/Data TypeThe Show drop-down enables you to select the types of fields that you would like to display in the Fields panel. You can filter by standard and custom fields, as well as by Text, Numeric, Date, or Yes/No data types.

122


To filter by type, click the Show drop-down and select one or more of the following options:

o Standard Fields - Checking this box displays all applicable standard fields for the report type.

o Custom Fields - Checking this box displays all applicable custom fields for the report type.





As filters are selected, the fields in each field type section update to display only the fields that meet the filter criteria.

Tip: Clicking the Field type section name selects all filters in the Field Type section. Clicking the Data type section name selects all filters in the Data Type section.

Search for FieldsThe search bar allows you to filter the Fields panel to only display fields that match your search criteria.

To search for fields, enter a full or partial search term in the Search bar. Each section in the Fields panel updates when you stop typing to display the fields that match the search criteria. The number of matching fields in a section displays in parentheses to the right of the section name.

123


Ways to Add Fields to ReportThere are multiple ways to add fields to the report. Do one of the following to add a field:

o Click the field name in the Fields panel. The field only needs to be clicked once to add it to the report.

o Drag and drop the field from the Fields panel to the report preview panel.o Type a full or partial field name in the Type or drag a field here box in the report

preview panel. When text is entered, the drop-down in the Type or drag a field here box filters to display the matching field names. Select the desired field from the drop-down to add the field to the report.

o Click in the Type or drag a field here box in the report preview panel and select the desired field from the list.


o Report preview panelo Field Filters tab - Note: Fields can only be added to this tab by dragging and dropping





124


Calculated Fields

Add Calculated FieldThe option to add a calculated field displays in the Calculated Fields field type section. Clicking the plus icon opens the Calculated Field Wizard. Once the field is created, the field is added to the list of fields in the Calculated Fields field type section and adds the field to the report preview.







125


Report Preview PanelThe report preview panel allows you to view the report results as you build the report. The preview helps you decide which fields to include in the report to ensure that you ascertain the desired report data.


Refresh ResultsYou can update the results in the preview pane by clicking the REFRESH button. When the report data is out of date, an Exclamation icon displays in the REFRESH button to indicate that the report data needs to be refreshed.

When filters in the Field Filters panel are added or modified, the report results must be manually refreshed in order to view the updated data.


126


Enter the maximum number of records that should be returned in the report. The default value is 75,000. The maximum value that can be entered in the field is 999,999. Enter a value of zero to not have a limit.



Show Unique Rows/Record Counts/Report HeadersThe following options are available in the OPTIONS button drop-down. The options are only available if the report is summarized and only apply to the printable and Excel versions of the report, as well as when the report is run.




Print/Export/Remove ColumnsThe following actions are available in the ACTIONS button drop-down:

o Print - Click the Print icon to create a printable version of the report. This option only appears for users with permission to preview custom reports. This option does not display when the report output exceeds 30,000 rows.




Column Sorting

127


You can sort columns in ascending and descending order. You can also view the sort order selection.

Ascending/DescendingThe columns in the report preview panel can be sorted in ascending and descending order by clicking the arrow to the right of the column name. Clicking the down arrow resorts the column in descending order. Clicking the up arrow resorts the column in ascending order. Note: This option is disabled when the maximum number of sorted fields has been reached on the Sort tab.


Field OptionsOptions are available in a drop-down for each field that displays in the report preview section.

The following options are available, depending on the field type:


128










Select Filters/Sort/SummaryThe Filter and Sort tabs allow you to narrow down the report data and define the sort order for the fields. The Summary tab allows you to group the data by select fields.

Field Filters TabThe Field Filters tab enables you to filter the report fields in order to narrow down the report results. Once the filters are defined, you can refresh the report preview panel to update the report results.

Add Field FiltersYou can add fields as filters by dragging and dropping fields, as well as by manually entering a name in the field text box. You can also add fields by clicking the drop-down to the right of the field text box and selecting the desired field.

Drag and Drop FieldsFields can be added by dragging the field from the Fields panel and dropping it into a blank field box on the Field Filters tab. An operator drop-down and value field automatically populate to the right of the field name. Select an operator, and then enter a value.

129


Manually Enter Field NameEnter a full or partial field name in the blank box in the Field Filters tab. When text is entered, the box filters to display the matching field names. Select the desired field from the drop-down to add the field to the Field Filters tab.

Change Field SelectionYou can change the field that is selected in an individual field box on the Field Filters tab in the following ways:

o Clicking the drop-down in the field and select a different field. All fields available for the report display in the drop-down.

o Enter a different field name in the field box.


Fields with Multi-Select ValuesFor fields that have multi-select options for the field value, the options display in a drop-down. One or more values can be selected by clicking the box to the left of the value. Click the Check all option to select all values for the field. Click Uncheck all to deselect all values for the field.

130



Remove FieldYou can delete a filter by clicking the Remove icon to the right of value field.

Sort TabThe Sort tab enables you to define the sort order of the fields you selected for the report. By sorting the report fields, you can define which column displays first, and so forth, in the report output.


131


Add FieldsTo sort fields on the report, the fields must be added to the Sort tab. Fields are added by dragging and dropping fields from the Fields panel to the blank sort boxes on the Sort tab.





132


Sort by Ascending/Descending OrderThe data in the sorted fields can be sorted in ascending or descending order by clicking the Ascending or Descending icon to the right of the field.


Update Report Results

133


To update the report preview panel with the new sort order, click REFRESH. This updates the sort order number of the column in the report preview.

Summary TabThe Summary tab enables you to summarize the data in the report based on certain fields.



Each summary row in the tab can only contain one field.


2 A Human Resources Manager would like to create a report that displays all direct reports for all managers in the organization. She creates a custom User report that includes the User First Name, User Last Name, and User Manager Name fields. On the Summarize tab, she selects User Manager Name in the Summarize By field. She also sorts the report on the Sort tab by User Manager Name, then by User First Name, and then by User Last name. The first column in the report results displays all of the managers in the organization who have direct reports and also groups each manager's direct reports under each manager's name. This allows the Human Resources Manager to quickly view all of the direct reports for each manager in the organization in a single report.

134















Sharing Tab

135










Scheduling/Delivery OptionsThe Schedule and Delivery tabs enable you to schedule the report and configure the delivery options.

Schedule TabThe Schedule tab enables you to create a schedule for the report. Reports can be scheduled to run once, daily, weekly, or monthly. By default, reports are not scheduled to run and must be run manually by the user. In order to schedule a report at a specific time or on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis, you must configure the scheduling options on the Schedule tab.

Schedule One-Time ReportClick the Once option in the Schedule drop-down. This enables the options to display below the drop-down for creating a one-time report. Complete the following fields:

o Schedule - Select "Once" from the drop-down.o Time - From the drop-down, select the time at which to run the report. The default

setting is one hour from the current time.

136


o Time Zone - From the drop-down, select the time zone in which to run the report. The default setting is the time zone of the user configuring the report.

o Start Date - By default, the start date is the current date. You can modify the start date by entering a different date in the field. This is a required field.

The report runs at the specified date and time.

Schedule Daily ReportClick the Daily option in the Schedule drop-down. This enables the options to display below the drop-down for creating a report that runs daily. Complete the following fields:

o Schedule - Select "Weekly" from the drop-down.o Repeat Every - This field enables you to determine the report interval. For example, if

"3" is the value in the field, then the report runs every three days. Enter the number of days in the Repeat Every field. The default value is "1." This is a required field.

o Time - From the drop-down, select the time at which to run the report. The default setting is one hour from the current time.

o Time Zone - From the drop-down, select the time zone in which to run the report. The default setting is the 's time zone of the user configuring the report.

o Start Date - By default, the date on which the report starts running is the current date. You can modify the start date by entering a different date in the field. This is a required field.

o End Date - Enter the date on which to stop running the report. This is a required field.

137


Schedule Weekly ReportClick the Weekly option in the Schedule drop-down. This enables the options to display below the drop-down for creating a report that runs weekly. Complete the following fields:


"3" is the value in the field, then the report runs every three weeks. Enter the number of weeks in the Repeat Every field. The default value is "1." This is a required field.

o On - Select the day on which the report will repeat. The default value is the current day of the week. This is a required field.

o Start Time - From the drop-down, select the time at which to run the report. The default setting is one hour from the current time.




138


Schedule Monthly ReportClick the Monthly option in the Schedule drop-down. This enables the options to display below the drop-down for creating a report that runs monthly. Complete the following fields:


"3" is the value in the field, then the report runs every three months. Enter the number of months in the Repeat Every field. The default value is "1." This is a required field.

o On - This field allows you to configure when the report will run.o Day - Select "Day" from the drop-down to run the report on a specific day of the

month. This enables a numeric text box to display to the right of the drop-down. In the text box, enter the day of the month on which the report will run.

o First - Select "First" from the drop-down to run the report on the first <Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday> of the month.

o Second - Select "Second" from the drop-down to run the report on the second <Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday> of the month.

o Third - Select "Third" from the drop-down to run the report on the third <Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday> of the month.

o Fourth - Select "Fourth" from the drop-down to run the report on the fourth <Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday> of the month.

o Last - Select "Last" from the drop-down to run the report on the last <Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday> of the month.





139


Summary SectionFor each report type, the Summary section displays the report schedule. For all but the one-time report, the Summary section displays the date on which the report is scheduled to run next.

Share ReportCheck the Schedule report for shared users also box to share the report. The checkbox only displays if the shared user criteria fulfills the requirements for scheduling.

Scheduled Report Idle after 30 DaysFor reports that are scheduled to process daily or weekly, If the report output has not been accessed in the last 30 days, then the system stops processing the scheduled report until the user clicks one of the report output options, such as clicking the Excel icon. Once the user clicks the output option, the report will begin processing again on schedule.

Schedule Tab FAQsDoes refreshing the report restore the schedule once the processing goes idle?No. If you refresh the report, the refresh will process but does not restore the report schedule. The only way to restore the report schedule after 30 days is to click one of the report output options.

If a user I've shared the report with accesses the report, does that maintain the report schedule?Yes. The report schedule is maintained because reports are processed based on the report ID, which is the same for the report generator and all shared users.

For example, you create a report and schedule it for weekly processing. You share the report with one user. You never look at the report, but the other user accesses it each week. The report schedule is maintained because the shared user accesses the report output.

Does report delivery maintain the report schedule?Yes. If you create a report and schedule it for delivery, email, or FTP (file transfer protocol), the delivery counts as opening the report, and the report will continue to run.

140


Delivery TabThe report delivery options display on the Delivery tab in the Custom Report Builder.

Note: The Report Delivery options are only available if the report is set to run on a recurring basis.

FTP DeliveryCheck the FTP Delivery box to deliver a copy of the custom report to the FTP site specified in the Report Delivery Preferences. If this option is selected, you have the option to send the report in Comma Separated or Tab Delimited format. The maximum file size for this report is 25 MB.

The FTP Delivery option is only available if you have permission to schedule delivery of a report to an FTP site and if the Allow report to be sent to FTP preference is set in Report Delivery Preferences.

141


How the Report Name Will AppearThe following is the naming convention for reports delivered to the FTP folder:

[Report Title]_[UserID]_[UTC Time in format MM_dd_yyyy_HH_mm]

o Report Title - This is the name of the report as defined when creating the report.o UserID - This is the UserID of the user who created the report.o UTC Date/Time - This is the UTC date and time at which the report was created in

MM_dd_yyyy_HH_mm format.

Email MeCheck the Email me box to deliver a copy of the custom report to your system email address. Only the creator of the report will receive an email; users with whom the report is shared will not receive an email. If this option is selected, you have the option to send the report in Comma Separated or Tab Delimited format. This option is only available if you have permission to schedule delivery of a report to an email address. The maximum file size for this report is 3 MB. The report is always sent as a .zip file.

Note: The system email address is the address defined by the administrator in the Support Email field on the Corporate Preferences page.

Add/Publish Custom ChartsFor information about creating custom charts, refer to the Custom Charting section in Online Help.

For information about publishing charts to dashboards, refer to the Publish Custom Charts section in Online Help.

142


Save the ReportThe report can be saved at any point during the report creation process by clicking the SAVE button in the upper-right corner of the page. However, the SAVE button is only enabled once you have named the report in the Report Title field.

The report does not fully process until after you have saved and closed it. Once the report is finished processing, the report is ready for use.

Report Tipso Trial and Error of Report Fields - In order to achieve the desired report results, it may

be necessary to try various combinations of fields. Reports are expected to take a few drafts before you arrive at the exact report you need. It is recommended that you search through all of the available fields in the Fields panel to see the different data-points that are available.

o Suggestion City - If you would like a standard field added to Custom Reports, consider posting the request to Suggestion City in the Client Success Center as an enhancement request.

143


Create Recruiting Custom ReportThis Online Help page explains the process for creating Custom Recruiting Reports and also includes a detailed list of all the fields that can be added to the report.

Custom Recruiting Reports enable recruiters to report on requisition and applicant data. You can also report on interviews, pre-screening questions, offer letters, recruiting agencies, background checks, and cost tracking. Another report feature is external vendors, which enables you to report on third party integration data, such as assessments.




Use Cases for Custom Recruiting ReportsA recruiter would like to report on pre-screening scores to determine which applicants scored the highest. They would like to narrow down the pool of applicants by looking at the top scorers first.

To generate this data, the recruiter performs the following steps in the Custom Report Builder:

1. Access the Custom Recruiting Report via REPORTS > CUSTOM REPORTS.2. Add the following fields:

A. Requisition Sectiona. Requisition IDb. Requisition Display Job Title

B. Applicant Sectiona. Applicant Current Status

C. User Sectiona. User First Nameb. User Last Name

D. Pre-Screening Questions Sectiona. Questionb. Applicant Response

144


c. Correctd. Screening Section Scoree. Possible Screening Section Scoref. Screening Section % Score

3. Filter the report by the Requisition Status field and set the filter to is equal to Open. This filter helps narrow down the report output so that only data for Open requisitions displays in the output.

4. Filter the report by the Applicant Current Status field and set the filter to is not equal to Closed. This filter helps narrow down the report output so that data for applicants who are in a Closed status does not display in the output.

5. Summarize the report by the Requisition ID field. This breaks the report data into groups by requisition ID. Each group displays the applicants who have applied to the requisition that corresponds to each requisition ID. These summaries help the recruiter to quickly view the highest scorers for each requisition. In addition, some requisitions may have the same display job title. In such cases, sorting by requisition ID helps to more clearly identify each individual requisition.



When the report is generated, the recruiter can see which applicants scored the highest on the pre-screening questions. The recruiter can use this information to form an applicant pool that only includes applicants with the highest pre-screening scores.

Help Video


Recruiting Report FieldsThe following field sections are available for Custom Recruiting Reports:

o Applicanto Application Formso Applicationso Background Checko Compliance Questionso Historical Statuso Interview Management and Schedulingo Offer Lettero Offer Letter Approvalo Offer Letter Communicationo Cost Trackingo External Vendors

145


o Pre-Screening Questionso Recruiting Agencyo Referral

Requisition


Attached Document Title

Displays the title of a document attachment that is attached to the requisition. The value for this field is pulled from the Document Title column in the Attachments section on the General tab of the requisition.

Note: This field does not display the title of an attachment that an applicant included in their application, nor does the field display the title of an attachment on the Documents tab of the Applicant Profile page.

Text

Can Apply This field indicates whether or not applicants are allowed to apply to the parent requisition. The report output displays Yes or No. The value for this field is pulled from the Do Not Allow to Apply field on the General tab of the requisition.

Yes/No

Hiring Manager Displays the name ID for the Hiring Manager defined during requisition creation under the Hiring Team section on the General Tab of the requisition. The name displays as Last Name, First Name.

Text

Hiring Manager - ID Displays the user ID for the Hiring Manager defined during requisition creation under the Hiring Team section on the General Tab of the requisition.

Text

Parent Requisition ID Displays the requisition ID for the parent requisition. The requisition ID can be found in the ID column on the Manage Job Requisition page.

Note: Parent requisitions are created when child requisitions (i.e., related requisitions) are created for

Text

146


a job requisition. See Create Related Job Requisition. See Create Related Requisition (Apply to Multiple Jobs).

Parent Requisition Job Display Title

This field displays the display job title of the parent requisition, as defined in the Display Job Title field for the parent requisition on the General tab of the requisition.

Note: A parent requisition indicates that one or more child requisitions have been created for the parent requisition.

Text

Posting - Expiration Date

This field displays the expiration date for a given requisition's job posting. A column displays for each posting location that applies:

o Career Siteo Career Centero Recruiting Agencyo Smart Referralo Job Board

For requisitions with multiple posting types, a separate row appears for each posting type and corresponding expiration date.

The value for this field is pulled from the End Date field on the Postings page.

Date

Primary Location Displays "Yes" or "No" to indicate whether or not the location is defined as the primary location in the Primary Location field on the General tab of the requisition.

Note: The purpose of this field in the report is to help you identify which address is the primary address for the requisition and which address is an additional address added in the Additional Location(s) field on the General tab.

Yes/No

Referral Bonus Amount

Displays the amount of the referral bonus, as defined Numeric

147


in the Referral Bonus field on the General tab of the requisition.

Requisition - Posting Type

This field displays the type of job board posting. The following are the possible values:

o Agency - This value refers to recruiting agencies.o Career Centero Career Siteo Job Boardo Smart Referral

For requisitions with multiple posting types, a separate row appears for each posting type.

Postings for requisitions are visible on the Postings page.

Text

Requisition Address 1

Displays the value in the Address #1 field from the Facility Location pop-up when configuring either the primary address or an additional address for the requisition.

The Facility Location pop-up is accessed by clicking the Edit icon in the Primary Location field or the Additional Location(s) field on the General tab of the requisition.

Text




Text

Requisition Application Workflow Template

This field indicates the type of application workflow template that was used for the requisition. The possible values are "Select," "(Custom)," or the specific name of a workflow that was selected.

Text

148


The value for this field is pulled from the Select Template field on the Application Workflow tab of the requisition.

o The "Select" value indicates that the workflow was not changed from the workflow that was chosen for the requisition template.

o The "(Custom)" value indicates that a custom workflow was created on the Application Workflow tab when configuring the requisition.

o If a specific workflow title appears, this indicates that a specific pre-designed workflow was selected.

Requisition Approval - Date

Displays the requisition approval date. The value for this field is pulled from the Decision Date column on the Past tab of the Requisition Approvals > Requisitions page.

Date

Requisition Approval - Decision

Displays the requisition approval decision. The value for this field is pulled from the Decision column on the Past tab of the Requisition Approvals > Requisitions page.

Text

Requisition Approver - ID

Displays the user ID for the Requisition Approver, set during requisition creation when an approval workflow is defined under the Approvals section on the General tab of the requisition.

Text

Requisition Approver - Name

Displays the name of the requisition approver. The value is pulled from the Approvals section on the job requisition. The name can also be found in the Name column on the Requisition Approval Status pop-up.

Text

Requisition City Displays the value in the City field from the Facility Location pop-up when configuring either the primary address or an additional address for the requisition.

The Facility Location pop-up is accessed by clicking

Text

149


the Edit icon in the Primary Location field or the Additional Location(s) field on the General tab of the requisition.

Requisition Compensation Type

Displays the compensation type selected in the Compensation field on the General tab of the requisition.

Text

Requisition Contact Phone

Displays the phone number from the Contact Phone field on the General tab of the requisition.

Text

Requisition Cost Center

Displays the Cost Center of the requisition, as defined in the Cost Center field on the General Tab when configuring the requisition.

Text

Requisition Cost Center ID

This field displays the ID of the Cost Center Organizational Unit (OU) that is configured for the requisition. The value for this field is pulled from the ID field on the OU configuration page in Manage Organizational Unit Hierarchy.

Text

Requisition Country Displays the value in the Country field from the Facility Location pop-up when configuring either the primary address or an additional address for the requisition.


Text

Requisition Creator - ID

Displays the user ID of the user who created the requisition. The value is pulled from the User ID field on the user record.

Text

Requisition Creator - Name

Displays the name of the user who created the requisition. The value displays as Last Name, First Name. The value is pulled from the Name field on the user record (Note: When viewing the User Record

Text

150


page in edit mode, the value for this field is pulled from the First Name and Last Name fields.).

Requisition Currency Range - High

Displays the value in the second Range field on the General tab of the requisition.

Text

Requisition Currency Range - Low

Displays the value in the first Range field on the General tab of the requisition.

Text

Requisition Currency Type

Displays the value in the Currency field on the General tab of the requisition.

Text

Requisition Date Closed

This field displays the date and time at which the requisition was closed. The value for this field is the date that the Requisition Status field on the General tab of the requisition was changed to Closed.

Date

Requisition Date Filled

This field displays the date and time of the hired applicant's start date. The value for this field can be viewed in the status column on the Manage Applicants page. The value can also be viewed in the Change Status pop-up on the Applicant Profile > Summary tab.

Date

Requisition Date Opened

This field displays the date and time at which the requisition was opened. The value for this field can be viewed on the Requisition Status Change history event date on the Requisition History pop-up.

Date

Requisition Date Posted

This field displays the date and time at which the requisition was posted. The value for this field is pulled from the Effective Date column for the posting on the Postings page.

Date

Requisition Days Open

This field displays the number of days that the requisition has been in an Open status. The value for this field is pulled from the Days Open column on the

Numeric

151


Manage Requisition page.

Requisition Description - External

This field displays the value from External tab in the Description field on the General tab of the requisition.

Text

Requisition Description - Internal

This field displays the value from internal tab in the Description field on the General tab of the requisition.

Text

Requisition Display Job Title

This field displays the display job title of the requisition, as defined in the Display Job Title field for the parent requisition on the General tab of the requisition.

Text

Requisition Division This field displays the Division Organizational Unit (OU) for the requisition, as defined in the Division field on the General tab of the requisition.

Text

Requisition Division ID

This field displays the ID of the Division Organizational Unit (OU) that is configured for the requisition. The value for this field is pulled from the ID field on the OU configuration page in Manage Organizational Unit Hierarchy.

Text

Requisition EEO Category

This field displays the value from the EEO Category field on the General tab of the requisition.

Text

Requisition Employment Type

This field displays the value from the Employment Type field on the General tab of the requisition.

Text

Requisition Full/Part Time

This field indicates which option was selected to the right of the Employment Type field on the General tab of the requisition. The value in the report output is either "Full Time" or "Part Time."

Text

152


Requisition Grade This field displays the Grade Organizational Unit (OU) for the requisition, as defined in the Grade field on the General tab of the requisition.

Text

Requisition Grade ID This field displays the ID of the Division Organizational Unit (OU) that is configured for the requisition. The value for this field is pulled from the ID field on the OU configuration page in Manage Organizational Unit Hierarchy.

Text

Requisition Hold Date This field displays the date on which the requisition was put into an On Hold status. Requisitions are put on hold by changing the status to "On Hold" in the Requisition Status field on the General tab of the requisition.

Date

Requisition ID This field displays the requisition ID for the job requisition. The requisition ID is system defined and can be viewed in multiple places throughout the Applicant Tracking System, such as the following:

o Manage Requisition page - The requisition ID displays in the ID column.

o Manage Applicants page - The requisition ID displays in parentheses to the right of the job title.

o Applicant Profile page - The requisition ID displays in parentheses to the right of the job title.

Tip: When using this field to filter by a specific requisition ID, enter "req[requisition ID" in the value field and select "is equal to" as the operator. For example:

Text

153


Requisition Keywords Displays the keywords for the requisition, as defined in the Keywords field on the General Tab when configuring the requisition.

Text

Requisition Location This field displays the Grade Organizational Unit (OU) for the requisition, as defined in the Grade field on the General tab of the requisition.

Displays each location for a job requisition that has multiple locations. The values are pulled from the Primary Location field and the Additional Location(s) field on the General tab of the job requisition.

Each location displays on a separate row and includes the following columns:

o Requisition Address 1o Requisition Address 2o Requisition Cityo Requisition State/Provinceo Requisition Postal Codeo Requisition Countryo Primary Location - This column indicates whether

or not the location is the primary location for the requisition. The field displays "Yes" if the location is the primary location. The field displays "No" if the location is not the primary location. The value

Text

154


for this field is determined by the location defined in the Primary Location field on the requisition.

Requisition Location ID


Text

Requisition Number of Candidates

Displays total number of candidates that were advanced from a New Submission status for a specific requisition. This count excludes candidates who are in a Hired or Closed status. The value is calculated as the total number of candidates that are advanced on the applicant carousel in Manage Candidates.

Numeric

Requisition Number of Days on Hold

This field displays the total number of days that the requisition was in an On Hold status. Requisitions are put on hold by changing the status to "On Hold" in the Requisition Status field on the General tab of the requisition.

Numeric

Requisition Number of Openings (original)

This field displays the total number of openings for the requisition, as shown in the Openings field on the General tab of the job requisition.

Numeric

Requisition Number of Openings (outstanding)

This field displays the total number of openings for the requisition that have not been filled. The value is calculated by subtracting the number of applicants in a Hired status from the number of openings in the Openings field on the General tab of the job requisition.

Numeric

Requisition Number of Postings

This field displays the total number of postings for the requisition in all time, both active and inactive.

Numeric

155


Requisition Number of Submissions

This field displays the total number of applicants that were self-submitted, added manually by a recruiter and submitted from an agency to a requisition. This count represents all submissions to a specific requisition and includes Hired and Closed applicants. The value for this field can be viewed on the Requisition Snapshot.

Numeric

Requisition Number of Suggested Referrals

Displays the total number of suggested referrals to a requisition. A suggested referral is not yet an applicant. The value for this field is pulled from the Suggested column on the Manage Requisition page.

Numeric

Requisition On-going This field indicates whether or not the hiring for the requisition is defined as on-going. The value displays as "Yes" or "No" in the report. This is determined by whether or not the On going field is checked to the right of the Openings field on the General tab of the job requisition.

Yes/No

Requisition Owner - ID

This field displays the user ID for the user who is selected as the primary owner for the requisition. The value for this field is pulled from the User ID field on the user record.

Displays the user ID for the Requisition Owner(s) defined during requisition creation under the Hiring Team section on the General Tab of the requisition.

Text

Requisition Owner - Name

Displays the name of the requisition owner. Each requisition owner displays on a separate row. The value is pulled from the Owner(s) field on the General tab of the job requisition.

Note: This field does not display the primary owner of the requisition. To view the primary owner, include the Requisition Primary Owner - Full Name field in the report.

Text

156


Requisition Position This field displays the name of the Position Organizational Unit (OU) that was selected for the requisition. The value for this field is pulled from the Job Title field on the General tab of the job requisition.

Text

Requisition Position ID


Text

Requisition Postal Code

Displays the value in the Postal Code field from the Facility Location pop-up when configuring either the primary address or an additional address for the requisition.

The Facility Location pop-up is accessed by clicking the Edit icon in the Primary Location field or the Additional Location(s) field on the General Tab of the requisition.

Text

Requisition Posting - Career Center

This field indicates whether or not the requisition has any postings to the Career Center. The value displays as "Yes" or "No" in the report.


Text

Requisition Posting - Job Board - Clicks

This field displays the number of clicks that a job posting received on a specific job board. The value for this field is pulled from the Clicks column in the Job Board section of the Postings page.

Text

Requisition Posting - Job Board - Language

This field displays the languages in which a job requisition was posted to a specific job board. The value for this field is pulled from the Language column in the Job Board section of the Postings page.

Text

157


Requisition Posting - Job Board - Name

This field displays the name of the job board to which the requisition was posted. The value for this field is pulled from the Name column in the Job Board section of the Postings page.

Text

Requisition Posting - Job Board - Show Salary

This field indicates whether or not the salary has been configured to display in the job board posting. The value displays as "Yes" or "No" in the report.


Text

Requisition Primary Owner - ID


For reference, the primary owner is defined in the Primary Owner field in the Hiring Team section on the General tab of the requisition.

Text

Requisition Primary Owner - Name

Displays the name of the user who is selected as the primary owner for the requisition. The value is pulled from the Primary Owner field in the Hiring Team section on the General tab of the requisition.

Text

Requisition Priority This field displays the hiring priority for the requisition. The value is pulled from the Priority field on the General tab of the requisition.

Text

Requisition Request Creation Date

This field displays the date on which the requisition request was created. The value for this field is pulled from the Target Hire Date field on the General tab of the requisition.

Date

Requisition Reviewer - ID

Displays the user ID for the Requisition Reviewers defined during requisition creation in the Applicant Reviewer(s) section on the General Tab of the requisition.

Text

158


Requisition Reviewer - Name

Displays the name of the applicant reviewer. Each reviewer displays on a separate row. The value is pulled from the Applicant Reviewer(s) field on the General tab of the job requisition.


Numeric

Requisition State/Province

Displays the value in the State/Province field from the Facility Location pop-up when configuring either the primary address or an additional address for the requisition.


Text

Requisition Status This field displays the current status of the requisition. The value for this field is pulled from the Status column on the Manage Requisition page.

Text

Requisition Taken Off Hold Date

This field displays the date on which the requisition was changed from an On Hold status to any other status. The status of a requisition is managed in the Requisition Status field on the General tab of the requisition.

Date

Requisition Target Hire Date

This field displays the date on which the position is targeted to be filled. The value for this field is pulled from the Target Hire Date field on the General tab of the requisition.

Date

Requisition Template Title

This field displays the date on which the position is targeted to be filled. The value for this field is pulled from the Requisition Template field on the General tab of the requisition, or the Template Title field on the General tab of the requisition template.

Text

159


Requisition Time to Fill

Time to Fill is the amount of time it took for an applicant to be hired for the job. The value is calculated as follows: Time to Fill = [Fill Date] – [Date Requisition Status Changes to Open] – [Days Requisition Is on Hold]

Once all the openings are filled for a requisition, then the system updates time to fill value.

Numeric

Requisition Type This field displays the requisition type, either Parent or Related. The value for this field is determined by the type of requisition that is created.

Note: Related requisitions are created when the Add Related Requisition option is selected when configuring requisitions.

Date

Time to Offer This field displays the number of days from the date on which a requisition is posted to the date on which the first offer is extended to a candidate for the requisition. The following calculation is used to determine the value for the field:Time to Offer = [Date First Offer Extended to Candidate] - [Date Requisition Status Changes to Open] - [Days Requisition Is on Hold]

Numeric

UserNote: In Recruiting reports, the user is considered the applicant. For example, if you would like to include the applicant's name in the report, use the User First Name and User Last Name fields, or the User Full Name field.



Text

Allow Reconciliation This field indicates whether or not the user's user record should remain active or be deactivated if the user does not appear in the most recent data feed. The value is pulled from the Allow Reconciliation

Yes/No

160


field on the user record.




Text



Text


Text

Cost Center Approver ID

This field displays the user ID of the cost center approver. The value for this field is pulled from the User ID field on the user record.

Text



Text


Text

161



Text


Text

Display Language This field displays the language in which the user's portal displays when they are logged in, as shown on the User Record, when available. The value is pulled from the Display Language field on the user record. If Display Language is not populated on the User Record, the default language for the OU will be displayed. Unless otherwise changed, the default language setting is English.

Text



Text


Text


Text


Text

162



Text


Text


Text


Text


Text


Text

Location This field displays the name of the user's assigned Location Organizational Unit (OU). The value is pulled from the Location field on the user record.

If the Location OU has been renamed for the portal, the value in the report will reflect the updated name.

Text

163



Text

Location Owner This field displays the owner of the user's assigned Location Organizational Unit (OU). The value is pulled from the Location field on the Define OU page when configuring the OU.

Text


Text


Text


Numeric


Text



Text


Text

164



Text

Position Parent This field displays the parent of the user's assigned Position Organizational Unit (OU). The value is pulled from the Parent field on the Define OU page when configuring OUs.

Text


Text


Text


Text


Yes/No


Text


Text

165



Text


Text

User Creation Date This field displays the date on which the user was created in the system. The value can be found on the Modification User Record page.

Date


Text


Text


Text


Text


Text

User ID This field displays the user's user ID, which is the unique identifier for the user. The value is pulled from

Text

166


the User ID field on the user record.



Text



Text



Text



Text



Text


Date


Date

User Last Name This field displays the user's last name. The value is Text

167


pulled from the Last Name field on the user record.


Text


Text


Text


Text


Text


Text


Text

User Name suffix This field displays the user's name suffix. Examples of name prefixes include II, III, Jr., Sr. The value is

Text

168


pulled from the Suffix field on the user record.


Date


Text






Text

Create a Custom Recruiting ReportName the Report/Select Storage FolderYou can name the report at any point during the report creation process; however, reports cannot be saved until they have been given a name. You can also select a folder in which to store the report.

Name the ReportNaming the report in the Report Designer is required in order to save the report. The SAVE button is not enabled until a report title is entered. The report name should be descriptive and meaningful.

169


To name the report:





To select a folder:


170





171



172













173













174


Calculated Fields








175







176














Column Sorting

177








178














179








180






181







182





183









184















Sharing Tab

185















186












187










188
















189









190






191










192







193


Create Transcript Custom ReportCustom Transcript Reports allow you to report on users' transcript data. The Create Custom Transcript Report page in Online Help provides detailed instructions and a use case for creating this report.




Use Case for Custom Transcript ReportsTranscript Status for Individual Training ItemAcme, Inc. would like to view its employees' completion status for the "Compliance Training" online course. The training needs to be completed by a certain date in order for Acme to meet compliance requirements. While Acme has an email configured that will automatically notify users that they have not yet completed the training and provide the due date for the training, they would also like the report to include each user's manager so that they can compile data on which managers may need coaching in ensuring on-time training completion for their teams. This data can be obtained by creating a Custom Transcript Report.

To create the report, Anna, who is Acme's Learning Director, only needs to add seven fields to the report. She also wants to define filters and sort/summary settings so that the data displays in an organized manner.

Anna configures the following fields and settings in the Custom Report Builder for the Transcript Report:

1. She names the report "Compliance Training Transcript Status Report."2. She selects the Managers folder from the All Folders drop-down. The report will be

saved to this folder. All managers at Acme have access to this folder and will be able to view the report.

3. She clicks SAVE to save the report settings.4. She drags and drops the following fields from the fields list to the report preview pane:

o Transcript Status

194


o Training Titleo Training Typeo User Emailo User Full Nameo User IDo User Manager Name

5. She clicks REFRESH to view the data for the fields in the report preview pane. Note about Refreshing: If you add fields to the report preview pane after you have refreshed the report data, you will need to click REFRESH again in order to see preview data for the fields you just added.

6. She clicks the Field Filters tab so that she can filter the report to only report on the "Compliance Training" online course for users who are not yet in a Completed status.A. She drags and drops the Training Title field from the Fields panel to the Field Filters

tab.B. She sets the condition as "is equal to."C. She enters "Compliance Training" as the training title in the text box to the right of

the condition field.D. She drags and drops the Transcript Status field from the Fields panel to the Field

Filters tab.E. She sets the condition as "is not equal to."F. She selects "Completed" as the option in the Select options field to the right of the

condition field.

7. She clicks SAVE to save the report settings.8. She clicks the Sort tab so that she can sort the report by manager name, and then by

user full name.A. She drags and drops the User Manager Name field from the Fields panel into the

Sort By field.B. She drags and drops the User Full Name field from the Fields panel into the Then

By field.

195


9. She clicks SAVE to save the report settings.10. She clicks the Summary tab. She wants to group the report by manager so that the

report will group each manager's direct reports under the manager's name.A. She drags and drops the User Manager Name field from the Fields panel into the

Summarize by field.

11. She clicks the Schedule tab. She wants to schedule the report to run everyday for the next two weeks.A. She selects Daily from the Schedule drop-down.B. She enters "1" in the Every field.C. She selects 6:00 AM Pacific Time (US & Canada) in the Time of day field.D. She leaves the date as the current date in the Start Date field.E. She sets the date in the End Date field for two weeks from the current date.

196


12. She clicks REFRESH to view the report data in the report preview pane.13. She clicks SAVE to save the report settings.14. She clicks Print Preview from the Actions drop-down to view a printable preview of the

report data to ensure that the report provides the information she needs.15. She clicks Excel Preview from the Actions drop-down to manage the print settings via

Excel and print the report.

Help Video


Permissions

PERMISSION NAME




Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics

197


Transcript Report FieldsThe following fields are available for Custom Transcript Reports:

ILT Facility


ILT Facility Active This field indicates whether or not an ILT Facility is active. The value is pulled from the Active field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Yes/No

ILT Facility Address#1

This field displays the ILT facility address line 1. The value is pulled from the Address #1 field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text



Text

ILT Facility Approval Required

This field indicates whether or not approval is required in order to schedule the facility. The value is pulled from the Approval Required field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Yes/No

ILT Facility City This field displays the city in which the ILT facility is located. The value is pulled from the Town/City field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

ILT Facility Contact This field displays the name of the contact for the ILT facility. The value is pulled from the Contact field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

ILT Facility Country This field displays the name of the country in which the ILT facility is located. The value is pulled from the Country field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

198


ILT Facility Email This field displays the email address of the contact for the ILT facility. The value is pulled from the Email field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

ILT Facility Fax This field displays the fax number of the contact for the ILT facility. The value is pulled from the Fax field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

ILT Facility ID This field displays the ID for the ILT facility. The value is pulled from the ID field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

ILT Facility Name This field displays the name of the ILT facility. The value is pulled from the Name field configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

ILT Facility Occupancy

This field displays the occupancy for the ILT facility. The value is pulled from the Occupancy field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Numeric

ILT Facility On Site This field indicates whether or not the ILT facility is on site. The value is pulled from the On Site field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Yes/No

ILT Facility Owner This field displays the name of the owner for the ILT facility. The value is pulled from the Owner field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

ILT Facility Parent This field displays the ID of the parent for the ILT facility. The value is pulled from the Parent field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

199


ILT Facility Phone This field displays the phone number for the ILT facility. The value is pulled from the Phone field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

ILT Facility Postal Code

This field displays the postal code for the ILT facility. The value is pulled from the Postal Code field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

ILT Facility State This field displays the state/province in which the ILT facility is located. The value is pulled from the Province field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

ILT Facility Time Zone

This field displays the time zone in which the ILT facility is located. The value is pulled from the Time Zone field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

ILT Facility Type This field displays the type of ILT facility, such as building, floor, room, etc. The value is pulled from the Facility Type field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

ILT Seat Allocation


Enrollment Restrictions

This field indicates that enrollment restrictions have been defined for the event. The report displays "Place Enrollment Restrictions" or "Manage Reservations and Restrictions," depending on the option selected in the Place Enrollment Restrictions field or the Manage Reservations and Restrictions field in the Enrollment Reservations and Restrictions section when configuring the Session Defaults tab for the event.

Note: If you add this field to the report, you will also want to add other fields in the ILT Seat Allocation section so that your report will display the specific

Text

200


enrollment restrictions data, such as the number of seats restricted and the organizational unit (OU) and OU type that is being restricted.

Included Subordinates

This field indicates whether or not the Include Subordinates option was selected when configuring enrollment options for an event. The option can be selected when defining settings for the Place Enrollment Restrictions field and the Manage Reservations and Restrictions field in the Enrollment section when configuring the Session Defaults tab for the event.

Note: If you add this field to the report, you will also want to add other fields in the ILT Seat Allocation section so that your report will display the additional data related to this field.

Yes/No

Number of seats reserved

This field indicates the number of seats that have been reserved for a specific organizational unit (OU). Each OU displays in a separate line on the report. The value is pulled from the Place Enrollment Restrictions field or the Manage Reservations and Restrictions field in the Enrollment Reservations and Restrictions section when configuring the Session Defaults tab for the event.

Note: If you add this field to the report, you will also want to add other fields in the ILT Seat Allocation section so that your report will display the specific enrollment reservations/restrictions data, such as the number of seats reserved and the OU and OU for which the seats are reserved.

Numeric

Number of seats restricted

This field indicates the number of seats that have been restricted for an organizational unit (OU) or OU type. The value is pulled from the Place Enrollment Restrictions field in the Enrollment section when configuring the Session Defaults tab for the event. If multiple OUs are restricted, then each OU displays in a separate line on the report.

Note: If you add this field to the report, you will also want to add other fields in the ILT Seat Allocation

Numeric

201


section so that your report will display the specific enrollment restrictions data, such as the number of seats restricted and the OU and OU type that is being restricted.

Order This field indicates the order of the organizational units (OU) that are selected in the Manage Reservations and Restrictions field in the Enrollment Reservations and Restrictions section when configuring the Session Defaults tab for the event.

Note: If you add this field to the report, you will also want to add other fields in the ILT Seat Allocation section so that your report will display the specific enrollment reservations/restrictions data, such as the number of seats restricted and the OU and OU type that is being restricted.

Numeric

Organizational Unit Reserved

This field displays the name of the organizational units (OU) for which seats have been reserved. Each OU displays on a separate line in the report. The value is defined when selecting the OUs in the Place Enrollment Restrictions field or the Manage Reservations and Restrictions field in the Enrollment Reservations and Restrictions section when configuring the Session Defaults tab for the event.

Note: If you add this field to the report, you will also want to add other fields in the ILT Seat Allocation section so that your report will display the specific enrollment reservations/restrictions data, such as the number of seats reserved.

Text

Organizational Unit Restricted

This field displays the name of the organizational units (OU) for which seats have been restricted. Each OU displays on a separate line in the report. The value is defined when selecting the OUs in the Place Enrollment Restrictions field or the Manage Reservations and Restrictions field in the Enrollment Reservations and Restrictions section when configuring the Session Defaults tab for the

Text

202


event.

Note: If you add this field to the report, you will also want to add other fields in the ILT Seat Allocation section so that your report will display the specific enrollment reservations/restrictions data, such as the number of seats restricted.

Organizational Unit Type Reserved

This field displays the name of the organizational unit (OU) type for which seats have been reserved. Each OU type displays on a separate line in the report. The value is defined when selecting the OU type in the Place Enrollment Restrictions field or the Manage Reservations and Restrictions field in the Enrollment Reservations and Restrictions section when configuring the Session Defaults tab for the event.


Text

Organizational Unit Type Restricted

This field displays the name of the organizational unit (OU) type for which seats have been restricted. Each OU type displays on a separate line in the report. The value is defined when selecting the OU type in the Place Enrollment Restrictions field or the Manage Reservations and Restrictions field in the Enrollment Reservations and Restrictions section when configuring the Session Defaults tab for the event.


Text

ILT Session Schedule (Part Level)


203


Part Break Duration This field displays the length of an ILT session part break (in minutes). If there is more than one break for a part, each break will appear in a separate row on the report. The value for this field is pulled from the Duration field in the Part Break section when configuring the Parts Schedule tab for sessions.

Numeric

Part Break Name This field displays the name of an ILT session part break. If there is more than one break for a part, each break will appear in a separate row on the report. The value for this field is pulled from the text field in the Part Break section when configuring the Parts Schedule tab for sessions.

Text

Part Description This field displays the description of an ILT session part provided when the part was created/edited. The value for this field is pulled from the Description field when configuring the Parts Schedule tab for sessions.

Text

Part Duration This field displays the length of an ILT session part in minutes. The duration is calculated using the date and times selected in the part Start Date and End fields, which are configured on the Parts Schedule tab for sessions. The value for this field is pulled from the Start Date field in the Duration section when configuring the Parts Schedule tab for sessions.

Numeric

Part End Date This field displays the date and time the ILT session part ends; usually entered in the time zone of the location where the part is scheduled. The value for this field is pulled from the End field when configuring the Parts Schedule tab for sessions.

Note: To view the time zone associated with this part, include the Part Time Zone field in your report.

Date

Part Location This field displays the facility/location OU where the ILT session part was/will be held. The value for this field is pulled from the Name field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

204


Part Location Address 1

This field displays the first line of the ILT session part location's address as identified in the Facility Information section of the Define Location page. The value for this field is pulled from the Address #1 field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text


This field displays the second line of the ILT session part location's address as identified in the Facility Information section of the Define Location page. The value for this field is pulled from the Address #2 field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

Part Location City This field displays the city field of the ILT session part location's address as identified in the Facility Information section of the Define Location page. The value for this field is pulled from the City field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

Part Location Fax This field displays the ILT session part location's fax number as identified in the Facility Information section of the Define Location page. The value for this field is pulled from the Fax field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

Part Location State This field displays the state/province field of the ILT session part location's address as identified in the Facility Information section of the Define Location page. The value for this field is pulled from the State field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

Part Location Zip This field displays the postal code field of the ILT session part location's address as identified in the Facility Information section of the Define Location page. The value for this field is pulled from the Postal Code field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

Part Training Minutes This field displays the total number of minutes dedicated to training delivery for an ILT session part. Training minutes are calculated by subtracting the

Numeric

205


total break duration for all part breaks from the part duration, as defined when configuring the Parts Schedule tab for sessions.

Part Instructor ID This field displays the user ID of the primary instructor for the session. In the report output, each instructor ID will display in a separate row. The user ID is defined in the User ID field on the user record.

Text

Subject ID This field displays the title of the subject. The value for this field is pulled from the Subject Title field when configuring subjects in Subject Management.

Text

SCORM 2004 Quiz DataThe fields in this section can report on SCORM 2004 training data for users who accessed and completed training both through web applications and using the mobile app.


SCO Name SCO name as appears on the course manifest. Text

SCO ID SCO ID as appears on the course manifest. Text

Quiz Attempt How many times the learner attempted the quiz. Text

Quiz Attempt Date

The date when the specific attempt occurred (this field is correlated with the "Attempt" field).

Text

Question ID Unique label for the interaction. Text

Question Description

A brief informative description of the interaction. Text

Question Type Which type of interaction is recorded. Text

Question Weighting

Weight given to the interaction relative to other interactions. Text

User Response Data generated when a learner responds to an interaction. Text

Response Status Judgment of the correctness of the learner response. Text

Quiz Score Number that reflects the performance of the learner for the objective.

Text

Quiz Success Status

Indicates whether the learner has mastered the SCO. Text

SCO Data

206



SCO Name This is the SCO name as appears on the course manifest. Text

SCO ID This is the SCO ID as appears on the course manifest. Text

Progress Measure

This is the measure of the progress the learner has made toward completing the SCO.

Numeric

SCO Bookmark

This is the learner’s current location in the SCO. Text

Score Max The maximum value in the range for the raw score. Numeric

Score Min The minimum value in the range for the raw score. Numeric

Score Raw The number that reflects the performance of the learner relative to the range bounded by the values of min and max.

Numeric

Score Scaled The number that reflects the performance of the learner. Numeric

Suspend Data

Space to store and retrieve data between learner sessions. Text

TrainingThis section is only available for the custom Training Report, Training Plan Report, Transaction Report, and Transcript Report.


Ability to Select Session Admins and Managers

This field indicates whether or not the event has been configured to allow administrators and managers to select sessions for end users. The value is pulled from the Ability to Select Sessions field when configuring the Properties tab for the event.

Yes/No

Ability to Select Sessions End Users

This field indicates whether or not the event has been configured to allow end users to select sessions. The value is pulled from the Ability to Select Sessions field when configuring the Properties tab for the event.

Yes/No

Auto-Management of Waitlist

This field indicates whether or not the waitlist will be auto-managed. The value is pulled from the Allow

Yes/No

207


Auto-Management of Waitlist field when configuring the Properties tab for the event or the Details tab for the session.

Auto-Registration of Waitlist

This field indicates whether or not users on the waitlist will be auto-registered upon granting the user a session seat. The value is pulled from the Auto-Register User upon Granting of Waitlist field when configuring the Properties tab for the event or the Details tab for the session.

Yes/No

Cost Currency This field displays the currency that is defined for the learning object (LO). The value for this field is pulled from the applicable currency field for the LO. For example, the session currency is pulled from the Price field on the Details tab when configuring the session.

Text

Course Code This field displays the unique identifier for the learning object (LO). This value is automatically generated for LOs when they are created if the Course Code functionality is enabled via Course Code Preferences. This value can be modified by administrators on the General tab of the Course Catalog.

Text

Course Publication Created By

This field displays the name of the user who created the publication. The value displays as [Last Name], [First Name]. The value is pulled from the Created By column on the Course Publisher page.

Text

Course Publication Creation Date

This field displays the date on which the course was published. The value is pulled from the Date Created column on the Course Publisher page.

Date

Course Publication Published?

This field indicates whether or not the publication is published. The possible values are "Published" and "Pending Published." The value is pulled from the Status column on the Course Publisher page.

Yes/No

208


Course Publication Title

This field the title of the publication. The value is pulled from the Title field on the Publication Information page, which is the page on which administrators create online courses.

Text

Course Rating Reviewer Is Anonymous

This field indicates whether or not the review is anonymous. When the user rates the course anonymously, the report output displays "True." When the user does not rate the course anonymously, the report output displays "False."

The value is pulled from the Make my review anonymous checkbox on the training review pop-up. Users can check the box so that their name does not appear when they submit their training review.

Yes/No

Course Rating Reviewer

This field displays the name of the user who reviewed the course. The value displays as [Last Name], [First Name]. The value is pulled from the user record of the user who submitted the review.

If the user checked the Rate Anonymously box when reviewing, then the field will be blank on the report output.

Text

Created By (Name) This field displays the name of the user who created the training. The value displays as [Last Name], [First Name]. The value is pulled from the user record of the user who created the training.

For sessions, the user in this field is the same user as the Training Session Admin.

Text

Created By (User ID) This field displays the user ID of the user who created the training. The value is pulled from the User ID field on the user record of the user who created the training.


Text

Curriculum Section This field displays the name of the curriculum Text

209


Title (Training) section. The value is pulled from the Title field on the Add Section pop-up when configuring the Structure tab for curricula.

Electronic Signature Message

This field displays the message configured with the electronic signature at the Course Catalog. The value is pulled from the Signature Message field on the General tab of the Course Catalog.

Text

Electronic Signature Required

This field indicates whether or not an electronic signature is required for a learning object (LO). The report displays "Yes" if an electronic signature is required and "No" if an electronic signature is not required. The value is pulled from the Required Electronic Signature field on the General tab of the Course Catalog.

Yes/No

Email Configuration This field displays the option that was selected when deciding the type of emails for the training. The following are the possible values:

o System Defaultso Custom Emailso No Emails

This field applies to all learning object (LO) types for which emails can be configured.

Text

Equivalent Training Title

This field displays the learning objects (LO) that are defined as equivalent training. The LOs display in one line on the report output, with each LO title separated by a comma. The value for this field is pulled from the Training Equivalence field on the General tab of the Course Catalog.

Text

Equivalent Subjects This field displays the subjects that are associated with the learning object (LO). The value for this field is pulled from the Subjects tab in the Course Catalog for the LO. Each subject displays on the same line in the report output, separated by a comma.

Text

210


Event Number This field displays the value from the Event Number field on the Properties tab when configuring events.

Text

Inside Curriculum This field indicates whether or not the learning object (LO) is part of a curriculum. The value in the report output is either Yes or No. LOs are added to curricula from the Structure tab when configuring curricula.

Yes/No

Interest Tracking Allowed

This field displays the value from the Allow interest tracking field on the Properties tab when configuring events. The value in the report output is either Yes or No.

Yes/No

Keyword This field displays the value from the Keywords field for learning objects (LO) that include keywords. Each keyword displays on the same line, separated by a comma. Keywords can be added from the General tab in the Course Catalog. They can also be added for individual LOs.

Text

Language Equivalent Training Title

This field displays the language equivalent learning object (LO) for the training. The value is pulled from the Language Equivalents field on the General tab in the Course Catalog.

Text

Language This field displays the languages defined for the learning object (LO). The value is pulled from the Available Languages field on the General tab in the Course Catalog. Each language displays on the same line in the report output, separated by a comma.

Text

Last Modified By (User ID)

This field displays the user ID of the user who last modified the learning object (LO). The value is pulled from the user record of the user who modified the training.

Text

211


Last Modified By This field displays the name of the user who last modified the learning object (LO). The value for this field is pulled from the modification history for the LO. The name displays as [Last Name], [First Name].

Text

Last Modified Date This field displays the date and time on which the training was last modified. The value for this field is pulled from the modification history for the learning object (LO).

Date

Latest Version This field displays the version number for the learning object (LO). The version number is automatically created by the system when the changes to an LO are saved.

Text

Material Type Active This field indicates whether or not the material is active. The value is pulled from the Active column on the Material Administration page. The value in the report output is either Yes or No.

Yes/No

Material Type Name This field displays the material type. The value is pulled from the Material Type field when configuring materials.

Note: Material types are created on the Manage Material Types page in Materials Management.

Text

Material URL This field displays the material URL. The value is pulled from the Material Source field when "URL" is selected as the option when configuring materials.


Text

MAX SCORE This field displays the maximum score that a user can receive for the learning object (LO). The value is defined for an individual LO. This field applies to multiple LO types.

Numeric

Maximum Number of This field displays the maximum number of times a Numeric

212


Test Entries user can take the test to attempt a passing score before they are locked out of the test and are unable to take it again. The value for this field is pulled from the Attempts Allowed field on the General page when creating the test. This value only applies to tests.

Minimum Part Attendance

This field displays the minimum number of parts a user must attend in order for the session to be marked completed in their transcript. The value is pulled from the Attendance field on the Details tab when configuring sessions.

Numeric

Multiple Session Enrollment Allowed

This field indicates whether the event is configured to allow users to attend multiple sessions for the event. The value for this field is pulled from the Allow Users to Attend Multiple Sessions option on the Properties page when creating the event.

Yes/No

Number of Attempts Allowed Tests

This field displays the maximum number of times that a user can take the test. The value is pulled from the Attempts Allowed field on the General step when configuring tests.

Numeric

Objectives This field displays the objectives for the event. The value is pulled from the Objectives field when configuring the Properties tab for the event.

Text

OU Training Availability Include Subordinates

This field indicates whether or not subordinate organizational units (OU) were included in the availability for the learning object (LO). The value for this field is pulled from the Include Subordinates column on the Availability page when configuring training in the Course Catalog.

The report output displays "Yes" if subordinates are included or is blank if the checkbox is not selected in the Include Subordinates column.

Note: This field only applies to the OU criteria that is defined on the Availability tab; it does not apply to

Yes/No

213


individual user criteria that is defined on the Availability tab. To include the availability data for individual users who are defined in the availability criteria on the Availability tab, you must include the User Training Availability fields in the report output.

OU Training Availability Pre-Approved

This field indicates whether or not users within the organizational unit (OU) are pre-approved for the training. The value for this field is pulled from the Include Pre-Approved column on the Availability page when configuring training in the Course Catalog.

The report output displays "Yes" if box is checked in the Pre-Approved column. The report displays "No" if the box is not checked.

Note: This field only applies to the OU criteria that is defined on the Availability tab; it does not apply to individual user criteria that is defined on the Availability tab. To include the availability data for individual users who are defined in the availability criteria on the Availability tab, you must include the User Training Availability fields in the report output.

Yes/No

OU Training Availability Register Upon Approval

This field indicates whether or not users within the organizational unit (OU) are automatically registered for the training when they are approved for the training. The value for this field is pulled from the Register Upon Approval column on the Availability page when configuring training in the Course Catalog.

The report output displays "Yes" if box is checked in the Register Upon Approval column. The report displays "No" if the box is not checked.


Yes/No

214


OU Training Availability Type

This field displays the training availability type for the organizational unit (OU). The following are the possible values that will appear in the report:

o Featuredo Requiredo Suggestedo Visible - Note: This value only appears in the

report if "None" is selected in the Availability Type field.

The value is defined in the Availability Type column on the Availability tab in the Course Catalog. The column displays a drop-down, from which the administrator selects an option to define the availability type.


Text

OU Training Availability

This field displays the organizational unit (OU) availability criteria that is configured for the training. The value is pulled from the Criteria column on the Availability page in the Course Catalog whenan OU is selected in the Select Criteria drop-down.


Text

OU Training Request Form

This field displays the name of the training request form that was selected for the learning object (LO) for the organizational unit (OU). The value for this field is pulled from the Training Request Form column on the Availability page when configuring training in the

Text

215


Course Catalog.


Parent Subjects This field displays the name of the parent of the subject that is defined for the training. Multiple parent subjects display in the same line in the report output, separated by a comma. This field applies to multiple learning object (LO) types.

Text

Post-Work Training Object IDs

This field displays the Learning Object ID for any learning objects (LOs) that are set as post-work for the associated LO. The value for this field is pulled from the Post-Work field on the General page of the Course Catalog.

Text

Post-Work Training Titles

This field displays the names of the post-work training that is configured for the learning object (LO). This field applies to multiple LO types.

Text

Prerequisite Training Object ID

This field displays the Learning Object ID of the prerequisite training.

Note: The object ID for a learning object (LO) is a unique, system-generated value that is created for all LOs.

Text

Prerequisite Training Title

This field displays the title of prerequisite training that is configured for the learning object (LO). Each prerequisite training title appears on a separate row in the report output.

The value for this field is pulled from the Name column in the Prerequisites table for the prerequisite within the LO type. For example, when configuring an LO in the Course Catalog (all but Library and

Text

216


Program LO types), the prerequisite title appears in the Name column in the Prerequisites table on the Prerequisites tab.

Pre-Work Training Object IDs

This field displays the Learning Object ID for any learning objects (LOs) that are set as pre-work for the associated LO. The value for this field is pulled from the Pre-Work field on the General page of the Course Catalog.

Text

Pre-Work Training Titles

This field displays the names of the pre-work training that is configured for the learning object (LO). This field applies to multiple LO types.

Text

Provider City This field displays the city of the training provider. The value is pulled from the City field on the Vendor Details page when configuring vendors.

Note: If you add this field to the report, you may also want to add the Training Provider field, which is located in the Training section and displays the name of the training provider.

Text

Provider Location Address 1

This field displays the address line 1 of the training provider. The value is pulled from the Address #1 field on the Vendor Details page when configuring vendors.


Text



Note: If you add this field to the report, you may also want to add the Training Provider field, which is located in the Training section and displays the name

Text

217


of the training provider.

Provider State This field displays the state for the training provider. The value is pulled from the State, Postal Code field on the Vendor Details page when configuring vendors.


Text

Provider Zip This field displays the ZIP Code for the training provider. The value is pulled from the State, Postal Code field on the Vendor Details page when configuring vendors.


Text

Secondary Training Provider

This field displays the name of the secondary vendor for the event. The value is pulled from the Secondary Vendor field on the Properties tab when configuring events.

Note: This field is only available for portals with the ability to configure multiple providers for a session. For more information about this feature, see the Session Options Overview topic in Online Help.

Text

Session Cost Type This field displays the cost type for the individual cost that has been added to the session, such as materials, travel, catering, or room rental. The value for this field is pulled from the cost type that is selected when a Cost Per Session is added on the Details page when creating the session.

Numeric

Session Cost This field displays the cost amount for the individual cost that has been added to the session. The value for this field is pulled from the cost amount that is

Numeric

218


entered when a Cost Per Session is added on the Details page when creating the session.

Training Roster Comments

This field displays the comments entered in the Comments section of the Roster page. Each comment displays on a separate line of the report.

Text

Test Graders (ID) This field displays the user ID of the test grader for the test. If there are multiple test graders, the user IDs display on the same line and are separated by a comma. The value is pulled from the user record of the test grader.

Text

Time Limit Minutes (Tests)

This field displays the number of minutes that is the maximum amount of time a user has to take the test. The value is defined on the Structure tab when configured tests.

Numeric

Total Number of Requesting Users

This field displays the number of users who have requested the training. This field applies to multiple learning object (LO) types.

Numeric

Total Seats Available This field displays the total number of seats that are currently available for the session (i.e., seats that have not yet been registered for). The value is pulled from the Seats Available field on the Roster page.

Numeric

Total Seats Taken This field displays the number of seats for which users are registered. The value is calculated by subtracting the total number of registrations from the total number of seats allowed for the session.

Numeric

Total Session Cost This field displays the total of all costs that have been added to the session. The value for this field is pulled from the Total Cost per Session field that is displayed on the Details page when creating the session.

Numeric

Training Active This field indicates whether or not the learning object Numeric

219


(LO) is active or inactive. The report displays "Y" for active and "N" for inactive. The value is pulled from the Active field for the LO.

Training Advanced Reg. Deadline

This field displays the date and time the advanced registration period will end for the event or session. For events, the value is pulled from the Advance Registration lasts for X days after session is created field on the Session Defaults tab. For sessions, the value is pulled from the X is the number of days Advanced Registration lasts after the session is created field on the Details tab.

Numeric

Training Competencies

This field displays all competencies associated with the learning object (LO), via the course catalog. The localized values for the competencies are displayed. All competencies are listed in the same cell in the report, separated by a comma. The value is pulled from the list of competencies that are defined for the LO.

Text

Training Contact (User ID)

This field displays the user ID of the person who ILT training participants can contact for more information about the training. The value is pulled from the user record of the user who is the training contact.

Note: This field only applies to Event and Session learning object types.

Text

Training Contact This field displays the name of the person who ILT training participants can contact for more information about the training. The value displays as [Last Name], [First Name]. The value is pulled from the Training Contact field for the learning object. This field applies to both sessions and events.

There may be a different training contact for the event than for the session, and vice versa. If your report includes both Event and Session training types, the contact for the event will display on a separate row from the contact for the session. If there are multiple sessions for an event, there may be a

Text

220


different contact for each session. The contact for each session will appear on a separate row in the report.


Training Created Date

This field displays the date and time the learning object was created. Time will display in the time zone of the user who created the training.

Date

Training Credits This field displays the number of credits a user will receive once they complete the training. The value is pulled from the Credits field on the General tab in the Course Catalog.

Numeric

Training Deactivation Date

This field displays the date on which the training will be deactivated. The value for this field is pulled from the Deactivate this course on X date on the General tab when configuring training in the Course Catalog.

Date

Training Description This field displays the description provided for the learning object. The value is pulled from the Description field for the learning object.

Text

Training End Date This field displays the date and time the session part ends. The value displays in the time zone of the user running the report. If you would also like to view the time zone associated with the part, include the Part Time Zone field in your report.

The value for the Training End Date field is pulled from the End field in the DATE AND TIME section on the Parts Schedule tab for the session.

Date

Training Eval 1 This field displays the evaluation ID of the Level one evaluation associated with the learning object. The value for this field is pulled from the evaluations that are defined for the learning object (LO) on the

Numeric

221


Evaluations tab within Course Catalog.

Training Eval 2 This field displays the evaluation ID of the Level two evaluation associated with the learning object. The value for this field is pulled from the evaluations that are defined for the learning object (LO) on the Evaluations tab within Course Catalog.

Numeric

Training Eval 3 This field displays the evaluation ID of the Level three evaluation associated with the learning object. The value for this field is pulled from the evaluations that are defined for the learning object (LO) on the Evaluations tab within Course Catalog.

Numeric

Training Hours This field displays the total number of hours dedicated to training delivery. This field only applies to Event, Material, Test, and Video learning objects (LO).

For ILT sessions, training hours are calculated by subtracting the total break duration from the training duration of all scheduled parts.

For other LO types, the training hours are defined by the administrator in the Training Hours field on the General tab of the Course Catalog. The purpose of entering a value is to display the expected hours it will take users to complete the training.

Numeric

Dev Plan Training ID For ILT sessions, this field displays the Session ID entered by the administrator in the Session ID field on the Details tab when configuring the session.

For other LO types, an ID is generated by the system on the back end when the learning object is created.

Text

Training Locator Number

This field displays the unique, sequential number that is assigned to a session by the system when the session is created. The value is pulled from the Locator Number field on the Details tab for the session.

Numeric

Training Max This field displays the maximum number of users Numeric

222


Registration who can register for the session. The value is pulled from the Details tab when configuring the session.

Training Min Registration

This field displays the minimum number of users who can register for the session. The value is pulled from the Details tab when configuring the session.

Numeric

Training Object ID This field displays the unique, system generated learning object ID that is created for all learning objects. This object ID is used to identify learning objects for historical data loads of transcript information.

Numeric

Training Price This field displays the price charged to register for a learning object (LO). This field contains numeric values only and does not include the currency associated with the price. The value is pulled from the Pricing tab in the Course Catalog when configuring the LO.

Numeric

Training Provider This field displays the name of the training provider/vendor associated with a learning object (LO). The value is pulled from the provider/vendor field on the associated LO.

Text

Training Purpose This field displays the purpose for the training, as defined by the administrator in the Training Purpose field on the General tab of the Course Catalog.

Training purposes are created by the administrator in ADMIN > TOOLS > LEARNING > CATALOG MANAGEMENT > TRAINING PURPOSE.

Note: The Training Purpose field in the Transcript section of custom reports is an end user field. The value in the report is the training purpose selected by the user when they requested the training.

Text

Training Reg Deadline

This field displays the time and date when users may no longer register for a session. Time is displayed in the user's time zone using a 24-hour clock. The value

Numeric

223


is pulled from the Registration Deadline field on the Details tab when configuring the session.

Training Skills This field displays the resume skills associated with a learning object (LO). The value is pulled from the Skills tab when configuring the LO in the Course Catalog. All skills appear on the report in the same cell separated by a comma.

Skills are created by the administrator in ADMIN > TOOLS > SUCCESSION MANAGEMENT > RESUME. See Define Attributes.

Numeric

Training Start Date This field displays the date and time the part begins. The value displays in the time zone of the user running the report. If you would also like to view the time zone associated with the part, include the Part Time Zone field in your report.

The value for the Training Start Date field is pulled from the Start Date field in the DATE AND TIME section on the Parts Schedule tab for the session.

Date

Training Status This field displays the status of the learning object (i.e., Approved, Expired, Tentative, Completed). This field does not display user transcript status for the learning object. For that, be sure to include the Transcript Status field in your report.

For a list of training statuses and descriptions, see the Transcripts Troubleshooting Guide topic in Online Help.

Text

Training Subjects This field displays the name of the subjects that are configured for the learning object. This field separates subjects into individual rows and supports localization. The value is pulled from the Subjects tab in the Course Catalog.

Text

Training Title This field displays the title of the learning object (LO). The value is pulled from the Title field for the LO.

Text

224


Training Type This field displays the type of learning object (LO), such as Online Course, Event, Program, Cohort, Test. The value for this field is determined by the type of LO that was created by the administrator or uploaded via the data load wizard.

Text

Training Version Comments

This field displays the comments that were entered by the administrator when the version was created. The value for this field is pulled from the Comments field that is available when creating a new version of a learning object (LO). The location of the field varies by LO.

Text

Training Version Effective Date

This field displays the date on which the version is effective. The location and name of the field in the system will vary based on the learning object type. For example, the value for this field for certifications is pulled from the Effective Date field on the Confirm page when configuring a new version of a certification.

Date

Training Version This field displays the version number, if the learning object (LO) has multiple versions. The value for this field is usually pulled from the Version column on the Administration/Management page for the associated LO, such as the Certification Administration page and the Curricula Administration page.

Text

User Course Review Desc

This field displays the user's review of the training. The value is pulled from the Write your review for this training here field on the training review pop-up.

Text

User Course Review Title

This field displays the title that the user entered for their review of the training. The value is pulled from the Enter review title here field on the training review pop-up.

Text

User Training This field indicates whether or not subordinates of the Text

225


Availability Include Subordinates

user are included in the availability for the learning object (LO). The value for this field is pulled from the Include Subordinates option on the Availability page when configuring training in the Course Catalog.


Note: This field only applies to individual users who are added to the Availability tab; it does not apply to organizational unit (OU) criteria that is defined on the Availability tab. To include OU training availability criteria data, you must include the OU Training Availability fields in the report output.

User Training Availability Pre-Approved

This field indicates whether or not the user on the Availability tab is pre-approved for the training. The value for this field is pulled from the Include Pre-Approved column on the Availability page in the Course Catalog.



Yes/No

User Training Availability Register Upon Approval

This field indicates whether or not the user on the Availability tab is automatically registered for the training when they are approved for the training. The value for this field is pulled from the Register Upon Approval column on the Availability page when configuring training in the Course Catalog.


Note: This field only applies to individual users who are added to the Availability tab; it does not apply to organizational unit (OU) criteria that is defined on the

Yes/No

226


Availability tab. To include OU training availability criteria data, you must include the OU Training Availability fields in the report output.

User Training Availability Type

This field displays the training availability type for the user availability criteria that is configured for the training. The following are the possible values that will appear in the report:





Text

User Training Availability

This field displays the user availability criteria that is configured for the training. The value is pulled from the users in the Criteria column on the Availability page in the Course Catalog when "Users" is selected in the Select Criteria drop-down.


Text

User Training This field displays the name of the training request Text

227


Request Form form that was selected for the user availability criteria for an individual user. The value for this field is pulled from the Training Request Form column on the Availability page in the Course Catalog.


User Course Rating This field displays the rating submitted by the user for the training. The value is pulled from the star rating that is given by the user on the training review pop-up. The report displays a number based on the number of stars the user selected as the rating.

Numeric

Waitlists Allowed This field indicates whether or not the event or session allows waitlists. The report displays "True" if waitlists are allowed and displays "False" waitlists are not allowed. For events, the value is pulled from the Allow waitlist for sessions in this event field on the Session Defaults tab. For sessions, the value is pulled from the Allow waitlist for sessions in this event field on the Details tab when configuring the session.

Yes/No

Training Request FormsThis section is only available for the custom Multi-Module Report and the Transcript Report.


Form Description This field displays the description provided for the training request form associated with a learning object on the user's transcript. The value is pulled from the Description field when configuring training request forms.

Text

Form Instruction This field displays the text that appears at the top of the training request form as instructions. The value is

Text

228


pulled from the Instructions field when configuring training request forms.

Form Owners This field displays the names of the users who own the training request form that is associated with a learning object on the user's transcript. Owners have access to the form and can modify all user forms. The value is pulled from the Form Owners field when configuring training request forms.

Text

Form Submission Status

This field displays the status of the training request form associated with a learning object on the user's transcript. The standard statuses are Not Started, Submitted, Modified, Completed, and Cancelled. However, the statuses may appear differently in your portal, since they can be renamed on the Manage Form Status Names page.

The value for the Form Submission Status field is pulled from the Status field on the transcript page.

Text

Form Title This field displays the text that appears at the top of the training request form as instructions. The value is pulled from the Title field when configuring training request forms.

Text

TranscriptThis section is only available for the custom Test Report, Transaction Report, and Transcript Report.


Archived from Transcript?

This field indicates whether or not the learning object (LO) has been moved to the user's archived transcript. The report displays "Yes" if the LO has been archived and displays "No" if the LO is not archived.

Yes/No

Assign Comments This field displays comments or instructions entered by the assignor, if the training was assigned. If no comments were entered at the time of the

Yes/No

229


assignment, "Initial Request" appears in this field on the report output.

Comments are entered by the assignor in the Add a Comment field on the Assign Training page.

Assigned by (ID) This field displays the user ID of the user who assigned the training. The value is pulled from the user record of the user who assigned the training.

Text

Assigned by (name) This field displays the name of the user who assigned the training. The value displays as [Last Name], [First Name]. The value is pulled from the user record of the user who assigned the training.

Text

Assigned This field indicates whether or not the learning object (LO) was assigned to the user (rather than the user requesting the LO). The report displays "Yes" if the LO was assigned and displays "No" if the LO was not assigned.

Yes/No

Cancellation Reason Comments

This field displays the comments entered when canceling the session. The value is pulled from the Additional Comment field on the Session Details page.

Sessions are canceled by clicking the Cancel Session icon in the Session Options column on the Search All Sessions page.

Text

Cancellation Reason This field displays the reason selected for canceling the session. The value is pulled from the Please select a reason drop-down on the Session Details page.


Note: Deleted cancellation reasons will persist in reporting in order to allow reporting on cancellation reasons used in the past.

Text

230


Curriculum Completion Percentage

This field enables reporting on the completion percentage of curricula. The completion percentage for each user is calculated once the user completes the first training item in the curriculum. The value is pulled from the Curriculum Progress field in the Curricula Player.Use Case1. Ella wants to report on the progress of students

who are taking a particular curriculum so that her customer’s account managers can be prepared for conversations with their clients.

2. Ella creates a new custom Transcript report and adds the Curriculum Percentage Completion field to the report builder.

3. When Ella views the report output, she can see how much of a curriculum a student has completed based on the students who are registered for a curriculum and have opened the curriculum in the Curricula Player. She also sorts the column by percentage to see which students are at the highest and lowest completion percentage.

Note: Upon implementation of this field for the October '15 release, for existing curricula, users will need to re-access the Curricula Player for a particular curriculum in order for completion percentage to calculate. For new curricula created after this enhancement, completion percentage will be calculated when the user accesses the curriculum in the Curricula Player.

Numeric

Exempted By(ID) This field displays the user ID of the person who approved or denied the exemption request for a learning object on the user's transcript. The value is pulled from the user record of the user who exempted the training.

Text

Exempted By(Name) This field displays the name of the person who approved or denied the exemption request for a learning object on the user's transcript. The value

Text

231


displays as [Last Name], [First Name]. The value is pulled from the user record of the user who approved or denied the exemption request.

Exemption Comments (Exemptor)

This field displays the comments entered by the person who approved or denied the exemption request. The value is pulled from the Comments field on the Exempt Response pop-up.

Text

Exemption Comments (User)

This field displays the comments entered by the user when requesting exemption from the training. The value is pulled from the Comments field on the Exemption Request pop-up when exempting training from the Training Details page.

Text

Exemption Date This field displays the date and time an exemption request was approved or denied. Time is displayed in UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) using either a 12 or 24 hour clock, based on the user's culture setting. The value is pulled from the Date column on the Completed tab of the Exemption Requests page.

Text

Exemption Reasons (Exemptor)

This field displays the reason selected by the exemptor when they approved or denied the exemption request for a learning object on a user's transcript. The value is pulled from the Indicate Reason field on the Exempt Response pop-up.

Text

Exemption Reasons (User)

This field displays the reason selected by the user when they requested an exemption for a learning object on their transcript. The value is pulled from the Indicate Reason field on the Exemption Request pop-up.

Text

Last Transcript Status Change Date

This field displays the date and time of the most recent change to the user's transcript status in regards to a learning object. Time is displayed in the user's time zone using a 12 or 24 hour clock, based on the user's culture setting. The value is pulled from

Date

232


the Approval History section on the Training Details page of the transcript.

Past Due Aging This field displays the number of days a learning object is past due for completion by a user, if a due date was assigned. The value is calculated by subtracting the current date from the due date.

Numeric

Removal Comments This field displays the comments provided by the person who removed a learning object from a user's transcript, if comments were provided and the training was removed. The value is pulled from the comments box on the remove training page.

Text

Removal Reason This field displays the reason provided by the person who removed a learning object from a user's transcript, if comments were provided and the training was removed. The value is pulled from the comments box on the remove training page.

Text

Required This field indicates whether or not a learning object has been identified as required training for the user. The report displays "Yes" if the learning object is required and displays "No" if the learning object is not required. The value for this field is pulled from the Availability Type setting on the Availability tab within the Course Catalog.

Yes/No

Session Withdrawal Date

This field displays the date on which the user withdrew from the session. The value is pulled from the Approval History section on the Training Details page of the transcript.

Date

Suggested This field indicates whether or not a learning object has been identified as suggested training for the user. The report displays "Yes" if the learning object is suggested and displays "No" if the learning object is not suggested. The value for this field is pulled from the Availability Type setting on the Availability tab within the Course Catalog.

Yes/No

233


Training Badge Point Value

This field displays the point value for the Learning badge that was automatically awarded to the user for completing the training. The badge appears on the Training Completion page in the user’s transcript.

The point value for a Learning badge is configured by the administrator in Badge & Points Preferences. Learning badges are added to individual learning objects on the General tab of the Course Catalog.

The value for the Training Badge Point Value field is pulled from the Points field on the Add Badge pop-up in Badge & Points Preferences.

Numeric

Training Badge Title This field displays the title of the Learning badge that was automatically awarded to the user for completing the training. The badge appears on the Training Completion page in the user’s transcript.

Learning badges are configured by the administrator in Badge & Points Preferences and are added to individual learning objects on the General tab of the Course Catalog.

The value for the Training Badge Title field is pulled from the Title field on the Add Badge pop-up in Badge & Points Preferences.

Text

Training Link Expiration Date

This field displays the date on which the user will no longer have access to the learning object (LO) after they register for the LO. The value is pulled from the Default Link Expiration field on the Pricing tab for the LO in the Course Catalog.

Date

Training Point Value This field displays the point value that was awarded to the user for completing the training. The point value is the number of points that were configured for the badge at the time that the user completed the training.


Text

234


The value for the Training Point Value field is pulled from the Training Completion page, which is accessed from the user's Completed transcript page in Universal Profile.

Training Purpose Category

This field displays the training purpose category selected by the user who approved the learning object. The value is pulled from the Select Category drop-down in the Purpose column on the View Pending Requests page.

Training purpose categories are created by the administrator in ADMIN > TOOLS > LEARNING > CATALOG MANAGEMENT > TRAINING PURPOSE.

Text

Training Purpose This field displays the training purpose selected by the user when they requested the learning object. The value is pulled from the Request pop-up when the user clicks REQUEST to request the training.

The Training Purpose custom reports field only applies if Training Purpose functionality is activated for the portal.

Text

Transcript Assigned Date

This field displays the date and time the learning object was added to the user's transcript. Time is displayed in the user's time zone using a 12 or 24 hour clock, based on the user's culture setting. The value is pulled from the Approval History tab on the Training Details page in the transcript.

Date

Transcript Completed Date

This field displays the date and time the learning object was marked complete. Time is displayed in the user's time zone using a 24 hour clock. The value is pulled from the Approval History tab on the Training Details page in the transcript.

Date

Transcript Due Date This field displays the date by which the user must complete the learning object, if a due date was assigned. The value is pulled from the Due field on the transcript.

Date

235


Transcript Registration Date

This field displays the time and date the learning object moved to registered status on the user's transcript. Time is displayed in the user's time zone using a 12 or 24 hour clock, based on the user's culture setting. The value is pulled from the Approval History tab on the Training Details page in the transcript.

Date

Transcript Removed Date

This field displays the time and date the learning object removed from the user's transcript. Time is displayed in the user's time zone using a 12 or 24 hour clock, based on the user's culture setting. The value is pulled from the Approval History tab on the Training Details page in the transcript.

Date

Removed from Transcript?

This field indicates if a learning object was removed from a user's transcript. The report displays a value of "1" if the training was removed and displays a value of "0" if the training has not been removed.

Yes/No

Transcript Score This field displays the score the user received on a learning object completion attempt. The value is pulled from the Score field on the Training Details page in the transcript.

For sessions, the score that displays is pulled from the Score column on the Roster tab of the Session Roster page.

Numeric

Transcript Status This field displays the user's transcript status with regards to a learning object. The value is pulled from the Status field on the transcript page.

Text

# Parts User Attended

This field displays the number of session parts the user attended. The value is pulled from the Attendance column on the Session Roster page for the session in Manage Events and Sessions.

Numeric

Waitlist Priority Rank This field displays the user's priority order on the waitlist. The value is pulled from the Order column on the Waitlist page for the session in Manage Events

Numeric

236


and Sessions.

Withdrawal Reason Comments

This field displays the comments the user entered when withdrawing from the session. The value is pulled from the Comments field on the Session Details page, which is accessed by clicking Withdraw from the options drop-down for the session on the transcript page.

Text

Withdrawal Reason This field displays the reason the user selected for withdrawing from the session. The value is pulled from the Please select a reason drop-down on the Session Details page, which is accessed by clicking Withdraw from the options drop-down for the session on the transcript page.

Text

UserThis section is available in custom Certification, Compensation, Competency, Compliance, Development Plan, Evaluations, Goals, Multi-Module, Observation Checklist, Onboarding, Performance, Performance Review, Recruiting, Resume, Succession, Test, Training Form Management, Training Forms - Curricula, Training Plan, Transaction, Transcript, and User Report.



Text



If reconciliation is NOT allowed, then the user's record will be not be deactivated if it no longer appears in the feed. The report results display "No" in

Yes/No

237


these instances.


Text



Text


Text


Text


Text


Text


Text

Cost Center This field displays the name of the user's assigned Cost Center Organizational Unit (OU), as shown on

Text

238


the user record page.



Text


Text


Text


Text


Text

Division Ref This field displays the ID of the user's assigned Division Organizational Unit (OU). The value is pulled from the ID field on the Define OU page when configuring OUs.

Text

239




Text


Text


Text


Text


Text


Text


Text

240



Text


Text


Text


Text


Text


Numeric


Text


Text

Position Owner This field displays the owner of the user's assigned Text

241


Position Organizational Unit (OU). The value is pulled from the Owner field on the Define OU page when configuring the OU.


Text


Text



Text


Text


Text


Text


Yes/No

242



Text


Text


Text


Text


Text


Text


Text


Text

User GUID This field displays the user GUID. GUID is a Data Load Wizard term. The GUID appears in the User Data Load template and can be mapped in the Data Load Wizard. When the GUID is included in the User

Text

243


data load, the GUID is used as the primary key and validates the user record.

User ID This field displays the user's user ID, which is the unique identifier for the user. The value is pulled from the User ID field on the user record.

Text



Text



Text



Text



Text



Text


Date

244



Date

User Last Name This field displays the user's last name. The value is pulled from the Last Name field on the user record.

Text


Text


Text


Text


Text


Text


Text

User Name Prefix This field displays the user's name prefix. Examples of name prefixes include Mr., Mrs., Ms., Miss, Dr. The value is pulled from the Prefix field on the user

Text

245


record.

User Name suffix This field displays the user's name suffix. Examples of name prefixes include II, III, Jr., Sr. The value is pulled from the Suffix field on the user record.

Text


Date


Text






Text

Create a Custom Transcript ReportName the Report/Select Storage FolderYou can name the report at any point during the report creation process; however, reports cannot be saved until they have been given a name. You can also select a folder in which to store the report.

Name the Report

246


Naming the report in the Report Designer is required in order to save the report. The SAVE button is not enabled until a report title is entered. The report name should be descriptive and meaningful.

To name the report:





To select a folder:


247





248



249













250













251


Calculated Fields








252







253














Column Sorting

254








255














256








257






258







259





260









261















Sharing Tab

262















263












264










265
















266









267






268










269







Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)I want to get a list of all the users who took a particular training. How do I do that?A Custom Transcript Report will provide this information. Be sure to include the following fields in the report:

o Training Titleo User Full Nameo Transcript Status

Filter the report by Training Title on the Field Filters tab so that you can enter the exact name of the training. You can also filter by Transcript Status to get a list of users who are in a particular status for the training, such as Completed or Registered.

270


2483 Report - Company Contribution to Professional TrainingCompliance Note: This report is no longer a formal/legal requirement in France. This Online Help page is being kept for reference.

The 2483 Report is a French Compliance report that tracks the number of hours/training actions paid by the company for its employees, as well as the budgets involved.

The following fields are recommended for this report. For all fields, apply date or OU filters, as needed.

Transcript Report Type FieldsFIELD NAME FORMULA CONDITIONS

Participation Rate 1.19/100 * ({CustomFieldSalary1} + {CustomFieldSalary2})

Number of "Validation of the acquired competencies" paid by employer

GCOUNTUNIQUE({User ID}) Validation of the acquired competencies = "Y"

Number of Employees that started "periode de professionalisation"

GCOUNTUNIQUE({User ID}) CustomField = "Yes"

Number of Employees with "Competency checks"

GCOUNTUNIQUE({User ID}) Competency Checks = "Y"

Number of employees with compensation for training

GCOUNTUNIQUE({User ID}) Training Category = "HTT"

Number of Employees with DIF Training

GCOUNTUNIQUE({User ID}) CustomField = "DIF"

Number of Hours for "periode de professionalisation" training

GSUM({Training Hours}) CustomField = "Yes"

Number of Hours For DIF Training Not Completed

GSUM({Training Hours}) CustomField = "DIF", Completion Date = null

Number of Hours For Started DIF Training

GSUM({Training Hours}) CustomField = "DIF", Training Status = "In Progress"

Total hours with compensation for training

GSUM({Training Hours}) Training Category = "HTT"

Total Number of Men with at least one training

GCOUNTUNIQUE({User ID}) CustomField = "Male"

271


FIELD NAME FORMULA CONDITIONS

Total Number of Training Hours GSUM({Training Hours})

Total Number of Women with at least one training

GCOUNTUNIQUE({User ID}) CustomField = "Female"

Total sum of salaries of employees pro-rated by the number of hours they spent on HTT training

{CustomFieldSalary} * {Training Hours}

Training Category = "HTT"

HTT External Training Cost {Training Cost} + {Transaction Cost} + {Training Custom Field}

Training Category = "HTT"

SUM of costs of external training GSUM({HTT External Training Cost})

User Report Type FieldsFIELD NAME FORMULA CONDITIONS

Number of Employees GCOUNTALL({User ID}) CustomField = "Employee"

Number of Middle managers GCOUNTALL({User ID}) CustomField = "Middle Manager"

Number of Top Managers GCOUNTALL({User ID}) CustomField = "Top Manager"

Number of Workers GCOUNTALL({User ID}) CustomField = "Worker"

Total Number of Employees GCOUNTALL({User ID})

Total Number of Men GCOUNTALL({User ID}) CustomField = "Male"

Total Number of Women GCOUNTALL({User ID}) CustomField = "Female"

Total sum of all salaries paid by the employer

GSUM({CustomFieldSalary})

272


Multi-Module Report - Recruiting Permission Constraints ExampleCustom Reports Deprecation: Cornerstone will be deprecating the legacy reporting solution "Custom Reports" with the February ’21 Release. For more information, see the announcement in the August '20 release notes and in the August '20 Release Summary & Matrix.

RECRUITING CUSTOM REPORTS

Yes, No Constraints

Yes, Constrained

No

Multi-Module Report

Yes, No Constraints

Has access to all OU’s

Security Concern

Will not have access to Recruiting fields

Yes, Constrained

Security Concern Security Concern


No Cannot access MMR Cannot access MMR


RECRUITING CUSTOM REPORTS

Yes, No Constraints Yes, Constrained No

Multi-Module Report

Yes, No Constraints

Has access to all OU’s Different data in Custom Recruiting Report and Multi-Module Custom Report


Yes, Constrained

Different data in Recruiting Custom Report and Multi-Module Custom Report

Different data in Custom Recruiting Report and Multi-Module Custom Report


No Cannot access MMR Cannot access MMR Will not have access to Recruiting fields

The following are options that are available to the administrator in order to mitigate any undesired reporting:

o Remove access to the Multi-Module Custom Report from people who normally use Recruiting Custom Reports with constraints who should not be using Multi-Module Custom Reports.

273




o Remove access to Recruiting Custom Reports from people who use Multi-Module Custom Reports but do not need to use Recruiting Custom Reports (this would leave them with access to Multi-Module Custom Reports, but the Recruiting module would not be available in the report).

o Remove constraints on Recruiting Custom Reports so the user can run both reports.

274


Report Output ExamplesCustom Reports Deprecation: Cornerstone will be deprecating the legacy reporting solution "Custom Reports" with the February ’21 Release. For more information, see the announcement in the August '20 release notes and in the August '20 Release Summary & Matrix.

Curtis Simms is the Vice President of Division 01 and needs to view training summaries and percentages of progress across the division. The breakdown of the division is provided below.

For this example, the Training Cashier Curriculum was assigned to all 10,000 employees in Division 01 and their progress is as follows:

DIVISION STATUS NUMBER OF EMPLOYEES

Division 01 Completed 5000

In Progress 3000

Not Started 1500

Past Due 500

Region 1 Completed 2500

In Progress 1500

Not Started 750

Past Due 250

Region 2 Completed 2500

In Progress 1500

Not Started 750

275




DIVISION STATUS NUMBER OF EMPLOYEES

Past Due 250

District 1 Completed 1250

In Progress 750

Not Started 375

Past Due 125

District 2 Completed 1250

In Progress 750

Not Started 375

Past Due 125

Example 1Fields Selected:

o User's Divisiono Transcript Statuso Record Count

Summarized By:

o Training Titleo User's Divisiono Transcript Status

Filter:

o Training Title is equal to Cashier Curriculum o User's Division is equal to Division 01 and Include Subordinates is selected

Miscellaneous Fields:

o Overall Percentageo Hierarchical Percentage

276


Note: The percentages break down the number of employees in a transcript status in each division.


o User Nameo User's Divisiono Transcript Statuso Record Count

Summarized By:

o Training Titleo User's Division - View as Hierarchyo Transcript Status

Filter:




277



o User Nameo User's Divisiono Transcript Statuso Record Count

Summarized By:

o Training Title - Display Percentageo User's Division - View as Hierarchy, Display Percentageo Transcript Status

Filter:




278


Note: Percent of Training Title displays percentages based on the total record counts for each training title in the report. Percent of User Division displays percentages based on the total record counts for each division in the report.

279


Custom Charting

280


Chart Axis LabelsThe labels for the X and Y axes on the chart are the field names defined as the dimensions and measure.

Note: Chart axis labels cannot be modified at this time.

281


Chart Data LabelsThe count or percentage labels for the chart data are hidden by default. To display the labels, click the Show Labels option in the chart menu. This shows the labels as follows based on the chart type:

o Pie - The labels display the name, count, and percentage for each pie slice.o Column - The labels display the count for each bar.o Line - The labels display the count at each data point in the line.o Bar - The labels display the count for each side bar.

To hide the labels, click the Hide Labels option in the options menu drop-down.

The label settings you select will be remembered the next time you view or edit the report. In addition, the label setting is remembered when viewing the chart as a dashboard widget.

282


Chart Designer OverviewThe Chart tab allows users to create charts for custom reports. The Chart tab is available for all custom report types.

Best Practice for Adding Charts to Published Reports: When you add a chart to a report that you would like to publish, the act of adding a chart will change the way the data is displayed in the report. Adding a chart summarizes the data in the report. Therefore, if you do not want the report to be summarized but want to add a chart and publish it, then it is a best practice to copy the report. This way, you can have a version of the report that is not published (and not summarized) and a version that is published.

Chart PreviewThe chart that displays on the Chart tab is a preview of the chart that will display in the report output. The preview displays data for up to 1,000 records. The chart displays and updates when the user clicks the REFRESH button. The chart appearance will vary, depending on the number of records used to generate the chart. For instance, in the chart preview, a chart may appear with five columns and five colors.

Maximum Number of RecordsCharts display the first 1,000 records in the chart tab (chart preview) and when generating the chart output from the preview drop-down options.

Minimum Fields RequiredIt is recommended that you first add fields to the report grid prior to adding fields to your chart. Add the minimum number of fields you want to include in the chart, then add these fields to the chart grid to generate the chart.

283


Chart TitleCurrently, the title of the chart is the same title as the report. The title of the chart can be modified by updating the report title.

Plotted Data Points LimitA limit will be set for the number of dimension data points that can be plotted per chart. By default, the limit is set to 50 data points across one- or two-dimension charts. If the chart exceeds the maximum number of plotted data points, then an error message displays when refreshing the chart.

Example 1:5

Example 2:6

Note: The data points limit can be modified through a backend setting. Contact Global Product Support to modify this setting from the default value.

Refresh/Update ChartThe REFRESH button is used to refresh the chart. To refresh the chart manually, click the REFRESH button. When the chart is refreshed, the chart displays the first 1,000 records.

The chart automatically refreshes when the chart type or color palette selection is changed.

Note: Clicking REFRESH also updates the report grid.

5 An administrator would like to chart the number of users registered for training titles. She creates a column chart with Training Titles as the dimension and User ID as the measure. Based on the 50 data points limit, the number of training titles in the chart cannot exceed 50.6 An administrator would like to chart the status of the users in learning objects. She creates a column chart with Training Status as the first dimension and Training Titles as the second dimension. The measure is User ID. The number of training statuses multiplied by the number of training titles cannot exceed 50.

284


Chart LegendThe chart legend displays to the right of the chart. It provides the color key for up to 50 values for one of the dimensions. The dimension for which the chart displays is determined by the chart type. If the chart exceeds 50 values, then only the first 50 data points will be available. The filter criteria for the chart will need to be changed in order to reduce the values to 50 or fewer.

Fields can be deselected in the legend. Deselecting the field removes the field from the chart. You can deselect a field from the legend by clicking on the color next to the legend field label.

Note: By default, up to 50 values display in the legend.

285


Chart OutputCharts can be outputted on their own (without the report data) as a printable version and a .png image. Charts also display when viewing the report in Excel or the print output for the report. The menu in the upper-right corner of the chart allows users to print the chart preview or save the chart preview it as an image.

Note: The chart preview only includes the first 1,000 records.

To output the chart with the full data set, first design your chart, then save and close the report and the chart so that it can be queued up to run with the full data set.

Print Chart - Chart MenuTo print the chart, click Print Chart. This opens a printable view of the chart in a new window. The chart scales to fit the page. The chart title displays above the chart, and the key appears to the right of the chart. The chart can be printed using the browser's print options.

Save as Image - Chart MenuTo save the chart as a separate image that is accessible outside of the report, click Save As Image. The chart saves as a .png file.

Excel OutputThe Excel charting features will be enabled for charts outputted in Excel. As a result, you will be able to manipulate the chart further using the Excel charting features. The colors selected in the color palette of the chart designer are not retained in the Excel output. Excel applies the default Excel colors to the charts outputted in Excel and cannot retain the palette colors from the chart designer. Chart colors can be modified using the Excel chart features.

Note: Reports containing more than 100,000 records will output in .csv format (instead of Excel). As a result, the chart will not be available in the Excel output for reports that exceed 100,000 records.

286


Chart OptionsChart MenuFrom the chart preview on the Custom Report Builder page, you can access the chart menu to do the following:

o Show Chart Labelso Print Charto Save Chart As Image

Chart DataHovering over the chart displays the information for each area of the chart.

287


Disable Legend Data PointsFor charts that contain a legend, the option to disable legend data points will also be available in this view. Disabling a data point from the legend removes the field from the chart, and the chart reconfigures without the disabled data point.

288


Chart TypesMultiple chart types are supported in the chart designer. The type of chart that can be created depends on the combination of fields that are added as dimensions and as the measure. The CHART TYPE drop-down is grayed out and not selectable until at least one dimension or measure is added to the chart.

Available Chart TypesThe following chart types are supported:

o Bar - This chart type displays as horizontal bars and compares multiple values with each other.

o Column - This chart type displays as vertical lines and compares values across a range.o Line - This chart type displays as a line graph and shows trending over time.o Pie - This chart type displays as a pie chart and compares proportions of data and how

they contribute to a whole.

Once fields are added for the chart, the chart type is selected automatically. If a different chart type is available based on the combination of fields, then a different chart type can be manually selected from the drop-down. Click REFRESH to update the chart.

If a chart type is not selected, then when refreshing the report, a default chart displays.

Recommended Chart Types and Field CombinationsEach chart type has a recommended set of field types that can be added as summarization and measure fields. Although the chart designer will not prevent you from using any field type combinations for creating charts, the field combinations specified in the table below are the suggested field combinations for specific chart types. Pie charts can only be generated with a first level summary. If two summarization fields are added to a chart, a pie chart will not be available as a chart option in the chart type drop-down.

289


FIELD TYPE SELECTED AS FIRST

SUMMARY

FIELD TYPE SELECTED AS

SECOND SUMMARY

FIELD TYPE SELECTED

AS MEASURE

LEGEND DEFAULT CHART

RECOMMENDED CHART TYPES

Date N/A Numeric Field: SUM, Average, MIN, MAX

String Field: Count, Count Distinct

No Legend

Column Column, Line, Side Bar

Date Numeric Numeric Field: SUM, Average, MIN, MAX


Second Summary Field

Column Line

Date Text or Yes/No Numeric Field: SUM, Average, MIN, MAX



Column Column, Line, Side Bar

Numeric N/A Numeric Field: SUM, Average, MIN, MAX


Note: Summary and Measure Fields can be the same field.

First Summary Field

Pie Pie

Text or N/A Numeric Field: First Column Column, Pie, Side

290


FIELD TYPE SELECTED AS FIRST

SUMMARY

FIELD TYPE SELECTED AS

SECOND SUMMARY

FIELD TYPE SELECTED

AS MEASURE

LEGEND DEFAULT CHART

RECOMMENDED CHART TYPES

Yes/No SUM, Average, MIN, MAX


Summary Field

Bar

Text or Yes/No

Text or Yes/No Numeric Field: SUM, Average, MIN, MAX



Column Column, Side Bar

291


Color PaletteThe color palette allows users to select the color used for color-coding the dimension that appears in the legend. When a chart is first created, the chart will appear in the default palette. Users can update the colors by using the color palette. This option is grayed out and not selectable until at least one dimension or measure is added to the chart.

To modify the color palette:

1. Click the Palette icon . This opens the color palette pop-up. Note: The color palette is only available once a valid chart is created.

2. You can select a color palette from the drop-down. Each color palette includes 50 predefined colors. By default, the first color in the plot point is the first color in the color grid, and so on.o Bold - This palette is selected by default. The colors in this palette have bold hues.o Neutral - The colors in this palette have neutral hues.o Pastel - The colors in this palette have pastel hues.o Custom - This options is available if you customize a palette to colors you have

chosen.3. In the color palette pop-up, select the plot point in the left-hand column for which to

change the color. The color can be defined for each plot point in the list. This opens a color selection pop-up.

292


4. Click the desired color for the plot point. Or, customize the color on the More Colors tab.5. Click APPLY to apply the color to the plot point. When a color is selected manually, the

drop-down palette automatically changes to Custom if Custom was not already selected. Each plot point should be a different color. Note: If a different color palette is selected in the color palette drop-down after the plot point colors are customized, all plot point colors change to the default colors for the selected palette and any customized colors are lost.

6. Click SAVE. This saves the color selections for the chart.

When creating the custom palette, the color selection is saved for the field in the legend and can be used again for a different chart. For example:

1. Training Status is your legend and you decide to change the color palette to colors you have chosen.

2. Once you click SAVE the colors you have chosen for Training Status are saved for you account.

3. When you create a new chart that contains Training Status as the legend, you can now select Custom as an option in the color palette drop-down, and the colors you previously defined will now be set for your custom palette.

4. One custom palette is available per field in the legend. In the example above, if you change the colors you previously customized for Training Status and click SAVE, your change will be reflected for this field and any previous color customization for Training Status will be overwritten by the most recent change.

293


Common Charting ExamplesThis page provides examples of common charts and the fields and values to create the chart.

Transcript StatusScenario: I'm interested in charting the transcript status of users.

FIELD VALUE

Summary by Transcript Status

Measure User ID (or another unique identifier for user such as Username)

Aggregate Count

Training Status by LocationScenario: I'm interested in charting the training status of users across locations.

FIELD VALUE

Summary by Location then by Transcript Status

Measure User ID (or another unique identifier for user such as Username)

Aggregate Count

294


MeasuresA measure is any string or numeric field that can be measured. The measure is the Y axis of the chart. The Measure option is grayed out and not selectable until at least one field is added to the report grid.

Add MeasureFields that are used in the Summarize by field can also be used in the Measure field. However, date fields cannot be used as a measure. Only one measure can be configured per chart.

To add a measure:

1. Type the field name into the text box for the Measure field. The list of matching fields appears as a drop-down. Select the desired field from the drop-down.

2. Or, click the options drop-down in the report grid for the desired field. Then, click the Add Measure (chart) option. This adds the field as the measure, if a measure is not already added. If a measure already displays in the text box, then the existing measure is replaced with the new measure.

Remove MeasureOnce a field is added as a dimension or measure, it cannot be removed from the report unless it is removed from the chart. To remove the measure from the chart, click the Remove icon in the text box.

295


AggregatesThe drop-down to the right of the Measure field displays the aggregates. The aggregate is automatically defined by the system when selecting the field to measure, depending on the field type added to the measure option.

The following aggregates apply to each field type:

FIELD TYPE

AGGREGATES

Numeric Numeric fields are measured by summation or averages. The following aggregates are used for numeric fields:

o Summation - This aggregate is selected by default when adding numeric fields. This is the sum of the numeric values of the field.

o Average - This is the sum of the numeric value of the field divided by the number of fields.

o Min - This is the lowest value in the range for the measure.o Max - This is the highest value in the range for the measure.

String String fields are measured by count or count unique. The following aggregates are used for string fields:

o Count - This aggregate is selected by default when adding string fields. This is a count of all the values for the field selected. For example, if User ID is added as the measure, then the chart shows the number of users with user IDs on the Y axis in relation to the field or fields that are used to summarize the chart.

o CountUnique - This is a count of all unique values returned for a field. For example, a user creates a report to show the training status for an online course. The report output returns 100 records. The training statuses for the course are Completed, In Progress, and Not Started. The training status Count for the report is 100. The training status CountUnique is 3, which represents the total number of training statuses.As another example, a user would like to chart the number of training hours per training type. The user adds the Training Type field as the dimension and adds the Training Hours field as the measure. The chart will be summarized by each training type, and then the training types are measured by the expected training hours for each training type.

Report GridOnce the report is refreshed, the report grid adds a column that displays the aggregate data.

296


297


Remove Chart and FieldsThe chart can be removed from the report, and individual fields and the measure can be removed from the chart.

Remove ChartThe entire chart can be removed by clicking the DELETE button . This removes all data for the chart, as well as the dimensions and measure.

This option is grayed out and not selectable until at least one dimension or measure is added to the chart.

Remove Field from ChartTo remove a dimension or measure, click the Remove icon in the text box.

Remove Field from ReportOnce a field is added as a dimension or measure, it should not removed from the report unless it is removed from the chart.

298


Report DeliveryCharts are not supported when using .csv and .txt report delivery outputs. Charts may be supported for these report delivery output types in a future release.

299


Run HistoryThe Run History pop-up displays the date and time for the most recent three instances of the report, along with the number of records that were returned in the report

The following options are available for the report:

o View - Click the View icon to open the report.o Print - Click the Print icon to view and print the printable version of the report.o Excel - Click the Excel icon to export the report to Excel.o Text - Click the Text icon to export the report to a .txt file.o Chart - Click the Chart icon to view the chart for the report. The data that displays in

the chart is the data that was available at the time the report was run.

Note: The Run History pop-up is accessed by clicking the History link in the Actions drop-down for an individual report on the main Reports page.

300


SummarizingThe Summarize by field is used to define the dimensions for the chart, which display as the axis of the chart. The dimensions are the fields that summarize the chart. Up to two dimensions can be included in the chart. Any field type can be added to the Summarize by field. The fields should first be added to the report grid in prior to adding them to a chart.

The Summarize By function in the chart is linked to the report summary functionality available in the Summary tab. As a result, you can manage which dimensions are included in the chart via the Chart or the Summary Tab.

o The first level field added to the Summary tab will be the first dimension that will appear in the chart in the Summarize By function and vice versa.

o The second level field added to the Summary tab will be the second dimension that will appear in the chart in the Summarize By function and vice versa.

o The chart supports up to 2-level summaries. If your report has three or more summary levels, only the first two levels will affect the chart.

o When you change the order of the fields in the Summary tab for the first and second level summaries, the order of the dimensions in the Summarize By function will also change to reflect the new order.

o The swap button, which is located between the two dimensions in the Summarize By function of the chart, will swap the order of the two dimensions in the chart, as well as the order of the summary of those fields in the Summary Tab.

Add Dimensions to Summarize ByTo add dimensions:

301


1. Type the field name into the text box in the Summarize by field. The list of matching fields appears as a drop-down. Select the desired field from the drop-down.

2. Or, click the drop-down in the Summarize by field and select a field from the list of available fields.

3. Or, click the options drop-down in the report grid for the desired field. Then, click the Add Summary (chart) option. This adds the field as the first dimension, if a dimension is not already added. If a dimension already displays in the first dimension text box, then the dimension is added as the second dimension.

4. Or, add fields to the Summary tab by clicking on the Summary tab and inputting the fields.

When at least one dimension is added to the Summarize by field, the report can be refreshed, and the chart preview displays. Adding a second dimension summarizes the chart first by the first dimension added, and then by the second dimension. Additional dimensions added to the Summarize by field replace the second dimension with the most recently added dimension.

Considerationso Once a field is added as a dimension in the chart, it should not be removed from the

report grid.o Adding fields in the Summary tab will not automatically create a chart. You must next

add fields for the measure and select the REFRESH button to generate a chart.o The View as Hierarchy summary option is not available in the chart. Creating a chart

with a hierarchy is not currently supported. If you add a hierarchy field to the Summary tab, such as an OU (organizational unit), and then select the View as Hierarchy option, you will not be able to add that field as a dimension for the chart. To add a the field as a dimension in the chart, first deselect the View as Hierarchy option on the Summary tab.

Date FieldsDate fields can be added to the Summarize by field. When added, you are able to group the date by clicking on the available drop-down in the Summary tab. The user can select one of the following date options by which to group the date when summarizing the chart:

o Dayo Weeko Montho Calendar Quartero Calendar Year

302


Change Order of Dimensions to Summarize ByWhen there are two string field types added as dimensions, the order of the dimensions can be switched by clicking the Swap icon that displays between the dimensions. Once the dimensions are switched, click the REFRESH button to update the chart.

The Swap icon is disabled when only one dimension is added to the chart.

Report GridOnce the report is refreshed, the report grid adds a column that displays the summarized data for the dimensions defined for the chart. This summary column also appears when you summarize the report by adding fields to the Summary tab in the report.

The Summarize By chart function and Summary tab report function are linked and will summarize the report the same way.

303


Publish Charts to Dashboards OverviewCharts that are created in the Custom Report Builder can be published as custom dashboards and shared within your organization. You can leverage the powerful visualizations within the Custom Report Builder to build your own visuals and add them to dashboards.

The charts are available from the Published Widgets category when adding widgets to the dashboard. The category only displays if you have created a report with a published widget, or a report with a published widget has been shared with you and you have permission to view the associated custom report.

Note: When configuring the Publish tab for a custom report, a widget can only be shared with specific users, and the option to share the widget will not be clickable if shared with an organizational unit (OU).

Permissions

PERMISSION NAME




Dashboard - Share Grants the ability to share a dashboard created by self with other users within the portal who may then view and refresh the results of the dashboard at-will. This permission works in conjunction with the Create Dashboard permission.


Dashboard - View Grants the ability to view dashboards created by self or shared by others. User must also have permission to view the standard or custom reports that are included in any shared dashboards. If a user does not have permission to view a report type, the user cannot view that report type within the dashboard. This is an end user permission.


Use Case

304


An organization has an analyst who creates custom reports. The analyst publishes widgets and builds dashboards. She shares the dashboards with managers, executives, directors, etc., who are not power users of the Custom Report Builder.

The users with whom she shares the dashboards can create their own custom dashboards by adding the published widgets without having to build a custom report, chart, and dashboard themselves.

305


Add Published Widgets to DashboardsCustom reports that are published as widgets via the Custom Report Builder can be added to new and existing dashboards. A Published Widgets category displays on the New Widgets page to enable published widgets to be added to dashboards.

Permissions

PERMISSION NAME




Availability of Published WidgetsIf you have created a report that includes a published widget, then the widget will be available to you in the Published Widgets category.

If a custom report that includes a published widget has been shared, then the widget will be available in the Published Widgets category for the shared users if they have permission to view the specific custom report type from which the widget was published. If they do not have permission to view the report type, then the widget does not display in the Published Widgets category, even though the report was shared with the user.

Add Published WidgetTo add a published widget to a dashboard:

1. Select New or Edit from the OPTIONS drop-down. This opens the new dashboard page or the edit page for an existing dashboard.

2. Click ADD WIDGET. This opens the New Widget page.3. Click the Published Widgets category. This opens a screen that displays all published

widgets. Note: The Published Widgets category is disabled until there is at least one published widget available for the user.

306


4. Select the desired widget. The widget description displays in the right panel, as well as the name of the user who created the widget.

5. Click NEXT. This adds the widget to the dashboard.6. Enter a description for the widget in the Type a Description here field, up to 200

characters. This field is not required.7. Click SAVE on the dashboard page. This saves the widget to the dashboard.

307


Disable Published WidgetYou can disable the availability of a published widget so that it is no longer visible on the Published Widgets tab for dashboards. This can be done in Custom Reports.

To disable a published widget:

1. Access the custom report to which the widget was added by going to REPORTS > CUSTOM REPORTS and selecting Edit to change the report settings.

2. Click the Publish tab on the custom report.3. Uncheck the Publish as widget option on the Publish tab.

308


Export Data to ExcelWhen viewing the published widget on the Dashboards page, you can export the data to Excel. An Export to Excel link appears in the options drop-down within the widget. Clicking the link opens the data in Excel.

Note: This option is only available for custom widgets. The option is not available for widgets that are part of standard reports in dashboards.

309


Report Designer - Publish TabThe Publish tab is added to the Report Designer page. This tab allows you to publish a custom chart to dashboards.

See the Add Published Widget to Dashboard topic in Online Help for information about adding the widget to a dashboard.

Best Practice for Adding Charts to Published Reports: When you add a chart to a report that you would like to publish, the act of adding a chart will change the way the data is displayed in the report. Adding a chart summarizes the data in the report. Therefore, if you do not want the report to be summarized but want to add a chart and publish it, then it is a best practice to copy the report. This way, you can have a version of the report that is not published (and not summarized) and a version that is published.

Pre-Steps for Publishing a ChartIn order to publish a chart, the chart must first be created on the Chart tab. In addition, in order to share the published widget with other users, you must first add at least one user on the Sharing tab, up to a maximum of 20 users. Note: If you include organizational units (OU) on the Sharing tab, then the report cannot be scheduled.

Publish as WidgetThis option allows you to publish the chart to dashboards. The option is unchecked by default. Checking the box to enables the chart to be available for dashboards.

Widget DescriptionThis option is only enabled when the Publish as widget box is checked. This field allows you to provide a description for the widget, up to 200 characters. When sharing the widget with other users, a description can help users know what information has been configured for the chart.

Share Widget with UsersNote: This option is only enabled after at least one user has been added to the Sharing tab (up to a maximum of 20 users).

This option is unchecked by default. Checking the box will share the widget with the users selected on the Sharing tab. Once the report is saved, the shared users will be able to add

310


the widget to their dashboards. A widget can only be shared with specific users, and the checkbox will not be clickable if shared with an OU.

If you haven’t shared the Custom Report with other users through the Sharing tab, the Share widget with users icon will be un-clickable. Once at least one user is added under the Sharing tab, the checkbox will be clickable.

You are not required to share the report and widget with other users if you plan on sharing a Dashboard with a user. The benefits of sharing a report and also the published widget is that any scheduled refresh will apply.

Sharing and scheduling still follow the existing limitation – a report (and thus widget) cannot be scheduled to refresh if it has been shared with more than 20 users. If you want to share a widget or dashboard with more than 20 users, you can share the report without a schedule, or you can share a dashboard you’ve created with the published widget.

Shared Widget AccessFor shared users, they must have permission to view shared dashboards, as well as permission to view the specific custom report type from which the widget was published.

Scheduled RefreshThe scheduled refresh applies to shared widgets.

Edit Custom ReportWhen editing the custom report, the options on the Publish tab are editable by the report creator. Shared users cannot edit the report.

Deleting Custom Charts in a ReportWhen editing a custom report, if the chart for a custom report is deleted in the report, then the widget is also deleted from the Published Widgets category for dashboards and any dashboard containing that widget. The widget is deleted for both the report creator and shared users.

Deleting Custom Report that Includes Published WidgetIf a custom report that includes a published widget is deleted, then the widget is also deleted from the Published Widgets category for dashboards and any dashboard containing that widget. The widget is deleted for both the report creator and shared users.

Copy Custom ReportWhen copying the custom report, the settings on the Publish tab are not copied.

Copy Custom DashboardCustom dashboards cannot be copied.

311


Master List of Custom Report FieldsThis page provides a master list of fields for custom reports sorted by the report section in which the field can be found.

Note: This list does not yet include all custom report fields but will continue to be updated until all fields have been added.

ApplicantThis section is only available for the custom Recruiting Report and Multi-Module Reports.


Applicant (User) Flag This field displays the name of the Applicant flag that has been assigned to the applicant. If there are multiple flags, the report output displays each flag on the same line, separated by commas.

The value for this field is pulled from the Applicant (User) Flags field in the header section on the Applicant Profile page.

Text

Applicant (User) Opt Out Flag

Displays candidates who have opted out of being considered for other positions. The report output displays Yes or No.

This field may have blank values if applicants were loaded to the system via the Data Load Wizard.

The value for this field is pulled from the Applicant (User) Flags field in the header section on the Applicant Profile page.

Limitation Note: This field does not apply to users who have created accounts but have not yet applied for a job. This field will only show for users who have submitted an application.

Yes/No

Applicant Archived This field indicates whether or not the applicant has been archived (anonymized). The report output displays Yes or No.

You can check if an applicant has been archived (anonymized) by viewing the list of applicants on the Manage Applicants page for the requisition.

Yes/No

312


Archived applicants will show "Anonymized" in the Applicants column.

Applicant Archived Date

This field displays the date on which the applicant was archived (anonymized).

You can check if an applicant has been archived (anonymized) by viewing the list of applicants on the Manage Applicants page for the requisition. Archived applicants will show "Anonymized" in the Applicants column.

Date

Applicant Comment This field displays the comments that have been written for the applicant.

Text

Applicant Current Status

This field displays the current status of the applicant based on their place in the application workflow. An applicant's status is visible throughout Recruiting, such as on the Manage Candidates page and the Snapshot page of a requisition.

Text

Applicant Current Status Start Date

This field displays the date the candidate was first placed in this status. Including the field in a report can help you track applicant movement, as it will let you know how long a candidate has been in a specific status.

Date

Applicant Date Closed

This field displays the date on which an applicant's status changes to Closed. The value for this field can be found in the Status column on Manage Candidates in a format that indicates the number of days the candidate has been in the status. The value can also be found on the Applicant Profile page's History tab and in the Current Status column of the Change Status pop-up.

Date

Applicant Date Hired This field displays the date on which an applicant's status changes to Hired. The value for this field can be found in the Status column on Manage Candidates in a format that indicates the number of

Date

313


days the candidate has been in the status. The value can also be found on the Applicant Profile page's History tab and in the Current Status column of the Change Status pop-up.

Applicant Disposition This field displays the disposition that the recruiter selected when changing the candidate's status to Closed. The value for this field can be found in the Status column on Manage Candidates in a format that indicates the number of days the candidate has been in the status. The value can also be found on the Applicant Profile page's History tab and in the Current Status field on the Summary tab.

Text

Applicant Rating This field displays the candidate's rating, which is provided by recruiters. The value for this field is pulled from the Ratings field on the Applicant Profile > Summary tab. Ratings are also visible on the Manage Applicants page, if the Ratings column has been added via Edit Page Layout.

Text

Applicant Submission Date

This field displays the date on which the candidate submitted their application or was added to/moved to a requisition. The value for this field is pulled from the Submission column on the Snapshot page of the requisition. The value can also be found in the Application Received field on the Applicant Profile > Summary tab and is visible on the Applicant Profile > History tab and in the Applicant Feed.

On Manage Candidates, the value can be found in the Source column, provided that the column has been added via Customize Columns.

Date

Applicant Submission Source

This field displays the source by which the candidate's application was submitted. The value for this field is pulled from the Source column on the Snapshot page of the requisition. The value can also be found in the Source field on the Applicant Profile > Summary tab and is visible on the Applicant Profile > History tab and in the Applicant

Text

314


Feed.

On Manage Candidates, the value can be found in the Source column, provided that the column has been added via Customize Columns.

Applicant Type This field displays the candidate type, either Internal or External. The value for this field is visible in multiple places throughout Recruiting, such as in the Type column on the Snapshot page of the requisition and in the Type field on the Applicant Profile > Summary tab.

On Manage Candidates, the value can be found in the Type column, provided that the column has been added via Customize Columns.

Text

Application Id This field displays the application identification. Text

Application Progress This field shows how much of the application has been completed.

o Applications that have been completed by the applicant and submitted show a value of 100%.

o Applications where the recruiter has moved an applicant to a requisition have the potential to show values less than 100%. The percentage completion value will correspond to the weight of the application sections that have been completed for the target requisition Application Workflow.

o Any applications that the applicant has only partially completed themselves will not appear in this report currently but is an enhancement that is planned for a future roadmap date.

This field is helpful to include in the report so that you know which applicants to follow up with on applications that have not yet been completed. Be sure to include the User Full Name and Requisition ID fields so that the report displays the applicant's name and the ID of the job requisition to which they applied.

Numeric

315


Apply with Mobile This field indicates whether or not an applicant applied to the job requisition from a mobile device. The following are the possible values in the report output:

o Yes - This displays if the applicant applied from a mobile device.

o No - This displays if the applicant did not apply from a mobile device.

Note: The system determines whether or not an applicant applied from a mobile device by pulling the data from the Source column on the Manage Applicants page. If the Mobile icon displays in the Source column for an applicant, then the application was submitted from a mobile device.

Text

External Applicant ID This is the applicant ID for an applicant when going from an individual domain to one big one. This field allows you to pull a report with an external requisition ID and any other field that identifies to payroll so you can format a FTP delivery.

This field is mainly used by portals that have an active WOTC TCC integration.

Numeric

Referral Bonus Applies

This field indicates whether or not the referral bonus amount applies to a particular application. The value for this field is either "Yes" or "No."

The value for this field is pulled from the Automatic Referral Credit section in Referral Preferences. The report displays "Yes" if the Apply current referral credit to future applications is unchecked. The report displays "No" if the Apply current referral credit to future applications is checked.

Use Case for Referral Bonus Applies Field and Referral MethodBy adding the Referral Bonus Applies field to the report along with the existing field Applicant Submission Source, you can also view the referral method. Where the Referral Bonus Applies field shows a value of "Yes," the value in the Applicant

Yes/No Fields

316


Submission Source field will equal the referral method.

User-specific Comment

Enables recruiter to view user-specific comments (comments that are addressed specifically to applicants as opposed to the requisition related-comments).

Text

Application FormsThis section is only available for the custom Recruiting Report.


Form Question This is the text of the question on the form. Forms are added to the application workflow and can contain questions from the question bank from the new Form Management functionality and/or the question bank in Training Form Administration.

Text

Form Question Category

This is the category for the question on the form. The value for this field is pulled from the Category field when creating questions in the new Form Management functionality and in the Training Forms functionality.

Text

Form Question ID This is the ID for the question on the form. The value for this field is system-defined and can be found in the Category column on the Questions tab in the new Form Management functionality and in the Category column on the Question Bank page in the Training Forms functionality.

Numeric

Name This is the name of the form. The value for this field is pulled from the Title field when creating forms in the new Form Management and in the Training Form Name field for training forms.

Text

Question Response Required

This field will indicate whether or not a field on the Yes/No

317


form is marked Required. The value for this field is pulled from the Required field (visible when you click the Options icon for a question on the form) when creating forms in the new Form Management and from the Response Required field when creating training forms.

Question Response Tag

This field only applies to the Training Form Management functionality.

This field displays the value from the Associated Response Tag column when creating training form templates.

Text

Question Type This field displays the value from the Select Field Type page for questions created in the new Form Management.

For training form questions, this value is pulled from the Response Type field when creating questions.

Text

Question User Comment

This field only applies to the Training Form Management functionality.

This field displays the value in the text box for comments on the question. A comments box only appears for a question if the Include comments box is checked when creating the question.

Text

Question User Response

This field displays the user's response to the question.

Text

Section Description This field only applies to the Training Form Management functionality.

This field displays the value in the Section Directions field on the Section Properties pop-up when creating training form templates.

Text

Section Title This field only applies to the Training Form Management functionality.

Text

318


This field displays the value in the Section Title field on the Section Properties pop-up when creating training form templates.

Sub Question This field only applies to the Training Form Management functionality.

This field displays the value from the Sub-question box when creating questions for multi-part questions with sub-questions. These questions are configured by checking the Include multiple sub-questions box on the Question Properties pop-up when creating questions.

Text

ApplicationsThis section is only available for the custom Recruiting Report. Note: This section includes Requisition custom fields if such fields have been created in Custom Field Administration.


Application Flags This field displays the name of the Application flag assigned to a candidate. Application flags are assigned to candidates by selecting flags from the Application Flags field on the Applicant Profile > Summary tab.

Numeric

AssignmentThis section is only available for the custom Assignment Report and the custom Transcript report:


Assignment - New Occurrence

This field displays whether or not a new occurrence of the training will be assigned to users who already have it on their transcript.

Yes/No

Assignment Active? This field displays whether or not the learning assignment is active.

Yes/No

Assignment This field displays the comments included with the Text

319


Comments assignment when it was created.

Comments are created on the Setup step of the Assignment creation process and are also displayed on the user's transcripts, on the Transcript History section of the LO details.

Assignment Created By (Name)

This field displays the name of the user who created the assignment.

Text

Assignment Created By (User ID)

This field displays the ID of the user who created the assignment.

Text

Assignment Created Date

This field displays the date and time the assignment was created.

Date/Time

Assignment Description

This field displays the description of the learning assignment. No data is displayed for legacy proxy enrollments. The value is pulled from the Assignment Description field on the Setup step when creating a learning assignment.

Text

Assignment Dynamic Re-assignment

This field displays whether or not dynamic re-assignment is enabled for the assignment.

Yes/No

Assignment Dynamic Re-assignment - Upgrade to Latest Version

This field displays whether or not users will be upgraded to the latest version by dynamic re-assignment.

Yes/No

Assignment Dynamic Removal

This field displays whether or not dynamic removal is enabled for the assignment.

Yes/No

Assignment Dynamic Removal - In Progress Training

This field displays whether or not in-progress training will be removed by dynamic removal.

Yes/No

Assignment Dynamic Removal - Training within Curricula

This field displays whether or not training within curricula will be removed by dynamic removal.

Yes/No

320


Assignment Email Settings

This field displays the email setting that was set for the assignment. Options are Training Specific Emails, Custom Emails, Ad-hoc Email or No Emails.

Text

Assignment Email Settings - Assign Training

This field displays whether or not Assign Training emails will be sent to users (only if 'Training Specific Emails' is selected).

Yes/No

Assignment Email Settings - Register Training

This field displays whether or not Register Training emails will be sent to users (only if 'Training Specific Emails' is selected).

Yes/No

Assignment Email Settings - Training within Curricula

This field displays whether or not emails will be sent for the training within the curriculum included in the assignment.

Yes/No

Assignment ID This field displays the ID of the learning assignment. No data is displayed for legacy proxy enrollments. The value is pulled from the Assignment ID field on the Manage Assignments page.

Numeric

Assignment Processing Start Date - Fixed Date

This field displays the date and time that the assignment will start to process and assign training to users (only if 'Fixed' (Annually) is selected).

Date/Time

Assignment Processing Start Date - Relative Integer

This field displays the integer that has been set for the relative processing start date of the assignment (only if 'Relative' is selected).

Numeric

Assignment Processing Start Date - Relative Trigger

This field displays the trigger that has been selected for the relative processing start date of the assignment (only if 'Relative' is selected).

Text

Assignment Processing Start Date - Relative Unit

This field displays the unit that has been selected for the relative processing start date of the assignment (only if 'Relative' is selected).

Text

Assignment Processing Start Date - Type

This field indicates if the processing start date that has been set for the assignment is immediate, relative, or fixed.

Text

321


Assignment Recurrence

This field displays whether or not recurrence is enabled for the assignment.

Text

Assignment Recurrence - Annual Date

This field displays the date and time that the training will recur (only if 'Annually' is selected).

Date/Time

Assignment Recurrence - Relative Integer

This field displays the integer that has been set for the recurrence setting of the assignment (only if 'Yes' (Relative) is selected).

Numeric

Assignment Recurrence - Relative only if Complete

This field displays whether or not the training will recur only if the previous occurrence is completed (only if 'Yes' (Relative) is selected).

Yes/No

Assignment Recurrence - Relative Trigger

This field displays the trigger that has been selected for the recurrence setting of the assignment (only if 'Yes' (Relative) is selected).

Text

Assignment Recurrence - Relative Unit

This field displays the unit that has been selected for the recurrence setting of the assignment (only if 'Yes' (Relative) is selected).

Text

Assignment Recurrence - Termination - Fixed Date

This field displays the date (no time included) that the recurrence will end (only if 'Fixed' is selected).

Date

Assignment Recurrence - Termination - Occurrence Limit

This field displays the number of occurrences that need to happen before the recurrence ends (only if 'After Number of Occurrences' is selected).

Numeric

Assignment Recurrence - Termination - Type

This field indicates if recurrence termination has been set for the assignment. If it has, then it indicates if it is fixed or an occurrence limit.

Text

Assignment Status This field displays the status of the learning assignment, such as queued, processed, or canceled. The value is pulled from the Status field on

Text

322


the Manage Assignments page.

Assignment Title This field displays the title of the learning assignment. No data is displayed for legacy proxy enrollments. The value is pulled from the Assignment Title field on the Setup step when creating a learning assignment.

Text

Assignment Training Due Date - Fixed Date

This field should only be used if the learning assignment has a fixed (non-relative) due date. This field displays the date on which the assigned training will be due. No time is displayed. The value is pulled from the Training Due Date field on the Schedule step when creating a learning assignment. The value can also be pulled from the versioning upgrade process if a due date is set in versioning options.

Important: If the assignment is Recurring, this field displays the due date in the same year that the assignment was created, even if the due date is prior to the assignment creation date. For example, if the assignment is created on July 1, 2017 (07/01/2017) with an annual due date of June 30 (06/30), then this field will display 06/30/2017, which is prior to the assignment creation date. It is important to note that users' transcripts show the correct due date.

Date

Assignment Training Due Date - Relative Integer

This field displays the integer that has been set for the training due date of the assignment (only if 'Relative' is selected).

Note: When no integer has been set, "-1" displays.

Numeric

Assignment Training Due Date - Relative Unit

This field displays the unit that has been selected for the training due date of the assignment (only if 'Relative' is selected).

Text

Assignment Training Due Date - Type

This field indicates if the training due date has been set for the assignment. If it has, then it indicates if it is fixed or relative. If relative, this displays the relative trigger.

Text

Assignment Training This field displays the training purpose selected for Text

323


Purpose the assignment, if applicable.

Assignment Training Start Date

This field displays the date (no time included) that the training will be available on the user's transcript.

Date

Assignment Training Workflow

This field indicates how the training will be assigned to users. It refers to the option selected in the Training Assignment Workflow section of the Options step of the Assignment creation process.

It also indicates if the assignment was created through the learning assignment tool, versioning, or the training update tool.

Text

Assignment Training Workflow - Bypass User Payment

This field displays whether or not user payment is bypassed upon registration.

Yes/No

Assignment Type This field displays the type of the learning assignment, such as standard or dynamic. The value is pulled from the Assignment Type field on the Options step when creating a learning assignment.

Text

Assignment User Criteria (CSV File)

This field displays the ID of the CSV file(s) that were uploaded for the assignment.

Text

Assignment User Criteria (OU Description)

This field displays the organizational unit (OU) description of the users included in the user criteria for the learning assignment. Users are displayed individually on separate rows.

Text

Assignment User Criteria (OU Owner - Name)

This field displays the full name of the owner of the organizational unit (OU) of the users included in the user criterion that was included in the learning assignment. Users are displayed individually on separate rows.

Text

Assignment User Criteria (OU Owner - User ID)

This field displays the user ID of the owner of the organizational unit (OU) of the users included in the user criterion that was included in the learning assignment. Users are displayed individually on separate rows.

Text

324


Assignment User Criteria (OU Parent)

This field displays the Parent OU of the users included in the user criterion that was included in the learning assignment. Users are displayed individually on separate rows.

Text

Assignment User Criteria (OU Type)

This field displays the organizational unit (OU) type of the user criterion that was included in the learning assignment. Users are displayed individually on separate rows.

Text

Assignment User Criteria (OU)

This field displays the name of the OU(s) that are included in the user criteria for the assignment.

Text

Assignment User Criteria (OU) - Include Subordinates

This field displays whether the OU (included in the user criteria for the assignment) includes subordinates.

Text

Assignment User Criteria (User)

This field displays the full names of the user(s) who are included in the user criteria for the assignment.

Text

Removed from Assignment?

This field displays whether or not the specific user is currently dynamically removed from the assignment.

Note: A blank value always represents 'No' (i.e., the user is not removed from the assignment).

Yes/No

AuthorThese fields are only available in Reporting 2.0 in the Posting New > Posting User > Author section when building a report using the "Connect Communities Report" data map.


Division This field displays the division of the community posting author. If a posting has one or more reply, then each author's division is listed on a separate row. The character limit for this field is 200. This value is pulled from the Organizational Structure section of the user's User Record.

Text

Location This field displays the location of the community posting author. If a posting has one or more reply,

Text

325


then each author's location is listed on a separate row. The character limit for this field is 200. This value is pulled from the Organizational Structure section of the user's User Record.

Position This field displays the position of the community posting author. If a posting has one or more reply, then each author's position is listed on a separate row. The character limit for this field is 200. This value is pulled from the Organizational Structure section of the user's User Record.

Text

User Email This field displays the email address of the community posting author. If a posting has one or more reply, then each author's email address is listed on a separate row. The character limit for this field is 200. This value is pulled from the Contact section of the user's User Record.

Text

User Full Name This field displays the name of the community posting author. If a posting has one or more reply, then each author's name is listed on a separate row. The character limit for this field is 200. This value is pulled from the General section of the user's User Record.

Text

CommunityThis section is only available for the custom Connect Report and Connect Communities Report.


Community User Action Group

This field displays the Action Group of the community member. If the community has more than one member, then each action group is listed on a separate row. If the community member is in more than one action group, then each action group is listed on a separate row. The character limit for this field is 200. This value is pulled from the Community settings.

Text

Community User Division

This field displays the Division OU of the community member. If the community has more than one

Text

326


member, then each unique Division OU is listed on a separate row. The character limit for this field is 200. This value is pulled from the user's Organization Structure section of the user's User Record.

Community User Email

This field displays the email address of the community member. If the community has more than one member, then each unique email address is listed on a separate row. The character limit for this field is 200. This value is pulled from the Contact section of the user's User Record.

Text

Community User Location

This field displays the Location OU of the community member. If the community has more than one member, then each unique Location OU is listed on a separate row. The character limit for this field is 200. This value is pulled from the Organization Structure section of the user's User Record.

Text

Community User Name

This field displays the first and last name of the community member. If the community has more than one member, then each member's name is listed on a separate row. The character limit for this field is 200. This value is pulled from the General Information section of the user's User Record.

Text

Community User Position

This field displays the Position OU of the community member. If the community has more than one member, then each unique Position OU is listed on a separate row. The character limit for this field is 200. This value is pulled from the Organization Structure section of the user's User Record.

Text

CompensationThis section is only available for the custom Compensation Report.


<Annual Equivalency Name>

Each custom wage type's annual equivalency value is available to be selected, such as days or weeks. This field displays the user's annual equivalency, or the amount of units the user works in a given year. This value is pulled from the Employee Salary

Numeric

327


Management page.Compensation TaskThis section is only available for the custom Compensation Report.


<Base Component> (Employee Wage Type)

This field displays the base component amount in the user's wage type.

Numeric

New Salary Rate (Employee Wage Type)

This field displays the wage type's new salary/rate in the task in the user's wage type.

Numeric

[Non-Monetary Type Name] Value

This displays the most recent numerical selection from the compensation task. If an approver or administrator edits the value in the task, then the most recent updated value is displayed.

Numeric

Original Salary/Rate (Employee Wage Type)

This field displays the wage type's current salary/rate in the task in the user's wage type.

Numeric

Task Status This field displays the status of the compensation manager's compensation task This value is pulled from the Task Details page for the compensation task within Compensation Task Administration.

Text

Total Increase (Employee Wage Type)

This field displays the wage type's total increase in the user's wage type.

Numeric

CompetencyThis section is only available for the custom Competency Report, Observation Checklist Report, and Performance Report.


Competency Item ID This displays the reference ID that is associated with the competency item. This enables organizations to

Text

328


reference a competency item by it's unique ID.

Competency Item Name

This displays the name of the item within the competency.

Text

Competency Max Rating

This displays the maximum possible rating for the competency.

Text

Competency Model Category

This displays the category that is associated with the competency model.

Text

Competency Task Instance

This displays which recurrence of the competency assessment is being shown. This is useful because the same competency assessment task may be assigned to a user multiple times. For example, if the task was assigned to a user twice, this field populates either 1 or 2 depending on the task.

Numeric

Competency Assessor DetailsThis section is only available for the custom Competency Report.


Competency Item Assessor ID

This displays the ID that is associated with the assessor for the competency item. This value does not correlate with any system values. It serves to create unique rows to avoid the data being flagged and removed as a duplicate data point. For example, if two peers provide the same ratings, this value ensures that the ratings are not considered duplicates. This value distinguishes assessors within a competency assessment, but this value is not traceable across assessments. That is, an assessor will not necessarily have the same ID in different assessments. This ensures that report viewers cannot identify peers for privacy concerns.

Text

Competency Item Assessor Relationship

This displays the relationship that assessed the competency item for the user, such as Peer, Manager, or Indirect Manager.

Text

Competency Item This displays the rating that was provided by the Numeric

329


Individual Assessor's Rating

assessor for the competency item.

Check-InsThis section is only available for the custom Check-Ins Report.


Check-In ID This field displays all of the meetings that are included in a specific Check-In discussion.

Text

Check-In Is Archived This field displays whether the check-in was archived. Yes/No

Check-In Created Date

This field displays the date the check-in was created. Numeric

Check-In Frequency This field displays the meeting frequency selected by the user who created the check-in.

Text

Check-In Last Activity Date

This field displays the most recent date on which the check-in was opened, and any action was taken.

Numeric

Check-In Last Modified Date

This field displays the most recent date on which a user modified the check-in.

Numeric

Check-In Meeting Date

This field displays the scheduled meeting dates for a selected check-in.

Numeric

Check-In Meeting ID This field displays the meeting ID for a specific meeting or multiple meetings.

Text

Check-In Name This field displays the name of the check-in. Text

Check-In Note Has Content

This field displays whether the check-in meeting contains notes.

Yes/No

Check-In Template Is Active

This field displays whether a template is currently active.

Yes/No

Check-In Template This field displays the title of the check-in template. Text

330


Title

Check-In Topic Title This field displays the topic title contained in a template.

Text

Check-Ins - Check-In CreatorThis section is only available for the custom Check-Ins - Creator Report.


User Full Name This field displays the name of the user who created the check-in.

Text

User ID This field displays the user ID of the user who created the check-in.

Text

Check-Ins - Check-In ModifierThis section is only available for the custom Check-Ins - Modifiers Report.


User Full Name This field displays the name of the user who last modified the check-in.

Text

User ID This field displays the user ID of the user who last modified the check-in.

Text

Current CompensationThis section is only available for the custom Compensation Report.


Current <Annual Equivalency Name>

Each custom wage type's current annual equivalency value is available to be selected, such as Current Days or Current Weeks. This field displays the user's current annual equivalency, or the amount of units the user currently works in a given year. This value is pulled from the Employee Salary Management page.

Numeric

Current <Base This field displays the user's base component wage Numeric

331


Component> (Employee Wage Type)

type amount.

Current [Non-Monetary Type Name] Value

Each custom wage type's current annual equivalency value is available to be selected, such as Current Days or Current Weeks. This field displays the user's current annual equivalency, or the amount of units the user currently works in a given year. This value is pulled from the Employee Salary Management page.

Numeric

Current Salary/Rate (Employee Wage Type)

This field displays the user's current Salary/Rate value. This value is pulled from the Employee Salary Management page.

Numeric

Custom IntegrationsThis section is only available for the custom Recruiting Report.


Band Value This field displays the result of the integration order result.

Text

Completion Status This field displays the status of the integration activity, such as In Progress.

Text

Custom Integration This field displays the name of the integration. Text

Details This field displays the integration order result details. Text

Passed? This field indicates whether or not the applicant passed based on the integration order.

Yes/No

Score This field displays the applicant's score based on the integration order result.

Numeric

URL This field displays the URL for viewing the integration order result.

Text

Dev Plan

332


This section is only available for the custom Development Plan Report and Multi-Module Report.


Dev Plan Created by Full Name

This field displays the full name of the user who created the development plan. This field can be used to display data for development plans created using either the legacy or redesigned Development Plans functionality.

Text

Dev Plan Created by User ID

This field displays the User ID of the user who created the development plan. This field can be used to display data for development plans created using either the legacy or redesigned Development Plans functionality.

Text

Dev Plan Is Primary This field indicates whether the development plan is the user's primary development plan.

Yes/No

Dev Plan Template External ID

This field displays the template from which a development plan was created. This value does not change if the template is updated. This field is empty if a plan was not created using a template. This field only displays data for development plans created using the redesigned Development Plans functionality. This value is pulled from the Template Management page.

Text

Dev Plan Template Title at Plan Creation

This field displays the title of the template from which a development plan was created at the time the plan was created. This field is empty if a plan was not created using a template. This field only displays data for development plans created using the redesigned Development Plans functionality. This value is pulled from the version of the template, which is not accessible in the system.

Text


Text

333



Dev Plan CommentsThis section is only available for the custom Development Plan Report.


Objective Comment Created By Full Name

This field displays the full name of the user who posted the comment to a development plan objective. This field does not display for comments that are posted to a development plan.

Text

Objective Comment Date

This field displays the date on which the comment is posted to a development plan objective. This field does not display for comments that are posted to a development plan.

Date/Time

Objective Comment This field displays the comment text for a comment that is posted to a development plan objective. This field does not display comments that are posted to a development plan.

Text

Objective Reply Created By Full Name

This field displays the full name of the user who posted the comment reply to a development plan objective. This field does not display for comment replies that are posted to a development plan.

Text

Objective Reply Date This field displays the date on which the comment reply is posted to a development plan objective. This field does not display for replies that are posted to a development plan.

Date/Time

Objective Reply This field displays the reply text for a comment reply that is posted to a development plan objective. This field does not display comment replies that are posted to a development plan.

Text

Plan Comment Created By Full Name

This field displays the full name of the user who posted the comment to a development plan. This field does not display for comments that are posted to a

Text

334


development plan objective.

Plan Comment Date This field displays the date on which the comment is posted to a development plan. This field does not display for comments that are posted to a development plan objective.

Date/Time

Plan Comment This field displays the comment text for a comment that is posted to a development plan. This field does not display comments that are posted to a development plan objective.

Text

Plan Reply Created By Full Name

This field displays the full name of the user who posted a comment reply to a development plan. This field does not display for replies that are posted to a development plan objective.

Text

Plan Reply Date This field displays the date on which the comment reply is posted to a development plan. This field does not display for replies that are posted to a development plan objective.

Date/Time

Plan Reply This field displays the reply text for a comment reply that is posted to a development plan. This field does not display replies that are posted to a development plan objective.

Text

External AssessmentsThis section is only available for Reporting 2.0.


External Assessment - Current Status

This field is only available in Reporting 2.0.

This field displays the current status of the external assessment. The numerical values in the report correlate to the statuses as provided:

o Started = 0o In Progress = 1o Complete = 2o PreScreening Failed = 3

Numeric

335


o Assigned = 4

Form ApprovalsThis section is only available for the custom Forms Report and Onboarding Report.


Form Approval Final Completion Date

This displays the date on which the form was approved.

Date/Time

Form Approval Request Received Date

This displays the date on which the form approval request was received by the approver.

Date/Time

Form Approval Request Title

This displays the title of the form approval request. Text

Form Approval Status

This displays the overall approval status of the form. Text

Form Approver Comment

This displays comments that are left by approvers as they complete the form approval request.

Text

Form Approver Email This displays the email address of the user who is the approver.

Text

Form Approver ID This displays the user ID of the user who is the approver.

Text

Form Approver Name This displays the name of the user who is the approver.

Text

Form Approver Request Completed Date

This displays the date on which the approver completed the request. There may be multiple approvers for a form, and therefore each approver is displayed on a separate row.

Date/Time

Form Approver Status

This displays the approver's status for the form. Text

336


Form AttributesThis section is only available for the custom Forms Report and Onboarding Report.


Document Folder Name

This displays the name of the document folder in the Snapshot Documents widget in which the completed form is stored. This value is set by the administrator on the Storage tab when the form is created.

Text

Form Active This displays whether or not the form is active. This value is set by the administrator on the Build tab when the form is created or edited.

Yes/No

Form API Name This displays the API Name of the form. This field is used for third party integration purposes. This value is set by the administrator on the Build tab when the form is created.

Text

Form Description This displays the description of the form. This value is set by the administrator on the Build tab when the form is created.

Text

Form Published Date This displays the date and time at which the form was published.

Date/Time

Form Submission Date

This displays the date and time at which the form was submitted.

Date/Time

Form Submission Type

This displays from which part of the system the form was submitted, such as Onboarding Form Task or Proxy Completed.

Text

Form Submitted By This displays the name of the user who submitted the form. This could be the user who completed the form or the user who proxy completed the form on the user's behalf.

Text

Form Submitted For This displays the name of the user for whom the form request was submitted. If the user submitted the form on their own behalf, then this value is the same as

Text

337


the Form Submitted By field.

Form Title This displays the title of the form. This value is set by the administrator on the Build tab when the form is created.

Text

Form FieldsThis section is only available for the custom Forms Report and Onboarding Report.


Form E-Signature Date

This displays the date on which the form was electronically signed.

Date/Time

Form E-Signature Location (IP Address)

This displays the IP address of the device from which the form was electronically signed.

Text

Form E-Signature Name

This displays the name of the user who electronically signed the form.

Text

Form E-Signature User ID

This displays the user ID of the user who electronically signed the form.

Text

[Form Field] All fields are available that are found in the Available Fields section when creating a form. This displays the value for the field.

Multiple

[Form Question Title] All questions from the Question Bank are available. This displays the response to the question.

Text

Form TasksThis section is only available for the custom Forms Report and Onboarding Report.


Form Task Assignee Email

This displays the email address of the user who was assigned the task. This may be a user other than the user who is submitting the form. The assignees can be viewed on the Form Task Snapshot, and the email address value is pulled from the User Record page.

Text

338


Form Task Assignee Name

This displays the name of the user who was assigned the task. This may be a user other than the user who is submitting the form. The assignees can be viewed on the Form Task Snapshot, and the name value is pulled from the User Record page.

Text

Form Task Assignee User ID

This displays the user ID of the user who was assigned the task. This may be a user other than the user who is submitting the form. The assignees can be viewed on the Form Task Snapshot, and the user ID value is pulled from the User Record page.

Text

Form Task Assignment Date

This displays the date on which the form task was assigned. This value is pulled from the Form Task Snapshot.

Date/Time

Form Task Due Date This displays the date on which the form task is due. This value is pulled from the Form Task Snapshot.

Date/Time

Form Task ID This displays the ID of the form task. This is automatically set by the system.

Numeric

Form Task Status This displays the status of the form task. This value is pulled from the Form Task Snapshot.

Text

Form Task Type This displays the type of the form task, such as Onboarding or Standard. This value is set by the administrator when the task is created.

Text

GoalsThis section is only available for the custom Goals Report.


Goal Creation Date This field displays the date on which the goal was created. This value is displayed in the time zone of the logged in user. This value is pulled from the Goal History.

Date/Time

Historical StatusThis section is only available for the custom Recruiting Report.

339



Applicant Historical Status

This field displays the historical statuses that the applicant has been in. The historical status can be found on the Applicant Profile page's History tab.

Tips:

o To view all statuses for individual applicants, you can summarize by the User Full Name field. This will group the historical statuses by applicant.

o When an applicant has applied (or been added/moved to) more than one requisition and has at least one status for each requisition, the statuses are listed in order of least to most recently created requisition.

Text

Days in Status This field displays the number of days in which the applicant has been in the status. The value for this field refer to the applicant's historical status, and not their current status.

An applicant's status is visible throughout Recruiting, such as on the Manage Candidates page and the Snapshot page of a requisition.

An applicant's historical status can be found on the Applicant Profile page's History tab.

Numeric

Is Status Start Date Adjusted?

The report output will display “Yes” if a status start date has been manually adjusted by a user, or will display “No” if a status start date has not been manually adjusted. The "Yes" value for this field is pulled from the information icon that only displays on the Manage Applicants page or the Applicant Profile page when an applicant's status is manually changed.

Yes/No

Status End Date This field displays the date on which the status for the applicant ended. The value for this field can refer to the applicant's current status, as well as their

Date

340


historical status.



Status Start Date This field displays the date on which the status for the applicant started. The value for this field can refer to the applicant's current status, as well as their historical status.



Date

ILT FacilityThis section is only available for the custom Training Report, Transaction Report, and Transcript Report.


ILT Facility Active This field indicates whether or not an ILT Facility is active. The value is pulled from the Active field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Yes/No



Text



Text

ILT Facility Approval Required

This field indicates whether or not approval is required in order to schedule the facility. The value is pulled from the Approval Required field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Yes/No

341


ILT Facility City This field displays the city in which the ILT facility is located. The value is pulled from the Town/City field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

ILT Facility Contact This field displays the name of the contact for the ILT facility. The value is pulled from the Contact field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

ILT Facility Country This field displays the name of the country in which the ILT facility is located. The value is pulled from the Country field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

ILT Facility Email This field displays the email address of the contact for the ILT facility. The value is pulled from the Email field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

ILT Facility Fax This field displays the fax number of the contact for the ILT facility. The value is pulled from the Fax field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

ILT Facility ID This field displays the ID for the ILT facility. The value is pulled from the ID field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

ILT Facility Name This field displays the name of the ILT facility. The value is pulled from the Name field configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

ILT Facility Occupancy

This field displays the occupancy for the ILT facility. The value is pulled from the Occupancy field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Numeric

342


ILT Facility On Site This field indicates whether or not the ILT facility is on site. The value is pulled from the On Site field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Yes/No

ILT Facility Owner This field displays the name of the owner for the ILT facility. The value is pulled from the Owner field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

ILT Facility Parent This field displays the ID of the parent for the ILT facility. The value is pulled from the Parent field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

ILT Facility Phone This field displays the phone number for the ILT facility. The value is pulled from the Phone field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

ILT Facility Postal Code

This field displays the postal code for the ILT facility. The value is pulled from the Postal Code field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

ILT Facility State This field displays the state/province in which the ILT facility is located. The value is pulled from the Province field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

ILT Facility Time Zone

This field displays the time zone in which the ILT facility is located. The value is pulled from the Time Zone field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

ILT Facility Type This field displays the type of ILT facility, such as building, floor, room, etc. The value is pulled from the Facility Type field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

ILT Seat AllocationThis section is only available for the custom Training Report, Transaction Report, and Transcript Report.

343



Enrollment Restrictions

This field indicates that enrollment restrictions have been defined for the event. The report displays "Place Enrollment Restrictions" or "Manage Reservations and Restrictions," depending on the option selected in the Place Enrollment Restrictions field or the Manage Reservations and Restrictions field in the Enrollment Reservations and Restrictions section when configuring the Session Defaults tab for the event.

Note: If you add this field to the report, you will also want to add other fields in the ILT Seat Allocation section so that your report will display the specific enrollment restrictions data, such as the number of seats restricted and the organizational unit (OU) and OU type that is being restricted.

Text

Included Subordinates

This field indicates whether or not the Include Subordinates option was selected when configuring enrollment options for an event. The option can be selected when defining settings for the Place Enrollment Restrictions field and the Manage Reservations and Restrictions field in the Enrollment section when configuring the Session Defaults tab for the event.

Note: If you add this field to the report, you will also want to add other fields in the ILT Seat Allocation section so that your report will display the additional data related to this field.

Yes/No

Number of seats reserved

This field indicates the number of seats that have been reserved for a specific organizational unit (OU). Each OU displays in a separate line on the report. The value is pulled from the Place Enrollment Restrictions field or the Manage Reservations and Restrictions field in the Enrollment Reservations and Restrictions section when configuring the Session Defaults tab for the event.

Note: If you add this field to the report, you will also

Numeric

344


want to add other fields in the ILT Seat Allocation section so that your report will display the specific enrollment reservations/restrictions data, such as the number of seats reserved and the OU and OU for which the seats are reserved.

Number of seats restricted

This field indicates the number of seats that have been restricted for an organizational unit (OU) or OU type. The value is pulled from the Place Enrollment Restrictions field in the Enrollment section when configuring the Session Defaults tab for the event. If multiple OUs are restricted, then each OU displays in a separate line on the report.

Note: If you add this field to the report, you will also want to add other fields in the ILT Seat Allocation section so that your report will display the specific enrollment restrictions data, such as the number of seats restricted and the OU and OU type that is being restricted.

Numeric

Order This field indicates the order of the organizational units (OU) that are selected in the Manage Reservations and Restrictions field in the Enrollment Reservations and Restrictions section when configuring the Session Defaults tab for the event.

Note: If you add this field to the report, you will also want to add other fields in the ILT Seat Allocation section so that your report will display the specific enrollment reservations/restrictions data, such as the number of seats restricted and the OU and OU type that is being restricted.

Numeric

Organizational Unit Reserved

This field displays the name of the organizational units (OU) for which seats have been reserved. Each OU displays on a separate line in the report. The value is defined when selecting the OUs in the Place Enrollment Restrictions field or the Manage Reservations and Restrictions field in the Enrollment Reservations and Restrictions section when configuring the Session Defaults tab for the

Text

345


event.


Organizational Unit Restricted

This field displays the name of the organizational units (OU) for which seats have been restricted. Each OU displays on a separate line in the report. The value is defined when selecting the OUs in the Place Enrollment Restrictions field or the Manage Reservations and Restrictions field in the Enrollment Reservations and Restrictions section when configuring the Session Defaults tab for the event.


Text

Organizational Unit Type Reserved

This field displays the name of the organizational unit (OU) type for which seats have been reserved. Each OU type displays on a separate line in the report. The value is defined when selecting the OU type in the Place Enrollment Restrictions field or the Manage Reservations and Restrictions field in the Enrollment Reservations and Restrictions section when configuring the Session Defaults tab for the event.


Text

Organizational Unit Type Restricted

This field displays the name of the organizational unit (OU) type for which seats have been restricted. Each OU type displays on a separate line in the report. The value is defined when selecting the OU type in the

Text

346


Place Enrollment Restrictions field or the Manage Reservations and Restrictions field in the Enrollment Reservations and Restrictions section when configuring the Session Defaults tab for the event.


ILT Session Schedule (Part Level)This section is only available for the custom Evaluations Report, Training Report, Transaction Report, and Transcript Report.


Part Attendance This field displays the number of users who attended an ILT session part. Attendance will not display until the session roster has been submitted. The value for this field is the calculated attendance for the session part, as indicated by the instructor.

Numeric

Part Break Duration This field displays the length of an ILT session part break (in minutes). If there is more than one break for a part, each break will appear in a separate row on the report. The value for this field is pulled from the Duration field in the Part Break section when configuring the Parts Schedule tab for sessions.

Numeric

Part Break Name This field displays the name of an ILT session part break. If there is more than one break for a part, each break will appear in a separate row on the report. The value for this field is pulled from the text field in the Part Break section when configuring the Parts Schedule tab for sessions.

Text

Part Description This field displays the description of an ILT session part provided when the part was created/edited. The value for this field is pulled from the Description field

Text

347


when configuring the Parts Schedule tab for sessions.

Part Duration This field displays the length of an ILT session part in minutes. The duration is calculated using the date and times selected in the part Start Date and End fields, which are configured on the Parts Schedule tab for sessions. The value for this field is pulled from the Start Date field in the Duration section when configuring the Parts Schedule tab for sessions.

Numeric

Part End Date This field displays the date and time the ILT session part ends; usually entered in the time zone of the location where the part is scheduled. The value for this field is pulled from the End field when configuring the Parts Schedule tab for sessions.

Note: To view the time zone associated with this part, include the Part Time Zone field in your report.

Date

Part Location This field displays the facility/location OU where the ILT session part was/will be held. The value for this field is pulled from the Name field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text


This field displays the first line of the ILT session part location's address as identified in the Facility Information section of the Define Location page. The value for this field is pulled from the Address #1 field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text


This field displays the second line of the ILT session part location's address as identified in the Facility Information section of the Define Location page. The value for this field is pulled from the Address #2 field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

Part Location City This field displays the city field of the ILT session part location's address as identified in the Facility Information section of the Define Location page. The

Text

348


value for this field is pulled from the City field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Part Location Fax This field displays the ILT session part location's fax number as identified in the Facility Information section of the Define Location page. The value for this field is pulled from the Fax field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

Part Location State This field displays the state/province field of the ILT session part location's address as identified in the Facility Information section of the Define Location page. The value for this field is pulled from the State field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

Part Location Zip This field displays the postal code field of the ILT session part location's address as identified in the Facility Information section of the Define Location page. The value for this field is pulled from the Postal Code field when configuring the facility in Facilities & Resources.

Text

Part Instructor This field displays the name(s) of the people identified as primary instructor(s) for the ILT session part. The names will display as [Last Name], [First Name]. If the ILT session part has multiple primary instructors, each instructor will be listed on a separate line within the same cell.

In the report output, each instructor name will display in a separate row.

The value for this field is pulled from the Instructor field in the Instructor Details pop-up when adding instructors to the part on the Parts Schedule tab for sessions. Note: The primary instructor is defined by selecting the "Primary" option in the Role drop-down on the Instructor Details pop-up.

Text

Part Instructor ID This field displays the user ID of the primary instructor for the session. In the report output, each instructor ID will display in a separate row. The user ID is defined in the User ID field on the user record.

Text

349


Part Instructor Type This field displays the type of the instructor, either Primary or Secondary. It is important to include the Part Instructor Type field in the report so that you can determine if an instructor is the Primary or Secondary instructor.

The value is pulled from the Role field on the Instructor Details pop-up, which is accessed by clicking the Add Instructor option on the Edit Part page when configuring the Parts Schedule tab for a session.

Text

Part Start Date This field displays the date and time the ILT session part begins; usually entered in the time zone of the location where the training occurred To view the time zone associated with this part, include the Part Time Zone field in your report. The value for this field is pulled from the Start Date field when configuring the Parts Schedule tab for sessions.

Date

Part Time Zone This field displays the time zone associated with the start and end dates of the ILT session part. The value for this field is pulled from the Time Zone field when configuring the Parts Schedule tab for sessions.

Text

Part Training Minutes This field displays the total number of minutes dedicated to training delivery for an ILT session part. Training minutes are calculated by subtracting the total break duration for all part breaks from the part duration, as defined when configuring the Parts Schedule tab for sessions.

Numeric

Subject ID This field displays the title of the subject. The value for this field is pulled from the Subject Title field when configuring subjects in Subject Management.

Text


The value for the Training End Date field is pulled

Date

350


from the End field in the DATE AND TIME section on the Parts Schedule tab for the session.

Training Session Admin

This field displays the name of the user who created the session. The value in the report displays as [Last Name], [First Name]. The value is pulled from the Created By field on the Summary tab when configuring the session.

The value in this field is the same value that displays in the Created By Name field, which is also a field in the Training section for the custom report.

Text

IncumbentThis section is only available for the custom Job Pool Succession Report.


[metric name] - Calibration Source

This field displays from which calibration source a metric value originated. Because SMP Metrics are unique to each organization, the Calibration Source field names will vary. For example, for the "Potential" SMP metric, there will be a "Potential - Calibration Source" field. This field has four possible values:

o Helicopter Viewo Tasko Snapshoto Metric Grid Report

Text

Interview Management and SchedulingThis section is only available for the custom Recruiting Report.


Applicant Reached Scheduled Interview Status Date

This field displays the date on which the applicant reached the Interview status type.


Date

351



On Demand Video Interview - Date Assigned

This field displays the date on which the On Demand Video Interview was assigned to the applicant. The value for this field is pulled from the Date Assigned field in the My Tasks section of the applicant's My Profile page in the career site.

Note: On Demand Video interviews are assigned to applicants via the Interview status type panel on the Applicant Profile > Statuses tab.

Date

On Demand Video Interview - Date Completed

This field displays the date on which the On Demand Video Interview was completed by the applicant. The value for this field is pulled from the Date Completed field in the My Tasks section of the applicant's My Profile page in the career site.

Note: On Demand Video interviews are assigned to applicants via the Interview status type panel on the Applicant Profile > Statuses tab.

Date

On Demand Video Interview - Interviewer ID

This field displays the user ID of the interviewer. The value is pulled from the User ID field on the user record.

Text

On Demand Video Interview - Interviewer Name

This field displays the name of the interviewer. The value is pulled from the User Name field on the user record.

Text

On Demand Video Interview - Interviewer Position

This field displays the name of the interviewer's assigned Position Organizational Unit (OU). The value is pulled from the Position field on the user record.


Text

On Demand Video Interview -

This field displays the interviewer's recommendation from the interview. The value is either "Advance" or

Text

352


Interviewer Recommendation

"Pass." The value is pulled from Record Recommendation pop-up, which is accessed from the Options drop-down on the Today's Interviews tab on Interview Manager.

Scheduled Interview - Date

This field displays the date of the Scheduled Interview, as well as the start time of the interview (in the time zone selected when configuring the interview). The value for this field is pulled from the interview details on the Applicant Profile > Statuses tab for the scheduled interview status.

Date

Scheduled Interview - Does Interview Guide Require Ratings?

This field indicates whether or not the interview guide requires the interviewer to rate the applicant using the interviewer guide's competencies. The report displays "Yes" or "No."

The value for this field is pulled from the Require Rating field when configuring the interview guide.

Yes/No

Scheduled Interview - End Time

This field displays the time at which the Scheduled Interview ends. The value for this field is pulled from the interview details on the Applicant Profile > Statuses tab for the scheduled interview status.

Text

Scheduled Interview - Interview Guide Calculated Score

This field displays the average score calculated using the scores entered by the interviewer. The value for this field can be found by viewing the first value in parentheses in the Recommendation section of the interview guide.

Numeric

Scheduled Interview - Interview Guide Name

This field displays the name of the interview guide. The value for this field is pulled from the Name field on the Create Interview Guide page.

Text

Scheduled Interview - Interview Guide Target Score to Advance

This field displays the average score calculated using the scores entered by the interviewer. The value for this field can be found by viewing the second value in parentheses in the Recommendation section of the

Numeric

353


interview guide.

Scheduled Interview - Interviewer Comments

This field displays the comments provided by the interviewer. The value for this field is pulled from the Comments pop-up, which is accessed by clicking the View Recommendation Comments link on the Interview Manager > Completed Interviews page.

Text

Scheduled Interview - Interviewer ID

This field displays the user ID of the interviewer. The value is pulled from the User ID field on the user record.

Text

Scheduled Interview - Interviewer Name

This field displays the name of the interviewer. The value is pulled from the User Name field on the user record.

Text

Scheduled Interview - Interviewer Position

This field displays the name of the interviewer's assigned Position Organizational Unit (OU). The value is pulled from the Position field on the user record.


Text

Scheduled Interview - Interviewer Recommendation

This field displays the interviewer's recommendation from the interview. The value is "Advance," "Pass," or "No Response."

The advance/pass value is pulled from Record Recommendation pop-up, which is accessed from the Options drop-down on the Today's Interviews tab on Interview Manager.For the "No Response" value, this appears if an interviewer has not submitted a recommendation.

Text

Scheduled Interview - Interviewer Schedule Status

This field displays the interviewer's status for the Scheduled Interview. The values are "Declined," "Scheduled," or "Pending," which indicates whether or not the interviewer is scheduled for the interview or if their response to the interview request is still

Text

354


pending.

The value for this field is pulled from the Scheduling Status column in the Interview status type panel on the Applicant Profile > Statuses tab.

Scheduled Interview - Location

This field displays the location of the interviewer. The value is pulled from the Location column in the Interview status type panel on the Applicant Profile > Statuses tab.

Text

Scheduled Interview - Phone Number

This field displays the phone number for the interview. The value is pulled from the Phone Number field when creating the interview.

The phone number can also be viewed on the interviewer's Interview Manager dashboard.

Text

Scheduled Interview - Start Time


Text

Scheduled Interview - Start Time


Text

Scheduled Interview - Time Zone

This field displays the time zone in which the Scheduled Interview takes place. The value for this field is pulled from the interview details on the Applicant Profile > Statuses tab for the scheduled interview status.

The time zone is set when creating the interview. The time zone is not reflective of the interviewer's time zone on their user record.

Text

Scheduled Interview - Type

This field displays the type of interview. For Scheduled Interviews, the value for this field is either "In Person" or "Phone." The value is pulled from the

Text

355


Type field when configuring the interview via the Applicant Profile > Statuses tab.

Nomination Modification HistoryThis section is only available for the custom Talent Pool Report. Note the following report considerations:

o Because of the relationship between talent pools and nomination lists, a user may appear in the report multiple times if they are in a talent pool and a nomination list. It is a best practice to include both Talent Pool and Nomination List columns in the report to clarify to which entities the user belongs.

o Modification history fields only display values for users who are currently in the talent pool or nomination list. The report does not include users who were in these groups in the past.


Nomination Changed User

This displays the name of the user who was modified within the nomination list. The nomination list modification history can be viewed from the Talent Pool page. See Talent Pool - View.

Text

Nomination List Action Date

This displays the date and time at which the user was modified within the nomination list. The nomination list modification history can be viewed from the Talent Pool page. See Talent Pool - View.

Date/Time

Nomination List Action

This displays the action that was taken on the user within the nomination list. The nomination list modification history can be viewed from the Talent Pool page. See Talent Pool - View.

Text

Nomination List Changed By

This displays the name of the user who modified the Nomination Changed User within the nomination list. The nomination list modification history can be viewed from the Talent Pool page. See Talent Pool - View.

Text

NominationsThis section is only available for the custom Talent Pool Report. Note the following report considerations:

o Because of the relationship between talent pools and nomination lists, a user may appear in the report multiple times if they are in a talent pool and a nomination list. It is

356


a best practice to include both Talent Pool and Nomination List columns in the report to clarify to which entities the user belongs.



Nomination List Added Date

This displays the date and time at which the talent pool was created. This value is set when the nomination list is created.

Date/Time

Nomination List Name

This displays the name of the candidate nomination list in which the user is nominated. This value is set when the nomination list is created, and it can be viewed from the Talent Pool page. See Talent Pool - View.

Text

Nomination List User Status

This displays the status of the user in relation to the nomination list, such as Nominated or New Candidate. This value is set and can be viewed from the Talent Pool page. See Talent Pool - View.

Text

Offer LetterThis section is only available for the custom Recruiting Report.


Offer Letter Bonus This field displays the bonus amount. The value is pulled from the Bonus field on the modular offer letter or the standard offer letter.

Text

Offer Letter Compensation

This field displays the compensation type. The value is pulled from the Bonus field on the modular offer letter or the standard offer letter.

Text

Offer Letter Currency This field displays the currency. The value is pulled from the Currency field on the modular offer letter or the standard offer letter.

Text

357


Offer Letter Division This field displays the Division Organizational Unit (OU). The value is pulled from the Division field on the modular offer letter or the standard offer letter.

Text

Offer Letter Hiring Manager

This field displays the name of the hiring manager. The value is pulled from the Hiring Manager field on the modular offer letter or the standard offer letter.

Text

Offer Letter Hourly Rate

This field displays the hourly rate, if the compensation type is Hourly. The value is pulled from the Hourly Rate field on the modular offer letter or the standard offer letter.

Numeric

Offer Letter Labor Hours

This field displays the labor hours, if the compensation type is Hourly. The value is pulled from the Labor Hours field on the modular offer letter or the standard offer letter.

Numeric

Offer Letter Location This field displays the hourly rate, if the compensation type is Hourly. The value is pulled from the Location field on the modular offer letter or the standard offer letter.

Text

Offer Letter Next Level Hiring Manager

This field displays the name of the next level hiring manager. The value is pulled from the Next Level Hiring Manager field on the modular offer letter or the standard offer letter.

Text

Offer Letter Number of Offer Version

This field displays the offer letter version number. The value is pulled from the Offer Details section in the Offer Letter status type on the Applicant Profile > Statuses tab.

Labor Hours field on the modular offer letter or the standard offer letter.

Numeric

Offer Letter Offer Creation Date

This field displays the date on which the offer letter was created. The value is only visible in Reporting

Date

358


and is not visible within the Offer Letters functionality.

Offer Letter Offer Notes

This field displays the notes that were made in the Notes field on the modular offer letter or the standard offer letter.

Text

Offer Letter Pay Cycle

This field displays the pay cycle that was selected in the Pay Cycle field on the modular offer letter or the standard offer letter.

Text

Offer Letter Salary This field displays the salary amount. The value is pulled from the Salary field on the modular offer letter or the standard offer letter.

Numeric

Offer Letter Source This field displays the name of the hiring manager. The value is pulled from the Source field on the modular offer letter or the standard offer letter.

Text

Offer Letter Start Date

This field displays the start date of the position. The value is pulled from the Start Date field on the modular offer letter or the standard offer letter.

Date

Offer Letter Wage Type

This field displays the wage type. The value for this field is either "Annual" or "Hourly." The value is pulled from the Wage Type field on the modular offer letter or the standard offer letter.

Text

Performance Review Competency and Assessment SectionsThis section is only available for the custom Performance Review Report.


Competency Description

This displays the description of the competency. The description does not include HTML or other formatting; it is displayed as plain text. This value is pulled from the competency within the performance review section.

Text

359


Competency Name This displays the name of the competency. This value is pulled from the competency within the performance review section.

Text

Competency Rating Comment

This displays the comment that is associated with the competency rating within the performance review section.

Text

Competency Rating Commented By (ID)

This displays the user ID of the user who added the comment to the competency rating within the performance review section.

Text

Competency Rating Commented By (Name)

This displays the full name of the user who added the comment to the competency rating within the performance review section.

Text

Competency Rating Review Weight

This displays the weight associated with the competency. For Competency Assessment sections, no value is displayed.

Numeric

Competency Rating Score

This displays the score associated with the competency's rating. If no score is available, then N/A is displayed.

Text

Competency Rating Title

This displays the title associated with the competency's rating. For Competency Assessment sections, no value is displayed.

Text

Competency Version This displays the version number of the competency. This value is pulled from the competency within the performance review section.

Numeric

Performance Review QuestionThis section is only available for the custom Performance Review Report.


Question This field displays the full text of the question in the performance review section for the performance review task. The value is pulled from the Question field on the Question Properties pop-up when

Text

360


adding questions to a performance review section.


Question Responder This field displays the name of the user who responded to the rating scale question in the performance review task section. The value displays as [Last Name], [First Name]. The value is pulled from the user record of the responder.


Text

Question Response Comment

This field displays the response or comment entered by the user or reviewer in the comments box for the question in the performance review task section. The value is pulled from the performance review. The value can be viewed from the printable performance review on the Snapshot > Reviews page in Universal Profile.

Text

Question Response Rating Score

This field displays the rating entered by the user when responded to the rating scale question in the performance review task section. The value is pulled from the performance review.


Text

Question Response Rating Title

This field displays the title of the rating, as defined on the Define Rating Scale pop-up when configuring the performance review section.

Text

Question Type This field displays the question type, as defined in the Response Type field on the Question Properties pop-up when adding questions to a performance review section.

Text

361



Performance Review SectionThis section is only available for the custom Performance Review Report.


Number of Section Questions

This field displays the number of questions that are in a section for a step in the performance review task. The value is calculated by adding the number of questions that have been added to a section when configuring the section on the Create/Edit Section page in Performance Review Form Sections.

Numeric

Reviewer Section Rating

This field displays the reviewer's rating for the section in the performance review task. The value is pulled from the performance review. The value can be viewed from the printable performance review on the Snapshot > Reviews page in Universal Profile.

Numeric

Section Name This field displays the name of the section within a step in the performance review task. The value is pulled from the Name field on the Create/Edit Section page in Performance Review Form Sections.

Text

Section Type This field displays the section type within a step in the performance review task. The value is pulled from the Type field on the Create/Edit Section page in Performance Review Form Sections.

Text

Section Version This field displays the version of the section within a step in the performance review task. The value is pulled from the Type column on the Performance Review Form Sections page.

Numeric

Performance Review Sign-OffThis section is only available for the custom Performance Review Report.

362



Sign-off Comments This field displays the comments entered in the comments box by the reviewer when signing off on the performance review task. The reviewer can be self, manager, etc. Comments are entered on the Sign-Off step.

Comments are only available for performance review sections if enabled by the administrator when configuring the section in the performance review task.

Text

Sign-off Declined This field indicates whether or not the user being reviewed declined to sign the performance review. The report displays "Yes" if the user declined to sign and "No" if the reviewer did not decline to sign.

On the performance review, the user can decline to sign in the Decline to Sign field on the Sign-Off step.

Yes/No

Sign-off Signature This field displays the name of the user or reviewer who signed off on the performance review task on the Sign-Off step. The value displays in the report as [First Name] [Last Name].

Text

Sign-off Timestamp This field displays the date and time of when the user or reviewer signed off on the performance review task on the Sign-Off step.

Date

Sign-off Type This field displays the type of sign-off for the performance review task on the Sign-Off step. The sign-off type is set in the Signature Method field when configuring the Sign Off performance review section. Values may be Electronic, Authenticated, or Manual.

Text

Performance Review StepThis section is only available for the custom Performance Review Report.

363



User ID This field displays the user ID of the co-planner. The value is pulled from the user record of the co-planner for the succession task.

Text

User Full Name This field displays the name of the co-planner. The value displays as [Last Name], [First Name]. The value is pulled from the user record of the co-planner for the succession task.

Text

Number of Step Sections

This field displays the number of step sections configured for the step in the performance review task. The value is pulled from the Sections field on the Review Workflow page of the task.

Text

Overall Step Rating This field displays the user's rating for the step in the performance review task. The value is pulled from the performance review.


Numeric

Reopened This field returns a Yes or No value that indicates whether the performance review step was reopened.

If a reviewee reopens a performance review step, the whole step is marked as reopened. It is not possible to report on which reviewee reopened the step.

Yes/No

Step Assigned To This field displays the user type to whom the step was assigned. The value is pulled from the Assigned To field when configuring the step for the task.

Text

Step Due Date This field displays the due date of the step. The value is pulled from the Due Date field for the step on the Review Workflow page of the task.

Date

364


For steps that are configured to have a relative due date from the date on which the task is assigned, the report output converts the number of days in the Due Date field to a calendar date. The Step Due Date field on the report will not display a number of days; it will only display an exact calendar date.

Step Optional This field indicates whether or not the step is optional. The report displays "Yes" if the step is optional and "No" if the step is not optional. The value is pulled from the This step is optional field when configuring the step for the task.

Yes/No

Step Reviewer ID This field displays the user ID of the reviewer. The value is pulled from the user record of the reviewer for the performance review task step. The reviewer is the user to whom the step is assigned.

Text

Step Reviewer Name This field displays the name of the reviewer. The value is pulled from the user record of the reviewer for the performance review task step. The reviewer is the user to whom the step is assigned.

Text

Step Sequence This field displays the due date of the step. The value is pulled from the Sequence field for the step on the Review Workflow page of the task.

Numeric

Step Status This field displays the status of the step. The value is pulled from the Review Details for [Step Assignee Name] pop-up.

The value can be viewed by clicking the View Details icon in the Options column on the Task Details page when viewing the page in Employee view. Or, the value can be viewed in the Status column when viewing the Task Details page in Reviewer view.

Date

Step Submission Date

This field displays the date on which the performance review step was completed.

Date

365


Step Title This field displays the step title. The value is pulled from the Step Title field when configuring the step for the task.

Yes/No

Step Weight This field displays the weight of the step. The value is pulled from the Step Weight field for the step on the Review Workflow page of the task.

Numeric

Performance Review TaskThis section is only available for the custom Performance Review Report.


Completion Date This field displays the date on which the performance review task was completed. The value can be viewed in the Completion Date field on the Snapshot > Reviews page in Universal Profile.

Date

Expiration Date This field displays the due date or expiration date for the off-cycle performance review task. The expiration date is set in the When is the entire review due? field when configuring the Off-cycle Performance Review Task. This value can be viewed on the Task Details page for an off-cycle review task.

Date

Performance Review Active

This field displays the active status of the performance review. The report displays "Yes" if the review is active and "No" if the review is inactive. The value is pulled from the Active column on the Performance Review Task Administration page.

Yes/No

Performance Review Due Date

This field displays the date on which the entire review is due. The value is pulled from the When is the entire review due field on the General tab of the performance review task.

Date

Task Final Rating This field displays the user's performance review rating. The value is pulled from the performance review. The value can be viewed from the Snapshot

Numeric

366


> Reviews page in Universal Profile. Ratings are configured by the administrator in the Overall Rating Scale section on the General tab of the performance review task.

Task Final Rating Text

This field displays the text rating for the user's performance review. The value is pulled from the performance review. The value can be viewed from the printable performance review from the Snapshot > Reviews page in Universal Profile. Text ratings are configured by the administrator in the Overall Rating Scale section on the General tab of the performance review task.

Numeric

Task Name This field displays the date on which the review period starts. The value is pulled from the Task Name field on the General tab of the performance review task.

Text

Position CriteriaThis section is only available for the custom Job Pool Succession Report.





Text

PostingThis section is only available for the custom Connect Report.


367


Author Email This field displays the email address of the content author. If a posting has one or more reply, then each author's email address is listed on a separate row. The character limit for this field is 200. This value is pulled from the Contact section of the user's User Record.

Text

Content Type This field displays the type of content that corresponds with other custom reporting fields in the Posting section, including Author Division, Author Location, Author Name, Author Position, Author Email, Create Date, Last Modified Date, Tags, Posting Title, Posting ID, Posting Deleted, Posting Type, Tag: Accepted, Tag: Answered, Tag: Completed, and Tag: Featured. The possible values for this field are Posting Body, Posting Reply, and Threaded Reply.

Administrators may experience existing reports becoming larger with more entries because information is included for each posting and posting reply. In order to only view data for original postings and not posting replies, filter the report by Content Type, and set this filter to Posting Body.

Text

Posting ID This field displays the unique ID for the posting. The character limit for this field is 200. Posting IDs cannot be viewed within the system.

Text

Tags This field displays the tags associated with the posting, including system tags. If the posting has more than one tag, then each tag is listed on a separate row. The character limit for this field is 200. This value is pulled from the Posting settings.

Text

Pre-Screening QuestionsThis section is only available for the custom Recruiting Report.


Applicant Response - Date

When the Applicant Response - Date field is added to the report, the report output displays the date value that the applicant entered for the Date type pre-

Date

368


screening question.

Applicant Response Score

This field displays the total possible score for an individual question. The value for this field is pulled from the Score column on the Pre-Screening Questions pop-up. The value in the Score column on the pop-up displays as "[Applicant Response Score] out of [Question Total Score]."

Numeric

Correct? This is a Yes/No field that indicates whether or not the applicant answered the question correctly. The correct response for a question can be found in the Correct column when creating pre-screening questions.

Note: If the Include a correct answer box was not checked for the question, then the question does not have a correct or incorrect answer.

Yes/No

Possible Screening Section Score

This field displays the total possible score that an applicant can receive on the pre-screening questions section. The value for this field is pulled from the pre-screening questions column on the Manage Applicants page. The value is the last number in parentheses where "[Section Score] out of [Total Possible Section Score]" displays.

Note: The name of the column on the Manage Applicants page will vary, since it is defined by the administrator when configuring the pre-screening questions section for the application workflow.

Numeric

Question This field displays the pre-screening question. The value for this field is pulled from the question text box when creating questions. The value is also visible in the Question column on the Pre-Screening Question Bank page.

Text

Question Author This field displays the user who created the pre-screening question. The value for this field is visible in the Author column on the Pre-Screening

Text

369


Question Bank page.

Question Category This field displays the category that was selected for the pre-screening question. The value for this field is pulled from the Category field when creating questions. The value is also visible in the Category column on the Pre-Screening Question Bank page.

Text

Question ID This field displays the ID for the pre-screening question. The question ID is system-defined and cannot be modified or configured. The value for this field is visible in the ID column on the Pre-Screening Question Bank page.

Numeric

Question Total Score This field displays the total possible score for the pre-screening question. The value for this field is pulled from the Score column on the Pre-Screening Questions pop-up. The value in the Score column on the pop-up displays as "[Applicant Response Score] out of [Question Total Score]."

Numeric

Response Type This field displays the field type that was selected for the pre-screening question. The value for this field is pulled from the Select Field Type page when creating questions. The value is also visible in the Response Type column on the Pre-Screening Question Bank page.

Text

Screen Out? This field displays the Yes/No value that was selected in the Screen out applicants based on this question? field when configuring the Screening Options pop-up for the pre-screening question in the application workflow.

Text

Screening Section % Score

This field displays the applicant's score on the pre-screening questions section as a percentage. The value for this field is the percentage value that displays in the pre-screening questions column on the Manage Applicants page. Note: The name of

Numeric

370


the column on the Manage Applicants page will vary, since it is defined by the administrator when configuring the pre-screening questions section for the application workflow.

Screening Section Name

This field displays the application workflow section name that contains pre-screening questions. The value for this field is pulled from the Title field for the section when configuring the application workflow sections.

Text

Screening Section Score

This field displays the score that the applicant received on the pre-screening questions section. The value for this field is pulled from the pre-screening questions column on the Manage Applicants page. The value is the first number in parentheses where "[Section Score] out of [Total Possible Section Score]" displays.

Note: The name of the column on the Manage Applicants page will vary, since it is defined by the administrator when configuring the pre-screening questions section for the application workflow.

Numeric

Section Screen Out Score

This field displays the score that determines when an applicant will screen-out of an application at the survey level (via the Screen out when score is less than field for the Pre-Screening Survey Details).

Numeric

ReferralThis section is only available for the custom Recruiting Report.


Referrer Name Displays the name of the user who made the referral. The name appears as Last Name, First Name.

Text

Referrer User ID Displays the user ID of the person who made the referral.

Text

Referrer User Name Displays the user name of the person who made the Text

371


referral.RequisitionThis section is only available for the custom Recruiting Report and Multi-Module Reports.


Attached Document Title

Displays the title of a document attachment that is attached to the requisition. The value for this field is pulled from the Document Title column in the Attachments section on the General tab of the requisition.

Note: This field does not display the title of an attachment that an applicant included in their application, nor does the field display the title of an attachment on the Documents tab of the Applicant Profile page.

Text

Can Apply This field indicates whether or not applicants are allowed to apply to the parent requisition. The report output displays Yes or No. The value for this field is pulled from the Do Not Allow to Apply field on the General tab of the requisition.

Yes/No

Hiring Manager - Email

Displays the email address of the user who is selected as the hiring manager for the requisition. The value is pulled from the Email Address field on the user record.

Text

Hiring Manager - ID Displays the user ID for the Hiring Manager defined during requisition creation under the Hiring Team section on the General Tab of the requisition.

Text

Hiring Manager Displays the name ID for the Hiring Manager defined during requisition creation under the Hiring Team section on the General Tab of the requisition. The name displays as Last Name, First Name.

Text

Is Status Start Date The report output will display “Yes” if a status start Yes/No

372


Adjusted? date has been manually adjusted by a user, or will display “No” if a status start date has not been manually adjusted. The "Yes" value for this field is pulled from the information icon that only displays on the Manage Applicants page or the Applicant Profile page when an applicant's status is manually changed.

Offer Letter Approval – Offer Approver ID

Displays the user ID of the Offer Letter Approver. The Offer Letter Approver is set when you define the approval workflow for an offer letter. You can view these in the Offer Details Section of the Status Tab of the Applicant Profile.

Text

On Demand Video Interview – Interviewer ID

This field corresponds to the Interview Reviewer’s ID for organizations that have On Demand Video Interviews configured in their portal. The ability to conduct video interviews is controlled by backend settings. If your organization has these settings enabled and the interview panel was configured for the template selected on the General tab for the requisition, then you will be able to define an On Demand Video Interview and Interview Reviewer. In the interview section on the Statuses tab of the Applicant Profile page, you will be able to define the On Demand Video Interview Reviewer.

Text

Parent Requisition ID Displays the requisition ID for the parent requisition. The requisition ID can be found in the ID column on the Manage Job Requisition page.

Note: Parent requisitions are created when child requisitions (i.e., related requisitions) are created for a job requisition. See Create Related Job Requisition. See Create Related Requisition (Apply to Multiple Jobs).

Text

Parent Requisition Job Display Title

This field displays the display job title of the parent requisition, as defined in the Display Job Title field for the parent requisition on the General tab of the requisition.

Note: A parent requisition indicates that one or more child requisitions have been created for the parent

Text

373


requisition.

Primary Location Displays "Yes" or "No" to indicate whether or not the location is defined as the primary location in the Primary Location field on the General tab of the requisition.

Note: The purpose of this field in the report is to help you identify which address is the primary address for the requisition and which address is an additional address added in the Additional Location(s) field on the General tab.

Yes/No

Referral Bonus Amount

Displays the amount of the referral bonus, as defined in the Referral Bonus field on the General tab of the requisition.

Numeric




Text




Text

Requisition Application Workflow Template

This field indicates the type of application workflow template that was used for the requisition. The possible values are "Select," "(Custom)," or the specific name of a workflow that was selected.

Text

374


The value for this field is pulled from the Select Template field on the Application Workflow tab of the requisition.

o The "Select" value indicates that the workflow was not changed from the workflow that was chosen for the requisition template.

o The "(Custom)" value indicates that a custom workflow was created on the Application Workflow tab when configuring the requisition.

o If a specific workflow title appears, this indicates that a specific pre-designed workflow was selected.

Requisition Approval - Date

Displays the requisition approval date. The value for this field is pulled from the Decision Date column on the Past tab of the Requisition Approvals > Requisitions page.

Date

Requisition Approval - Decision

Displays the requisition approval decision. The value for this field is pulled from the Decision column on the Past tab of the Requisition Approvals > Requisitions page.

Text

Requisition Approver - ID

Displays the user ID for the Requisition Approver, set during requisition creation when an approval workflow is defined under the Approvals section on the General tab of the requisition.

Text

Requisition Approver - Name

Displays the name of the requisition approver. The value is pulled from the Approvals section on the job requisition. The name can also be found in the Name column on the Requisition Approval Status pop-up.

Text

Requisition City Displays the value in the City field from the Facility Location pop-up when configuring either the primary address or an additional address for the requisition.

The Facility Location pop-up is accessed by clicking

Text

375


the Edit icon in the Primary Location field or the Additional Location(s) field on the General tab of the requisition.

Requisition Compensation Type

Displays the compensation type selected in the Compensation field on the General tab of the requisition.

Text

Requisition Contact Phone

Displays the phone number from the Contact Phone field on the General tab of the requisition.

Text

Requisition Cost Center ID

This field displays the ID of the Cost Center Organizational Unit (OU) that is configured for the requisition. The value for this field is pulled from the ID field on the OU configuration page in Manage Organizational Unit Hierarchy.

Text

Requisition Cost Center

Displays the Cost Center of the requisition, as defined in the Cost Center field on the General Tab when configuring the requisition.

Text

Requisition Country Displays the value in the Country field from the Facility Location pop-up when configuring either the primary address or an additional address for the requisition.


Text

Requisition Creation Date

This field shows the date the recruiter created the requisition. The value is stored in the system in Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), but when viewing the value in the report, the value displays in the user's local time.

Related fields:

o Requisition Date Opened: This is the date the requisition went into the Open status. This field

Date

376


could differ from the creation date if there was an approval required. For example, the requisition could have been created on 21 July but not approved until 24 July. In this case the date opened would be 24 July.

o Requisition Approval - Date: The requisition approval date may match the requisition date opened, but it could also differ if there are multiple sequential approvers and they are approving on different dates.

o Requisition Date Posted: A requisition may not be set to post until a few days after it is created. Therefore, if a requisition is created on 21 July, the recruiter may not set it to post until 27 July.

Requisition Creator - ID

Displays the user ID of the user who created the requisition. The value is pulled from the User ID field on the user record.

Text

Requisition Creator - Name

Displays the name of the user who created the requisition. The value displays as Last Name, First Name. The value is pulled from the Name field on the user record (Note: When viewing the User Record page in edit mode, the value for this field is pulled from the First Name and Last Name fields.).

Text

Requisition Currency Range - High

Displays the value in the second Range field on the General tab of the requisition.

Text

Requisition Currency Range - Low

Displays the value in the first Range field on the General tab of the requisition.

Text

Requisition Currency Type

Displays the value in the Currency field on the General tab of the requisition.

Text

Requisition Date Closed

This field displays the date and time at which the requisition was closed. The value for this field is the date that the Requisition Status field on the General

Date

377


tab of the requisition was changed to Closed.

Requisition Date Filled

This field displays the date and time of the hired applicant's start date. The value for this field can be viewed in the status column on the Manage Applicants page. The value can also be viewed in the Change Status pop-up on the Applicant Profile > Summary tab.

Date

Requisition Date Opened

This field displays the date and time at which the requisition was opened. The value for this field can be viewed on the Requisition Status Change history event date on the Requisition History pop-up.

Date

Requisition Date Posted

This field displays the date and time at which the requisition was posted. The value for this field is pulled from the Effective Date column for the posting on the Postings page.

Date

Requisition Days Open

This field displays the number of days that the requisition has been in an Open status. The value for this field is pulled from the Days Open column on the Manage Requisition page.

Numeric

Requisition Description - External

This field displays the value from External tab in the Description field on the General tab of the requisition.

Text

Requisition Description - Internal

This field displays the value from internal tab in the Description field on the General tab of the requisition.

Text

Requisition Display Job Title

This field displays the display job title of the requisition, as defined in the Display Job Title field for the parent requisition on the General tab of the requisition.

Text

378


Requisition Division ID


Text






Text

Requisition EEO Category

This field displays the value from the EEO Category field on the General tab of the requisition.

Text

Requisition Employment Type

This field displays the value from the Employment Text

379


Type field on the General tab of the requisition.

Requisition Full/Part Time

This field indicates which option was selected to the right of the Employment Type field on the General tab of the requisition. The value in the report output is either "Full Time" or "Part Time."

Text

Requisition Grade ID This field displays the ID of the Division Organizational Unit (OU) that is configured for the requisition. The value for this field is pulled from the ID field on the OU configuration page in Manage Organizational Unit Hierarchy.

Text

Requisition Grade This field displays the Grade Organizational Unit (OU) for the requisition, as defined in the Grade field on the General tab of the requisition.

Text

Requisition Hold Date

This field displays the date on which the requisition was put into an On Hold status. Requisitions are put on hold by changing the status to "On Hold" in the Requisition Status field on the General tab of the requisition.

Date






Text

380


Requisition Keywords Displays the keywords for the requisition, as defined in the Keywords field on the General Tab when configuring the requisition.

Text

Requisition Location ID


Text

Requisition Location This field displays the Grade Organizational Unit (OU) for the requisition, as defined in the Grade field on the General tab of the requisition.

Displays each location for a job requisition that has multiple locations. The values are pulled from the Primary Location field and the Additional Location(s) field on the General tab of the job requisition.

Each location displays on a separate row and includes the following columns:

o Requisition Address 1o Requisition Address 2o Requisition Cityo Requisition State/Province

Text

381


o Requisition Postal Codeo Requisition Countryo Primary Location - This column indicates whether

or not the location is the primary location for the requisition. The field displays "Yes" if the location is the primary location. The field displays "No" if the location is not the primary location. The value for this field is determined by the location defined in the Primary Location field on the requisition.

Requisition Number of Candidates

Displays total number of candidates that were advanced from a New Submission status for a specific requisition. This count excludes candidates who are in a Hired or Closed status. The value is calculated as the total number of candidates that are advanced on the applicant carousel in Manage Candidates.

Numeric

Requisition Number of Days on Hold

This field displays the total number of days that the requisition was in an On Hold status. Requisitions are put on hold by changing the status to "On Hold" in the Requisition Status field on the General tab of the requisition.

Numeric

Requisition Number of Openings (original)

This field displays the total number of openings for the requisition, as shown in the Openings field on the General tab of the job requisition.

Numeric

Requisition Number of Openings (outstanding)

This field displays the total number of openings for the requisition that have not been filled. The value is calculated by subtracting the number of applicants in a Hired status from the number of openings in the Openings field on the General tab of the job requisition.

Numeric

Requisition Number of Postings

This field displays the total number of postings for the requisition in all time, both active and inactive.

Numeric

382


Requisition Number of Submissions

This field displays the total number of applicants that were self-submitted, added manually by a recruiter and submitted from an agency to a requisition. This count represents all submissions to a specific requisition and includes Hired and Closed applicants. The value for this field can be viewed on the Requisition Snapshot.

Numeric

Requisition Number of Suggested Referrals

Displays the total number of suggested referrals to a requisition. A suggested referral is not yet an applicant. The value for this field is pulled from the Suggested column on the Manage Requisition page.

Numeric

Requisition On-going This field indicates whether or not the hiring for the requisition is defined as on-going. The value displays as "Yes" or "No" in the report. This is determined by whether or not the On going field is checked to the right of the Openings field on the General tab of the job requisition.

Yes/No

Requisition Owner - Email

Displays the email address of the user who is selected as the owner for the requisition. The value is pulled from the Email Address field on the user record.

Text

Requisition Owner - ID


Displays the user ID for the Requisition Owner(s) defined during requisition creation under the Hiring Team section on the General Tab of the requisition.

Text

Requisition Owner - Name

Displays the name of the requisition owner. Each requisition owner displays on a separate row. The value is pulled from the Owner(s) field on the General tab of the job requisition.

Text

383



Requisition Position ID


Text

Requisition Position This field displays the name of the Position Organizational Unit (OU) that was selected for the requisition. The value for this field is pulled from the Job Title field on the General tab of the job requisition.

Text

Requisition Postal Code

Displays the value in the Postal Code field from the Facility Location pop-up when configuring either the primary address or an additional address for the requisition.


Text

Requisition Posting - Career Center

This field indicates whether or not the requisition has any postings to the Career Center. The value displays as "Yes" or "No" in the report.


Text

Requisition Posting - Job Board - Clicks

This field displays the number of clicks that a job posting received on a specific job board. The value for this field is pulled from the Clicks column in the Job Board section of the Postings page.

Text

Requisition Posting - This field displays the languages in which a job Text

384


Job Board - Language

requisition was posted to a specific job board. The value for this field is pulled from the Language column in the Job Board section of the Postings page.

Requisition Posting - Job Board - Name

This field displays the name of the job board to which the requisition was posted. The value for this field is pulled from the Name column in the Job Board section of the Postings page.

Text

Requisition Posting - Job Board - Show Salary

This field indicates whether or not the salary has been configured to display in the job board posting. The value displays as "Yes" or "No" in the report.


Text

Requisition - Posting Type

This field displays the type of job board posting. The following are the possible values:

o Agency - This value refers to recruiting agencies.o Career Centero Career Siteo Job Boardo Smart Referral

For requisitions with multiple posting types, a separate row appears for each posting type.


Text

Requisition Primary Owner - Email

Displays the email address of the user who is selected as the primary owner for the requisition. The value is pulled from the Email Address field on the user record.

Text

Requisition Primary Owner - ID

This field displays the user ID for the user who is selected as the primary owner for the requisition. The value for this field is pulled from the User ID field on

Text

385


the user record.

For reference, the primary owner is defined in the Primary Owner field in the Hiring Team section on the General tab of the requisition.

Requisition Primary Owner - Name

Displays the name of the user who is selected as the primary owner for the requisition. The value is pulled from the Primary Owner field in the Hiring Team section on the General tab of the requisition.

Text

Requisition Priority This field displays the hiring priority for the requisition. The value is pulled from the Priority field on the General tab of the requisition.

Text

Requisition Reviewer - ID

Displays the user ID for the Requisition Reviewers defined during requisition creation in the Applicant Reviewer(s) section on the General Tab of the requisition.

Text

Requisition Reviewer - Name

Displays the name of the applicant reviewer. Each reviewer displays on a separate row. The value is pulled from the Applicant Reviewer(s) field on the General tab of the job requisition.


Numeric

Requisition State/Province

Displays the value in the State/Province field from the Facility Location pop-up when configuring either the primary address or an additional address for the requisition.


Text

Requisition Status This field displays the current status of the requisition. Text

386


The value for this field is pulled from the Status column on the Manage Requisition page.

Requisition Target Hire Date

This field displays the date on which the position is targeted to be filled. The value for this field is pulled from the Target Hire Date field on the General tab of the requisition.

Date

Requisition Template Title

This field displays the date on which the position is targeted to be filled. The value for this field is pulled from the Requisition Template field on the General tab of the requisition, or the Template Title field on the General tab of the requisition template.

Text

Requisition Time to Fill

Time to Fill is the amount of time it took for an applicant to be hired for the job. The value is calculated as follows: Time to Fill = [Fill Date] – [Date Requisition Status Changes to Open] – [Days Requisition Is on Hold]

Once all the openings are filled for a requisition, then the system updates time to fill value.

Numeric

Requisition Type This field displays the requisition type, either Parent or Related. The value for this field is determined by the type of requisition that is created.

Note: Related requisitions are created when the Add Related Requisition option is selected when configuring requisitions.

Date

Scheduled Interview – Interviewer ID

Displays the user ID for the interviewer(s) shown under the interview panel on the Status tab of the Applicant Profile page.

Text

Scheduled Interview - Score

Displays the interview score for applicants. Text

Time to Offer This field displays the number of days from the date on which a requisition is posted to the date on

Numeric

387


which the first offer is extended to a candidate for the requisition. The following calculation is used to determine the value for the field:Time to Offer = [Date First Offer Extended to Candidate] - [Date Requisition Status Changes to Open] - [Days Requisition Is on Hold]

ResumeThis section is only available for the custom Resume Report.


Resume Last Modified By

This field displays the name of the user who last modified a resume.

Text

Resume Last Modified Date

This field displays the date and time at which a resume was last modified.

Date/Time

SuccessorThis section is only available for the custom Job Pool Succession Report.





Text

Successor Succession MetricsThis section is only available for the custom Succession Report.


388





Text

Talent PoolThis section is only available for the custom Talent Pool Report. Note the following report considerations:




Talent Pool Commenter

This displays the name of the user who added the comment for the candidate. Comments can be added and viewed from the Talent Pool page. See Talent Pool - View.

Text

Talent Pool Comments

This displays the comments that have been added for the candidate within the talent pool. Comments can be added and viewed from the Talent Pool page. See Talent Pool - View.

Text

Talent Pool Date Created

This displays the date and time at which the talent pool was created. This value is set when the talent pool is created, and it can be viewed from the Manage Talent Pools page. See Talent Pool - Manage.

Date/Time

389


Talent Pool Name This displays the name of the talent pool in which the user is identified as a potential successor. This value is set when the talent pool is created, and it can be viewed from the Manage Talent Pools page. See Talent Pool - Manage.

Text

Talent Pool Owner This displays the name of the user who created the talent pool. This value is set when the talent pool is created, and it can be viewed from the Manage Talent Pools page. See Talent Pool - Manage.

Text

Talent Pool User Status

This displays the status of the user in relation to the talent pool, such as Nominated or New Candidate. This value is set and can be viewed from the Talent Pool page. See Talent Pool - View.

Text

Talent Pool Modification HistoryThis section is only available for the custom Talent Pool Report. Note the following report considerations:




Talent Pool Action Date

This displays the date and time at which the user was modified within the talent pool. The talent pool modification history can be viewed from the Talent Pool page. See Talent Pool - View.

Date/Time

Talent Pool Action This displays the action that was taken on the user within the talent pool. The talent pool modification history can be viewed from the Talent Pool page. See Talent Pool - View.

Text

Talent Pool Changed By

This displays the name of the user who modified the Talent Pool Changed User within the talent pool. The talent pool modification history can be viewed from

Text

390


the Talent Pool page. See Talent Pool - View.

Talent Pool Changed User

This displays the name of the user who was modified within the talent pool. The talent pool modification history can be viewed from the Talent Pool page. See Talent Pool - View.

Text

TargetsThis section is only available for the custom Goals Report.


Target Achievement Percentage

This field displays the percentage of progress completed on the target. This field that is only available in Reporting 2.0.

Numeric

Target Stretch This field displays the stretch value for the goal target. This value is displayed using the decimal precision that is configured for the portal. These values can be viewed when managing the goal.

Numeric

Target Threshold This field displays the threshold value for the goal target. This value is displayed using the decimal precision that is configured for the portal. These values can be viewed when managing the goal.

Numeric

Task ReviewThis section is only available for the custom Succession and Job Pool Succession Report.


Task Review Modified

This displays the date and time at which the task review was modified.

Date/Time

Task Review Name This displays the email address of the user who is the approver.This displays the name of the task review step that is set within the SMP task (e.g., Succession Planning Review 2016). This value is set when the task review steps are added to the succession task on the Task Review step.

Text

391


Task Review Order This displays the order of the task review step. This value is set based on the order in which the task review steps are added to the succession task on the Task Review step.

Numeric

Task Review Status This displays the current status of the task review (e.g., Not Started, In Progress, Completed, Expired). This value can be viewed by viewing the Task Details page for the succession task and selecting the appropriate task review step.

Text

Task Review FieldsThis section is only available for the custom Succession Report.


Date Modified This displays the date and time at which the SMP rating was modified.

Date/Time

Fields Changed From This displays the original values of the SMP ratings that were modified by a task reviewer within the task review.

Text

Fields Changed To This displays the new values of the SMP ratings that were modified by a task reviewer within the task review.

Text

Fields Changed This displays the SMP ratings that were modified by a task reviewer within the task review.

Text

Task Review Fields - IncumbentThis section is only available for the custom Job Pool Succession Report.


Fields Changed - Incumbent

This displays the SMP ratings that were modified by a task reviewer within the task review.

Text

Fields Changed From - Incumbent

This displays the original values of the SMP ratings that were modified by a task reviewer within the task review.

Text

392


Fields Changed To - Incumbent

This displays the new values of the SMP ratings that were modified by a task reviewer within the task review.

Text

Task Review Fields - SuccessorThis section is only available for the custom Job Pool Succession Report.


Fields Changed - Successors

This displays the SMP ratings that were modified by a task reviewer within the task review.

Text

Fields Changed From - Successors

This displays the original values of the SMP ratings that were modified by a task reviewer within the task review.

Text

Fields Changed To - Successors

This displays the new values of the SMP ratings that were modified by a task reviewer within the task review.

Text

Task ReviewerThis section is only available for the custom Succession and Job Pool Succession Report.


Task Reviewer Full Name

This displays the email address of the user who is the approver. This value is set based on the Task Reviewer when the task review steps are added to the succession task on the Task Review step, and the name value is pulled from the User Record page.

Text

Task Reviewer User ID

This displays the user ID of the task reviewer. This value is set based on the Task Reviewer when the task review steps are added to the succession task on the Task Review step, and the user ID value is pulled from the User Record page.

Text

TopicThis section is only available for the custom Connect Report.


393


Topic User Action Group

This field displays the Action Group of the topic member. If the topic has more than one member, then each action group is listed on a separate row. If the topic member is in more than one action group, then each action group is listed on a separate row. The character limit for this field is 200. This value is pulled from the Topic settings.

Text

Topic User Division This field displays the Division OU of the topic member. If the topic has more than one member, then each unique Division OU is listed on a separate row. The character limit for this field is 200. This value is pulled from the user's Organization Structure section of the user's User Record.

Text

Topic User Email This field displays the email address of the topic member. If the topic has more than one member, then each unique email address is listed on a separate row. The character limit for this field is 200. This value is pulled from the Contact section of the user's User Record.

Text

Topic User Location This field displays the Location OU of the topic member. If the topic has more than one member, then each unique Location OU is listed on a separate row. The character limit for this field is 200. This value is pulled from the Organization Structure section of the user's User Record.

Text

Topic User Name This field displays the first and last name of the topic member. If the topic has more than one member, then each member's name is listed on a separate row. The character limit for this field is 200. This value is pulled from the General Information section of the user's User Record.

Text

Topic User Position This field displays the Position OU of the topic member. If the topic has more than one member, then each unique Position OU is listed on a separate row. The character limit for this field is 200. This value is pulled from the Organization Structure section of the user's User Record.

Text

Training

394


This section is only available for the custom Training Report, Training Plan Report, Transaction Report, and Transcript Report.


Ability to Select Session Admins and Managers

This field indicates whether or not the event has been configured to allow administrators and managers to select sessions for end users. The value is pulled from the Ability to Select Sessions field when configuring the Properties tab for the event.

Yes/No

Ability to Select Sessions End Users

This field indicates whether or not the event has been configured to allow end users to select sessions. The value is pulled from the Ability to Select Sessions field when configuring the Properties tab for the event.

Yes/No

Auto-Management of Waitlist

This field indicates whether or not the waitlist will be auto-managed. The value is pulled from the Allow Auto-Management of Waitlist field when configuring the Properties tab for the event or the Details tab for the session.

Yes/No

Auto-Registration of Waitlist

This field indicates whether or not users on the waitlist will be auto-registered upon granting the user a session seat. The value is pulled from the Auto-Register User upon Granting of Waitlist field when configuring the Properties tab for the event or the Details tab for the session.

Yes/No

Cost Currency This field displays the currency that is defined for the learning object (LO). The value for this field is pulled from the applicable currency field for the LO. For example, the session currency is pulled from the Price field on the Details tab when configuring the session.

Text

Course Code This field displays the unique identifier for the learning object (LO). This value is automatically

Text

395


generated for LOs when they are created if the Course Code functionality is enabled via Course Code Preferences. This value can be modified by administrators on the General tab of the Course Catalog.

Course Publication Created By

This field displays the name of the user who created the publication. The value displays as [Last Name], [First Name]. The value is pulled from the Created By column on the Course Publisher page.

Text

Course Publication Creation Date

This field displays the date on which the course was published. The value is pulled from the Date Created column on the Course Publisher page.

Date

Course Publication Published?

This field indicates whether or not the publication is published. The possible values are "Published" and "Pending Published." The value is pulled from the Status column on the Course Publisher page.

Yes/No

Course Publication Title

This field the title of the publication. The value is pulled from the Title field on the Publication Information page, which is the page on which administrators create online courses.

Text

Course Rating Reviewer Is Anonymous

This field indicates whether or not the review is anonymous. When the user rates the course anonymously, the report output displays "True." When the user does not rate the course anonymously, the report output displays "False."

The value is pulled from the Make my review anonymous checkbox on the training review pop-up. Users can check the box so that their name does not appear when they submit their training review.

Yes/No

Course Rating Reviewer

This field displays the name of the user who reviewed the course. The value displays as [Last Name], [First Name]. The value is pulled from the user record of

Text

396


the user who submitted the review.

If the user checked the Rate Anonymously box when reviewing, then the field will be blank on the report output.

Created By (Name) This field displays the name of the user who created the training. The value displays as [Last Name], [First Name]. The value is pulled from the user record of the user who created the training.


Text

Created By (User ID) This field displays the user ID of the user who created the training. The value is pulled from the User ID field on the user record of the user who created the training.


Text

Curriculum Section Title (Training)

This field displays the name of the curriculum section. The value is pulled from the Title field on the Add Section pop-up when configuring the Structure tab for curricula.

Text

Curriculum Title (Training)

If the training item on which you are reporting is included in a curriculum, then this field displays the name of that curriculum. The value is pulled from the Title field on the General tab for curricula.

Note: It is recommended to use this field in combination with the Training Title field.

Text

Curriculum Version (Training)

If the training item on which you are reporting is included in a curriculum, then this field displays the version of that curriculum.

Note: It is recommended to use this field in combination with the Training Title and Curriculum Title (Training) fields.

Text

397


Electronic Signature Message

This field displays the message configured with the electronic signature at the Course Catalog. The value is pulled from the Signature Message field on the General tab of the Course Catalog.

Text

Electronic Signature Required

This field indicates whether or not an electronic signature is required for a learning object (LO). The report displays "Yes" if an electronic signature is required and "No" if an electronic signature is not required. The value is pulled from the Required Electronic Signature field on the General tab of the Course Catalog.

Yes/No

Email Configuration This field displays the option that was selected when deciding the type of emails for the training. The following are the possible values:

o System Defaultso Custom Emailso No Emails

This field applies to all learning object (LO) types for which emails can be configured.

Text

Equivalent Training Object ID

This field displays the ID of the equivalent training that is associated with the learning objects (LO) on which you are reporting.

Text

Equivalent Training Title

This field displays the learning objects (LO) that are defined as equivalent training. The LOs display in one line on the report output, with each LO title separated by a comma. The value for this field is pulled from the Training Equivalence field on the General tab of the Course Catalog.

Text

Equivalent Training Version

This field displays the version of the equivalent training that is associated with the learning objects (LO) on which you are reporting.

Text

Equivalent Subjects This field displays the subjects that are associated Text

398


with the learning object (LO). The value for this field is pulled from the Subjects tab in the Course Catalog for the LO. Each subject displays on the same line in the report output, separated by a comma.

Event Number This field displays the value from the Event Number field on the Properties tab when configuring events.

Text

Inside Curriculum This field indicates whether or not the learning object (LO) is part of a curriculum. The value in the report output is either Yes or No. LOs are added to curricula from the Structure tab when configuring curricula.

Yes/No

Interest Tracking Allowed

This field displays the value from the Allow interest tracking field on the Properties tab when configuring events. The value in the report output is either Yes or No.

Yes/No

Keyword This field displays the value from the Keywords field for learning objects (LO) that include keywords. Each keyword displays on the same line, separated by a comma. Keywords can be added from the General tab in the Course Catalog. They can also be added for individual LOs.

Text

Language Equivalent Training Object ID

This field displays the ID of the language equivalent training that is associated with the learning objects (LO) on which you are reporting.

Text

Language Equivalent Training Title

This field displays the language equivalent learning object (LO) for the training. The value is pulled from the Language Equivalents field on the General tab in the Course Catalog.

Text

Language Equivalent Training Version

This field displays the version of the language equivalent training that is associated with the learning objects (LO) on which you are reporting.

Text

399


Language This field displays the languages defined for the learning object (LO). The value is pulled from the Available Languages field on the General tab in the Course Catalog. Each language displays on the same line in the report output, separated by a comma.

Text

Last Modified By (User ID)

This field displays the user ID of the user who last modified the learning object (LO). The value is pulled from the user record of the user who modified the training.

Text

Last Modified By This field displays the name of the user who last modified the learning object (LO). The value for this field is pulled from the modification history for the LO. The name displays as [Last Name], [First Name].

Text

Last Modified Date This field displays the date and time on which the training was last modified. The value for this field is pulled from the modification history for the learning object (LO).

Date

Latest Version This field displays the version number for the learning object (LO). The version number is automatically created by the system when the changes to an LO are saved.

Text

Material Type Active This field indicates whether or not the material is active. The value is pulled from the Active column on the Material Administration page. The value in the report output is either Yes or No.

Yes/No

Material Type Name This field displays the material type. The value is pulled from the Material Type field when configuring materials.


Text

400


Material URL This field displays the material URL. The value is pulled from the Material Source field when "URL" is selected as the option when configuring materials.


Text

MAX SCORE This field displays the maximum score that a user can receive for the learning object (LO). The value is defined for an individual LO. This field applies to multiple LO types.

Numeric

Maximum Number of Test Entries

This field displays the maximum number of times a user can take the test to attempt a passing score before they are locked out of the test and are unable to take it again. The value for this field is pulled from the Attempts Allowed field on the General page when creating the test. This value only applies to tests.

Numeric

Minimum Part Attendance

This field displays the minimum number of parts a user must attend in order for the session to be marked completed in their transcript. The value is pulled from the Attendance field on the Details tab when configuring sessions.

Numeric

Multiple Session Enrollment Allowed

This field indicates whether the event is configured to allow users to attend multiple sessions for the event. The value for this field is pulled from the Allow Users to Attend Multiple Sessions option on the Properties page when creating the event.

Yes/No

Number of Attempts Allowed Tests

This field displays the maximum number of times that a user can take the test. The value is pulled from the Attempts Allowed field on the General step when configuring tests.

Numeric

Objectives This field displays the objectives for the event. The value is pulled from the Objectives field when configuring the Properties tab for the event.

Text

401


On The Job Training This field displays whether the training requires On The Job completion observation. This field is only relevant for Material type training. The value is pulled from the Requires On The Job Training Completion Observer(s) field on the General step when configuring materials.

Yes/No

OU Training Availability Include Subordinates

This field indicates whether or not subordinate organizational units (OU) were included in the availability for the learning object (LO). The value for this field is pulled from the Include Subordinates column on the Availability page when configuring training in the Course Catalog.



Yes/No

OU Training Availability Pre-Approved

This field indicates whether or not users within the organizational unit (OU) are pre-approved for the training. The value for this field is pulled from the Include Pre-Approved column on the Availability page when configuring training in the Course Catalog.



Yes/No

402


OU Training Availability Register Upon Approval

This field indicates whether or not users within the organizational unit (OU) are automatically registered for the training when they are approved for the training. The value for this field is pulled from the Register Upon Approval column on the Availability page when configuring training in the Course Catalog.



Yes/No

OU Training Availability Type

This field displays the training availability type for the organizational unit (OU). The following are the possible values that will appear in the report:





Text

403


OU Training Availability

This field displays the organizational unit (OU) availability criteria that is configured for the training. The value is pulled from the Criteria column on the Availability page in the Course Catalog whenan OU is selected in the Select Criteria drop-down.


Text

OU Training Request Form

This field displays the name of the training request form that was selected for the learning object (LO) for the organizational unit (OU). The value for this field is pulled from the Training Request Form column on the Availability page when configuring training in the Course Catalog.


Text

Owners This field displays the name of the curriculum owner. The name displays as [Last Name], [First Name]. If there are multiple owners, the names appear on the same line in the report and are separated by a semi-colon. The value for this field is pulled from the Owners field on the General tab when configuring curricula.

Text

Parent Equivalent Subjects

This field displays the name of the parent subject of the equivalent subject that is defined for the training. This field only displays the immediate parent of the subject. Multiple parent subjects display in individual rows, and this field supports localization. Equivalent subjects are defined when configuring a subject.

Text

404


Parent Subjects This field displays the name of the parent of the subject that is defined for the training. Multiple parent subjects display in the same line in the report output, separated by a comma. This field applies to multiple learning object (LO) types.

Text

Parent Training Subject This field displays the parent subject of the Training Subject (the subject that is associated with the training). This field will only display the immediate parent of the subject. It will not display as a hierarchy. This report field now also separates subjects into individual rows and supports localization.

Text

Post-Work Training Object IDs

This field displays the Learning Object ID for any learning objects (LOs) that are set as post-work for the associated LO. The value for this field is pulled from the Post-Work field on the General page of the Course Catalog.

Text

Post-Work Training Titles

This field displays the names of the post-work training that is configured for the learning object (LO). This field applies to multiple LO types.

Text

Prerequisite Training Object ID

This field displays the Learning Object ID of the prerequisite training.

Note: The object ID for a learning object (LO) is a unique, system-generated value that is created for all LOs.

Text

Prerequisite Training Title

This field displays the title of prerequisite training that is configured for the learning object (LO). Each prerequisite training title appears on a separate row in the report output.

The value for this field is pulled from the Name column in the Prerequisites table for the prerequisite within the LO type. For example, when configuring an LO in the Course Catalog (all but Library and Program LO types), the prerequisite title appears in the Name column in the Prerequisites table on the Prerequisites tab.

Text

405


Pre-Work Training Object IDs

This field displays the Learning Object ID for any learning objects (LOs) that are set as pre-work for the associated LO. The value for this field is pulled from the Pre-Work field on the General page of the Course Catalog.

Text

Pre-Work Training Titles

This field displays the names of the pre-work training that is configured for the learning object (LO). This field applies to multiple LO types.

Text

Provider City This field displays the city of the training provider. The value is pulled from the City field on the Vendor Details page when configuring vendors.


Text




Text




Text

Provider Mailstop This field displays the mailstop for the provider or vendor.

Text

406


Provider State This field displays the state for the training provider. The value is pulled from the State, Postal Code field on the Vendor Details page when configuring vendors.


Text

Provider Zip This field displays the ZIP Code for the training provider. The value is pulled from the State, Postal Code field on the Vendor Details page when configuring vendors.


Text

Secondary Training Provider

This field displays the name of the secondary vendor for the event. The value is pulled from the Secondary Vendor field on the Properties tab when configuring events.

Note: This field is only available for portals with the ability to configure multiple providers for a session. For more information about this feature, see the Session Options Overview topic in Online Help.

Text

Session Cost Type This field displays the cost type for the individual cost that has been added to the session, such as materials, travel, catering, or room rental. The value for this field is pulled from the cost type that is selected when a Cost Per Session is added on the Details page when creating the session.

Numeric

Session Cost This field displays the cost amount for the individual cost that has been added to the session. The value for this field is pulled from the cost amount that is entered when a Cost Per Session is added on the Details page when creating the session.

Numeric

407


Standalone on Transcript

Allows administrators to report on whether training on a learner’s transcript is a standalone training. When a training item exists as a standalone item on a learner’s transcript, this field displays a value of True. When a training item exists as a child item within a curriculum, this field displays a value of False.

Yes/No

Session Instructor Name

This field displays the name of the instructor for the session part. If the session has multiple parts, this field only displays the instructor for the first part. If there are multiple instructors for the first part, this field only displays one of the primary instructors. The value is pulled from the Instructors field when defining the session part.

Text

Subject Active This field indicates whether the subject is currently set as Active in the portal.

Text

Test Graders (ID) This field displays the user ID of the test grader for the test. If there are multiple test graders, the user IDs display on the same line and are separated by a comma. The value is pulled from the user record of the test grader.

Text

Time Limit Minutes (Tests)

This field displays the number of minutes that is the maximum amount of time a user has to take the test. The value is defined on the Structure tab when configured tests.

Numeric

Total Number of Requesting Users

This field displays the number of users who have requested the training. This field applies to multiple learning object (LO) types.

Numeric

Total Seats Available This field displays the total number of seats that are currently available for the session (i.e., seats that have not yet been registered for). The value is pulled from the Seats Available field on the Roster page.

Numeric

408


Total Seats Taken This field displays the number of seats for which users are registered. The value is calculated by subtracting the total number of registrations from the total number of seats allowed for the session.

Numeric

Total Seats For events, this field displays the maximum number of seats that are available for the event, which includes the total number of seats available for the all sessions. The value for this field is calculated by adding

For sessions, this field displays the total number of seats for the individual session. The value for this field is pulled from the Maximum Registration field on the tab when configuring sessions.

Numeric

Total Session Cost This field displays the total of all costs that have been added to the session. The value for this field is pulled from the Total Cost per Session field that is displayed on the Details page when creating the session.

Numeric

Training Active This field indicates whether or not the learning object (LO) is active or inactive. The report displays "Y" for active and "N" for inactive. The value is pulled from the Active field for the LO.

Numeric

Training Advanced Reg. Deadline

This field displays the date and time the advanced registration period will end for the event or session. For events, the value is pulled from the Advance Registration lasts for X days after session is created field on the Session Defaults tab. For sessions, the value is pulled from the X is the number of days Advanced Registration lasts after the session is created field on the Details tab.

Numeric

Training Competencies

This field displays all competencies associated with the learning object (LO), via the course catalog. The localized values for the competencies are displayed. All competencies are listed in the same cell in the report, separated by a comma. The value is pulled from the list of competencies that are defined for the

Text

409


LO.

Training Contact (User ID)

This field displays the user ID of the person who ILT training participants can contact for more information about the training. The value is pulled from the user record of the user who is the training contact.


Text

Training Contact This field displays the name of the person who ILT training participants can contact for more information about the training. The value displays as [Last Name], [First Name]. The value is pulled from the Training Contact field for the learning object. This field applies to both sessions and events.

There may be a different training contact for the event than for the session, and vice versa. If your report includes both Event and Session training types, the contact for the event will display on a separate row from the contact for the session. If there are multiple sessions for an event, there may be a different contact for each session. The contact for each session will appear on a separate row in the report.


Text

Training Created Date

This field displays the date and time the learning object was created. Time will display in the time zone of the user who created the training.

Date

Training Credits This field displays the number of credits a user will receive once they complete the training. The value is pulled from the Credits field on the General tab in the Course Catalog.

Numeric

Training Deactivation Date

This field displays the date on which the training will be deactivated. The value for this field is pulled from the Deactivate this course on X date on the General tab when configuring training in the Course

Date

410


Catalog.

Training Description This field displays the description provided for the learning object. The value is pulled from the Description field for the learning object.

Text


The value for the Training End Date field is pulled from the End field in the DATE AND TIME section on the Parts Schedule tab for the session.

Date

Training Eval 1 This field displays the evaluation ID of the Level one evaluation associated with the learning object. The value for this field is pulled from the evaluations that are defined for the learning object (LO) on the Evaluations tab within Course Catalog.

Numeric

Training Eval 2 This field displays the evaluation ID of the Level two evaluation associated with the learning object. The value for this field is pulled from the evaluations that are defined for the learning object (LO) on the Evaluations tab within Course Catalog.

Numeric

Training Eval 3 This field displays the evaluation ID of the Level three evaluation associated with the learning object. The value for this field is pulled from the evaluations that are defined for the learning object (LO) on the Evaluations tab within Course Catalog.

Numeric

Training File Size (MB)

This field displays the file size for online courses published in the portal.

Numeric

Training Hours This field displays the total number of hours dedicated to training delivery. This field only applies to Event, Material, Test, and Video learning objects

Numeric

411


(LO).

For ILT sessions, training hours are calculated by subtracting the total break duration from the training duration of all scheduled parts.

For other LO types, the training hours are defined by the administrator in the Training Hours field on the General tab of the Course Catalog. The purpose of entering a value is to display the expected hours it will take users to complete the training.



Text

Training Locator Number

This field displays the unique, sequential number that is assigned to a session by the system when the session is created. The value is pulled from the Locator Number field on the Details tab for the session.

Numeric

Training Max Registration

This field displays the maximum number of users who can register for the session. The value is pulled from the Details tab when configuring the session.

Numeric

Training Min Registration

This field displays the minimum number of users who can register for the session. The value is pulled from the Details tab when configuring the session.

Numeric

Training Object ID This field displays the unique, system generated learning object ID that is created for all learning objects. This object ID is used to identify learning objects for historical data loads of transcript information.

Numeric

Training Price This field displays the price charged to register for a learning object (LO). This field contains numeric

Numeric

412


values only and does not include the currency associated with the price. The value is pulled from the Pricing tab in the Course Catalog when configuring the LO.

Training Provider This field displays the name of the training provider/vendor associated with a learning object (LO). The value is pulled from the provider/vendor field on the associated LO.

Text

Training Provider Active This field indicates the status of the provider associated with the training. Possible values include:

o Activeo Inactive

Text

Training Purpose This field displays the purpose for the training, as defined by the administrator in the Training Purpose field on the General tab of the Course Catalog.

Training purposes are created by the administrator in ADMIN > TOOLS > LEARNING > CATALOG MANAGEMENT > TRAINING PURPOSE.

Note: The Training Purpose field in the Transcript section of custom reports is an end user field. The value in the report is the training purpose selected by the user when they requested the training.

Text

Training Reference Number

This field displays the unique reference number for the event or session that has been uploaded via the Data Load Wizard.

Text

Training Reg Deadline

This field displays the time and date when users may no longer register for a session. Time is displayed in the user's time zone using a 24-hour clock. The value is pulled from the Registration Deadline field on the Details tab when configuring the session.

Numeric

Training Roster This field displays the full name of the user who Text

413


Commented By (Name)

added the comments to the roster.

Training Roster Commented By (User ID)

This field displays the user ID of the user who added the comments to the roster.

Text

Training Roster Commented Date

This field displays the date on which the user added the comments to the roster.

Date/Time

Training Roster Comments

This field displays the comments entered in the Comments section of the Roster page. Each comment displays on a separate line of the report.

Text

Training Session Admin

This field is only populated for Event and Session training types. This field displays the full name of the Training Contact for the event or session.

For events, this field displays the Training Contact who is identified on the Properties tab of the Event Creation page.

For sessions, this field displays the Training Contact who is identified on the Details tab of the Session Creation page.

Text

Training Skills This field displays the resume skills associated with a learning object (LO). The value is pulled from the Skills tab when configuring the LO in the Course Catalog. All skills appear on the report in the same cell separated by a comma.

Skills are created by the administrator in ADMIN > TOOLS > SUCCESSION MANAGEMENT > RESUME. See Define Attributes.

Numeric

Training Start Date This field displays the date and time the part begins. The value displays in the time zone of the user running the report. If you would also like to view the time zone associated with the part, include the Part Time Zone field in your report.

The value for the Training Start Date field is pulled from the Start Date field in the DATE AND TIME

Date

414


section on the Parts Schedule tab for the session.

Training Status This field displays the status of the learning object (i.e., Approved, Expired, Tentative, Completed). This field does not display user transcript status for the learning object. For that, be sure to include the Transcript Status field in your report.

For a list of training statuses and descriptions, see the Transcripts Troubleshooting Guide topic in Online Help.

Text

Training Subjects This field displays the name of the subjects that are configured for the learning object. This field separates subjects into individual rows and supports localization. The value is pulled from the Subjects tab in the Course Catalog.

Text

Training Title This field displays the title of the learning object (LO). The value is pulled from the Title field for the LO.

Text

Training Type This field displays the type of learning object (LO), such as Online Course, Event, Program, Cohort, Test. The value for this field is determined by the type of LO that was created by the administrator or uploaded via the data load wizard.

Text

Training Version Comments

This field displays the comments that were entered by the administrator when the version was created. The value for this field is pulled from the Comments field that is available when creating a new version of a learning object (LO). The location of the field varies by LO.

Text

Training Version Effective Date

This field displays the date on which the version is effective. The location and name of the field in the system will vary based on the learning object type. For example, the value for this field for certifications is pulled from the Effective Date field on the Confirm page when configuring a new version of a

Date

415


certification.

Training Version End Date

This field displays the End Date of a version of a material. This date is identified on the Version Details section of the General page when creating or versioning a material.

Date/Time

Training Version Start Date

This field displays the Start Date of a version of a material. This date is identified on the Version Details section of the General page when creating or versioning a material.

Date/Time

Training Version This field displays the version number, if the learning object (LO) has multiple versions. The value for this field is usually pulled from the Version column on the Administration/Management page for the associated LO, such as the Certification Administration page and the Curricula Administration page.

Text

Transaction No Show Charge

This field displays the No Show charge that is configured for an event or session.

For events, this field displays the No Show charge that is configured on the Session Defaults tab of the Event Creation page.

For sessions, this field displays the No Show charge that is configured on the Details tab of the Session Creation page.

Note: The currency associated with this charge can be included in a custom report using the Cost Currency field.

Text

Transaction Withdrawal Charge

This field displays the Withdrawal penalty that is configured for an event or session.

For events, this field displays the Withdrawal penalty that is configured on the Session Defaults tab of the Event Creation page.

For sessions, this field displays the Withdrawal penalty that is configured on the Details tab of the Session Creation page.

Text

416


Note: The currency associated with this charge can be included in a custom report using the Cost Currency field.

User Course Review Desc

This field displays the user's review of the training. The value is pulled from the Write your review for this training here field on the training review pop-up.

Text

User Course Review Title

This field displays the title that the user entered for their review of the training. The value is pulled from the Enter review title here field on the training review pop-up.

Text

User's Course Rating Date

This field indicates the date the user submitted a course rating.

Date

User Training Availability Include Subordinates

This field indicates whether or not subordinates of the user are included in the availability for the learning object (LO). The value for this field is pulled from the Include Subordinates option on the Availability page when configuring training in the Course Catalog.



Text

User Training Availability Pre-Approved

This field indicates whether or not the user on the Availability tab is pre-approved for the training. The value for this field is pulled from the Include Pre-Approved column on the Availability page in the Course Catalog.

The report output displays "Yes" if box is checked in

Yes/No

417


the Pre-Approved column. The report displays "No" if the box is not checked.


User Training Availability Register Upon Approval

This field indicates whether or not the user on the Availability tab is automatically registered for the training when they are approved for the training. The value for this field is pulled from the Register Upon Approval column on the Availability page when configuring training in the Course Catalog.



Yes/No

User Training Availability Type

This field displays the training availability type for the user availability criteria that is configured for the training. The following are the possible values that will appear in the report:



The value is defined in the Availability Type column on the Availability tab in the Course Catalog. The column displays a drop-down, from which the administrator selects an option to define the

Text

418


availability type.


User Training Availability

This field displays the user availability criteria that is configured for the training. The value is pulled from the users in the Criteria column on the Availability page in the Course Catalog when "Users" is selected in the Select Criteria drop-down.


Text

User Training Request Form

This field displays the name of the training request form that was selected for the user availability criteria for an individual user. The value for this field is pulled from the Training Request Form column on the Availability page in the Course Catalog.


Text

User Course Rating This field displays the rating submitted by the user for the training. The value is pulled from the star rating that is given by the user on the training review pop-up. The report displays a number based on the number of stars the user selected as the rating.

Numeric

Waitlists Allowed This field indicates whether or not the event or session allows waitlists. The report displays "True" if

Yes/No

419


waitlists are allowed and displays "False" waitlists are not allowed. For events, the value is pulled from the Allow waitlist for sessions in this event field on the Session Defaults tab. For sessions, the value is pulled from the Allow waitlist for sessions in this event field on the Details tab when configuring the session.

Training Request FormsThis section is only available for the custom Transcript Report.


Form Description This field displays the description provided for the training request form associated with a learning object on the user's transcript. The value is pulled from the Description field when configuring training request forms.

Text

Form Instruction This field displays the text that appears at the top of the training request form as instructions. The value is pulled from the Instructions field when configuring training request forms.

Text

Form Owners This field displays the names of the users who own the training request form that is associated with a learning object on the user's transcript. Owners have access to the form and can modify all user forms. The value is pulled from the Form Owners field when configuring training request forms.

Text

Form Submission Status

This field displays the status of the training request form associated with a learning object on the user's transcript. The standard statuses are Not Started, Submitted, Modified, Completed, and Cancelled. However, the statuses may appear differently in your portal, since they can be renamed on the Manage Form Status Names page.

The value for the Form Submission Status field is pulled from the Status field on the transcript page.

Text

420


Form Title This field displays the text that appears at the top of the training request form as instructions. The value is pulled from the Title field when configuring training request forms.

Text

TranscriptThis section is only available for the custom Test Report, Transaction Report, and Transcript Report.


# Parts User Attended

This field displays the number of session parts the user attended. The value is pulled from the Attendance column on the Session Roster page for the session in Manage Events and Sessions.

Numeric

Archived from Transcript?

This field indicates whether or not the learning object (LO) has been moved to the user's archived transcript. The report displays "Yes" if the LO has been archived and displays "No" if the LO is not archived.

Yes/No

Assign Comments This field displays comments or instructions entered by the assignor, if the training was assigned. If no comments were entered at the time of the assignment, "Initial Request" appears in this field on the report output.

Comments are entered by the assignor in the Add a Comment field on the Assign Training page.

Yes/No

Assigned by (ID) This field displays the user ID of the user who assigned the training. The value is pulled from the user record of the user who assigned the training.

Text

Assigned by (name) This field displays the name of the user who assigned the training. The value displays as [Last Name], [First Name]. The value is pulled from the user record of the user who assigned the training.

Text

421


Assigned This field indicates whether or not the learning object (LO) was assigned to the user (rather than the user requesting the LO). The report displays "Yes" if the LO was assigned and displays "No" if the LO was not assigned.

Yes/No

Available Date This field displays the date on which the training becomes available on the user's Transcript. This field is tied to the Training Start Date that is defined at the Learning Assignment level.

Date

Cancellation Reason Comments

This field displays the comments entered when canceling the session. The value is pulled from the Additional Comment field on the Session Details page.


Text

Cancellation Reason This field displays the reason selected for canceling the session. The value is pulled from the Please select a reason drop-down on the Session Details page.


Note: Deleted cancellation reasons will persist in reporting in order to allow reporting on cancellation reasons used in the past.

Text

Course Progress % This field only applies to Online Class and Quick Course learning object types. The field displays the user's progress towards completion of the course.

Numeric

Curriculum Completion Percentage

This field enables reporting on the completion percentage of curricula. The completion percentage for each user is calculated once the user completes the first training item in the curriculum. The value is pulled from the Curriculum Progress field in the

Numeric

422


Curricula Player.Use Case1. Ella wants to report on the progress of students

who are taking a particular curriculum so that her customer’s account managers can be prepared for conversations with their clients.

2. Ella creates a new custom Transcript report and adds the Curriculum Percentage Completion field to the report builder.

3. When Ella views the report output, she can see how much of a curriculum a student has completed based on the students who are registered for a curriculum and have opened the curriculum in the Curricula Player. She also sorts the column by percentage to see which students are at the highest and lowest completion percentage.

Note: Upon implementation of this field for the October '15 release, for existing curricula, users will need to re-access the Curricula Player for a particular curriculum in order for completion percentage to calculate. For new curricula created after this enhancement, completion percentage will be calculated when the user accesses the curriculum in the Curricula Player.

Curriculum Section Title (Transcript)

If the learning object (LO) on which you are reporting is included in a curriculum on the user's transcript, this field displays the name of the curriculum section in which the training is included.

Note: It is recommended to use this field in combination with the Training Title field from the Training section and the Curriculum Title (Transcript) field from the Transcript section.

Text

Curriculum Title (Transcript)

If the learning object (LO) on which you are reporting is included in a curriculum on the user's transcript, this field displays the name of the curriculum in which the training is included. If the field is blank, this indicates that the LO is not included in a curriculum

Text

423


on the user's transcript.

Note: It is recommended to use this field in combination with the Training Title field from the Training section.

Note: If you include the Curriculum Title (Transcript) field and the Curriculum Title (Training) field in the same report, these fields may contain different information as the LO can be included in several curricula in the catalog.

Curriculum Version (Transcript)

If the learning object (LO) on which you are reporting is included in a curriculum on the user's transcript, this field displays the version of the curriculum in which the training is included.

Note: It is recommended to use this field in combination with the Training Title field from the Training section and the Curriculum Title (Transcript) field from the Transcript section.

Numeric

Exempted By(ID) This field displays the user ID of the person who approved or denied the exemption request for a learning object on the user's transcript. The value is pulled from the user record of the user who exempted the training.

Text

Exempted By(Name) This field displays the name of the person who approved or denied the exemption request for a learning object on the user's transcript. The value displays as [Last Name], [First Name]. The value is pulled from the user record of the user who approved or denied the exemption request.

Text

Exemption Comments (Exemptor)

This field displays the comments entered by the person who approved or denied the exemption request. The value is pulled from the Comments field on the Exempt Response pop-up.

Text

Exemption Comments (User)

This field displays the comments entered by the user when requesting exemption from the training. The

Text

424


value is pulled from the Comments field on the Exemption Request pop-up when exempting training from the Training Details page.

Exemption Date This field displays the date and time an exemption request was approved or denied. Time is displayed in UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) using either a 12 or 24 hour clock, based on the user's culture setting. The value is pulled from the Date column on the Completed tab of the Exemption Requests page.

Text

Exemption Reasons (Exemptor)

This field displays the reason selected by the exemptor when they approved or denied the exemption request for a learning object on a user's transcript. The value is pulled from the Indicate Reason field on the Exempt Response pop-up.

Text

Exemption Reasons (User)

This field displays the reason selected by the user when they requested an exemption for a learning object on their transcript. The value is pulled from the Indicate Reason field on the Exemption Request pop-up.

Text

From Training Plan? This field indicates if the learning object (LO) was added to the user's transcript as the result of a training plan assignment.

Yes/No

Greatest Registration Number

This field indicates whether the specific instance of the training is the greatest registration number on the user's transcript.

For example, if version 1 and 2 of a learning object (LO) are assigned to a user once, then this field is True for each instance of the training (version and 1 and 2). However, if the same version is assigned to a user twice via recurrence, only the second assignment is indicated as the greatest registration number.

True/False

Last Transcript Status Change Date

This field displays the date and time of the most Date

425


recent change to the user's transcript status in regards to a learning object. Time is displayed in the user's time zone using a 12 or 24 hour clock, based on the user's culture setting. The value is pulled from the Approval History section on the Training Details page of the transcript.

Latest Registration Number?

This field indicates whether the specific instance of the training is the latest registration number on the user's transcript.

For example, if version 1 and 2 of a learning object (LO) are assigned to a user once, then this field is True for version 2. If the same version is assigned to a user twice via recurrence, only the second assignment is indicated as the latest registration number.

Yes/No

Part Name This field displays the part name for sessions. If the training is not a session, then this field is empty.

Text

Passed This field relates to On the Job Training (OJT), and it displays whether the observer has marked a completion for the learner and they passed the OJT observation. This field only considers Pass and Fail statuses. If the transcript status is Incomplete, this field returns an empty value, as the Incomplete status is not included in either the Pass or Fail statuses.

Yes/No

Past Due Aging This field displays the number of days a learning object is past due for completion by a user, if a due date was assigned. The value is calculated by subtracting the current date from the due date.

Numeric

Registration Number This field displays the number of times a learning object has been requested or assigned and moved to a Registered status on the user's transcript. The value is calculated by adding each new instance of the training on the user's transcript once it is in a Registered status.

Numeric

426


Removal Comments This field displays the comments provided by the person who removed a learning object from a user's transcript, if comments were provided and the training was removed. The value is pulled from the comments box on the remove training page.

Text

Removal Reason This field displays the reason provided by the person who removed a learning object from a user's transcript, if comments were provided and the training was removed. The value is pulled from the comments box on the remove training page.

Text

Removed from Transcript?

This field indicates if a learning object was removed from a user's transcript. The report displays a value of "1" if the training was removed and displays a value of "0" if the training has not been removed.

Yes/No

Required This field indicates whether or not a learning object has been identified as required training for the user. The report displays "Yes" if the learning object is required and displays "No" if the learning object is not required. The value for this field is pulled from the Availability Type setting on the Availability tab within the Course Catalog.

Yes/No

Session Withdrawal Date

This field displays the date on which the user withdrew from the session. The value is pulled from the Approval History section on the Training Details page of the transcript.

Date

Standalone on Transcript

Allows administrators to report on whether training on a learner’s transcript is a standalone training. When a training item exists as a standalone item on a learner’s transcript, this field displays a value of True. When a training item exists as a child item within a curriculum, this field displays a value of False.

Yes/No

Suggested This field indicates whether or not a learning object has been identified as suggested training for the user. The report displays "Yes" if the learning object is suggested and displays "No" if the learning object is

Yes/No

427


not suggested. The value for this field is pulled from the Availability Type setting on the Availability tab within the Course Catalog.

Training Badge Point Value

This field displays the point value for the Learning badge that was automatically awarded to the user for completing the training. The badge appears on the Training Completion page in the user’s transcript.


The value for the Training Badge Point Value field is pulled from the Points field on the Add Badge pop-up in Badge & Points Preferences.

Numeric

Training Badge Title This field displays the title of the Learning badge that was automatically awarded to the user for completing the training. The badge appears on the Training Completion page in the user’s transcript.

Learning badges are configured by the administrator in Badge & Points Preferences and are added to individual learning objects on the General tab of the Course Catalog.

The value for the Training Badge Title field is pulled from the Title field on the Add Badge pop-up in Badge & Points Preferences.

Text

Training Link Expiration Date

This field displays the date on which the user will no longer have access to the learning object (LO) after they register for the LO. The value is pulled from the Default Link Expiration field on the Pricing tab for the LO in the Course Catalog.

Date

Training Point Value This field displays the point value that was awarded to the user for completing the training. The point value is the number of points that were configured for the badge at the time that the user completed the training.

The point value for a Learning badge is configured by

Text

428


the administrator in Badge & Points Preferences. Learning badges are added to individual learning objects on the General tab of the Course Catalog.

The value for the Training Point Value field is pulled from the Training Completion page, which is accessed from the user's Completed transcript page in Universal Profile.

Training Purpose Category

This field displays the training purpose category selected by the user who approved the learning object. The value is pulled from the Select Category drop-down in the Purpose column on the View Pending Requests page.

Training purpose categories are created by the administrator in ADMIN > TOOLS > LEARNING > CATALOG MANAGEMENT > TRAINING PURPOSE.

Text

Training Purpose This field displays the training purpose selected by the user when they requested the learning object. The value is pulled from the Request pop-up when the user clicks REQUEST to request the training.

The Training Purpose custom reports field only applies if Training Purpose functionality is activated for the portal.

Text

Transcript Assigned Date

This field displays the date and time the learning object was added to the user's transcript. Time is displayed in the user's time zone using a 12 or 24 hour clock, based on the user's culture setting. The value is pulled from the Approval History tab on the Training Details page in the transcript.

Date

Transcript Completed Date

This field displays the date and time the learning object was marked complete. Time is displayed in the user's time zone using a 24 hour clock. The value is pulled from the Approval History tab on the Training Details page in the transcript.

Date

Transcript Due Date This field displays the date by which the user must Date

429


complete the learning object, if a due date was assigned. The value is pulled from the Due field on the transcript.

Transcript Edited By (Name)

This field displays the name of the user who edited the transcript of the user for the specific training.

Text

Transcript Edited By (User ID)

This field displays the User ID of the user who edited the transcript of the user for the specific training.

Text

Transcript Edited Date

This field displays the date on which the user's transcript was edited for the specific training.

Date

Transcript Registration Date

This field displays the time and date the learning object moved to registered status on the user's transcript. Time is displayed in the user's time zone using a 12 or 24 hour clock, based on the user's culture setting. The value is pulled from the Approval History tab on the Training Details page in the transcript.

Date

Transcript Removed Date

This field displays the time and date the learning object removed from the user's transcript. Time is displayed in the user's time zone using a 12 or 24 hour clock, based on the user's culture setting. The value is pulled from the Approval History tab on the Training Details page in the transcript.

Date

Transcript Roster Commented by (Name)

This field displays the full name of the user who added the transcript roster comment.

Text

Transcript Roster Commented by (User ID)

This field displays the user ID of the user who added the transcript roster comment.

Text

Transcript Roster Commented Date

This field displays the date on which the transcript roster comment was added.

Date

Transcript Roster Comments

This field displays the comments that a session administrator added to individual participants from the

Text

430


Session Roster page. See Session Roster - Edit Transcript Details.

Transcript Score This field displays the score the user received on a learning object completion attempt. The value is pulled from the Score field on the Training Details page in the transcript.

For sessions, the score that displays is pulled from the Score column on the Roster tab of the Session Roster page.

Numeric

Transcript Status Group

For ease of reporting, all possible transcript statuses are grouped into the following categories: Completed, In Progress, Not Started, Other.

This field can be used to replace the Transcript Status field in order to facilitate custom charting or ease the understanding of the report output.

Text

Transcript Status This field displays the user's transcript status with regards to a learning object. The value is pulled from the Status field on the transcript page.

Text

Transcript Time in Training (min)

This field displays the number of minutes spent in training. For ILT sessions, Time in Training is the duration of the training minus any breaks. For online courses, time in training displays the number of minutes the user had the course open.

Numeric

User Attended Part? This field reports the attendance to single parts of a session. This attendance is recorded when managing the roster of the session. It is recommended to use this field in combination with the Part Name field.

Yes/No

Waitlist Priority Rank This field displays the user's priority order on the waitlist. The value is pulled from the Order column on the Waitlist page for the session in Manage Events and Sessions.

Numeric

431


Withdrawal Reason Comments

This field displays the comments the user entered when withdrawing from the session. The value is pulled from the Comments field on the Session Details page, which is accessed by clicking Withdraw from the options drop-down for the session on the transcript page.

Text

Withdrawal Reason This field displays the reason the user selected for withdrawing from the session. The value is pulled from the Please select a reason drop-down on the Session Details page, which is accessed by clicking Withdraw from the options drop-down for the session on the transcript page.

Text

UserThis section is available in custom Certification, Compensation, Competency, Compliance, Development Plan, Evaluations, Forms, Goals, Multi-Module, Observation Checklist, Onboarding, Performance, Performance Review, Recruiting, Resume, Succession, Talent Pool, Test, Training Form Task, Training Form, Training Plan, Transaction, Transcript, and User Report.

Note: Some fields are not available in some report types.



Text




Yes/No

432



Text

Cost Center Approver ID

This field displays the user ID of the cost center approver. The value for this field is pulled from the User ID field on the user record.

Text



Text

Cost Center Approver

This field displays the name of the user's cost center approver. The value displays as [Last Name], [First Name]. The value is pulled from the Approver field on the Define OU page when configuring OUs.

Text


Text


Text


Text


Text

433




Text


Text


Text


Text


Text


Text

Division Ref This field displays the ID of the user's assigned Division Organizational Unit (OU). The value is pulled

Text

434


from the ID field on the Define OU page when configuring OUs.



Text

Freeze Group Processing

This field displays whether group processing is frozen for the group. If the user belongs to more than one group, each value appears on a separate row. The value is pulled from the Freeze Group Processing field for the group.

Yes/No


Text


Text


Text


Text


Text

435


Group Active This field indicates whether the group is active. If the user belongs to more than one group, each value appears on a separate row. The value is pulled from the Active field for the group.

Yes/No

Group Description This field displays the description of the group in which the user is a member. If the user belongs to more than one group, each value appears on a separate row. The value is pulled from the Description field for the group.

Because the Group Description value could potentially be large, this field cannot be used as a report filter.

Text

Group ID This field displays the ID of the group in which the user is a member. If the user belongs to more than one group, each value appears on a separate row. The value is pulled from the ID field for the group.

Text

Group Owner Ref This field displays the reference value for the owner of the group in which the user is a member. If the user belongs to more than one group, each value appears on a separate row. The value is pulled from the User ID for the group owner.

Text

Group Owner This field displays the owner of the group in which the user is a member. If the user belongs to more than one group, each value appears on a separate row. The value is pulled from the Owner field for the group.

Text

Group Parent Ref This field displays the reference value for the parent group of the group in which the user is a member. If the user belongs to more than one group, each value appears on a separate row. The value is pulled from the ID field for the parent group.

Text

Group Parent This field displays the name of the parent group of the group in which the user is a member. If the user belongs to more than one group, each value appears on a separate row. The value is pulled from the

Text

436


Name field for the parent group.

Group This field displays the name of the group in which the user is a member. If the user belongs to more than one group, each value appears on a separate row. The value is pulled from the Name field for the group.

Text


Text


Text


Text


Text


Text


Text

437



Numeric

Personal Email Address

The report displays the user's personal email address, as found in the Personal Email Address field on the user record.

Text


Text


Text


Text


Text


Text



Text

438



Text


Text


Text


Yes/No


Text


Text


Text


Text

User Creation Date This field displays the date on which the user was created in the system. The value can be found on the

Date

439


Modification User Record page.


Text


Text


Text


Text


Text

User ID This field displays the user's user ID, which is the unique identifier for the user. The value is pulled from the User ID field on the user record.

Text



Text


This field displays the first name of the user's indirect manager. The value is pulled from the First Name field on the user record of the user's indirect

Text

440


manager.



Text



Text



Text


Date


Date

User Last Name This field displays the user's last name. The value is pulled from the Last Name field on the user record.

Text


Text

User Manager ID This field displays the user ID of the user's manager. The value is pulled from the User ID field on the user

Text

441


record of the user's manager.


Text


Text


Text


Text

User Name suffix This field displays the user's name suffix. Examples of name prefixes include II, III, Jr., Sr. The value is pulled from the Suffix field on the user record.

Text


Date


Text


Text

442






User Status InformationThis section is only available for the custom User Report.


Rehired Employee The report displays a Yes/No value indicating whether an employee was previously employed at the organization but has been rehired. The value for this report field is pulled from the Rehired Employee field on the user record.

Yes/No

User Succession MetricsThis section is only available for the custom Succession Report.




o Helicopter Viewo Tasko Snapshot

Text

443


o Metric Grid Report

444


Create/Manage Custom Report FoldersCustom Reports Deprecation: Cornerstone will be deprecating the legacy reporting solution "Custom Reports" with the February ’21 Release. For more information, see the announcement in the August '20 release notes and in the August '20 Release Summary & Matrix.

To access custom reports, go to Reports > Custom Reports.

Create a Custom Report FolderTo create a custom report folder, from the New drop-down, select the New Folder option. A new folder is added to the bottom of the Folders panel and you can enter a name for the folder. The character limit for a folder name is 200.

To create a custom report folder within another custom report folder (i.e., a sub-folder), right-click the folder in which the new report folder will be located and select New Folder. A new sub-folder is added within the corresponding report folder and you can enter a name for the folder.

445




Rename a Custom Report FolderTo rename a custom report folder, right-click the appropriate folder and select Rename. The folder name becomes editable and you can enter a new name for the folder. The character limit for a folder name is 200. Note: The default folder (i.e., the All Folders folder) cannot be renamed.

Delete a Custom Report FolderTo delete a custom report folder, right-click the appropriate folder and select Delete. A confirmation message appears. Click YES to delete the folder. If there are custom reports within a folder that is deleted, those custom reports are moved to the All Folders folder.

Share a Custom Report FolderYou can share an entire custom report folder so that all the reports in the folder are shared with your selected organizational units (OU), groups, or users. To share a folder, right-click on the folder, and then click Share Reports. This opens the Share Reports pop-up, from which you can select the OUs, groups, or users with whom to share the report.

See the Share Custom Reports Within a Folder topic in Online Help for detailed information about sharing a report folder.

446


Share Custom Reports within a FolderCustom Reports Deprecation: Cornerstone will be deprecating the legacy reporting solution "Custom Reports" with the February ’21 Release. For more information, see the announcement in the August '20 release notes and in the August '20 Release Summary & Matrix.

The View Reports page within Custom Reports allows users to share multiple custom reports within a report folder. The reports can only be shared by users who have permission to share reports inside a folder.

When the reports within a folder are shared, all of the custom reports that the user created that are currently in the report folder are shared. The reports within the folder are only shared once; any reports that are added to the folder after it is shared are not automatically shared. Any changes that are made to the folder after it is shared are not automatically shared.

If the report folder that is shared contains additional folders, then those subfolders are shared as well.

The reports that are shared appear in the parent All Folders folder. However, if the user already had access to the shared report, then there is no change for that report and it continues to exist in the folder in which it was located prior to being shared.

Use CaseJane Simms has a folder named 2001 Reports that contains the following reports:

o 2001 Catalog Listo 2001 Reviews

Jane clicks the Share option for the 2001 Reports folder and shares the folder with Curtis. The shared reports now appear at the root level for Curtis, and Curtis may move them to another folder if necessary.

If Curtis already has access to the report, then there is no change.

Permissions

PERMISSION NAME


Reports Inside a Folder - Share

Grants only users with this permission the ability to share all custom reports within a report folder in a single action. This permission can be constrained by User, OU, or User's OU. Note: You must also have permission to create the corresponding report type to share the report.

Reports - Analytics

To share the reports within a report folder, right click on the appropriate folder and select Share. This opens the Share Reports pop-up.

447




From the Share Reports drop-down, select the organizational unit (OU) type with which you are sharing the report folder and then select the appropriate OU. Multiple OUs and OU types can be selected.

You can also share the report folder with selected users or an existing group of users.

After selecting the appropriate OUs, groups, and users, click SHARE.

Editing/Copying Shared ReportsThe reports that are shared cannot be edited by the users with whom the report is shared.

The users can copy the shared report, and then make changes to the copied report and save it.

448


Deleting Shared ReportsReports that are shared can only be deleted by the user who created the report.

Users who receive a shared report cannot delete the report from their custom reports page. The report can only be deleted by contacting the user who shared the report with you and having them un-share the report.

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)Can I delete a report that was shared with me?No, it is not possible to delete a report that was shared with you. The report can only be deleted from your list of shared reports by the user who shared the report with you.

Can I copy a report that was shared with me?Yes. You can create a copy of a shared report by clicking Copy from the Actions drop-down for the report.

What if a user who shared a report with me has left the company? How do I get the report deleted from my list of reports?In order to have the shared report removed, it is necessary for an administrator to proxy in as the inactive user and delete the shared report from the inactive user's custom reports page.

For more information about how to proxy into the system as another user, see the System Administrator > Core Functions > Users > Proxy as Another User topic in Online Help.

How do I un-share a report that I shared with other users or organizational units (OU)?As the report creator, you can remove shared users and OUs from a report by doing the following:

1. Go to REPORTS > CUSTOM REPORTS.2. Click Edit from the actions drop-down for the report you would like to make changes to.3. Click the Sharing tab in the report. This displays the list of users and OUs with whom

you are sharing the report.4. Click the delete icon to the left of each user or OU with whom you would like to un-

share the report.5. Click SAVE.

The users or OUs will no longer have the shared report in their list of reports.

449


Analytics - Summarized Report ViewCustom Reports Deprecation: Cornerstone will be deprecating the legacy reporting solution "Custom Reports" with the February ’21 Release. For more information, see the announcement in the August '20 release notes and in the August '20 Release Summary & Matrix.

The Summarized Report View page displays the report information for a custom report that contains summarized information. This page provides a functional and flexible view of the custom report, allowing you to select and deselect the fields that are displayed, edit the report, and export the report data.

To view the Summarized Report page, first create a custom report that is summarized. Then, once the report is saved and the data has been generated, click the Print icon on the Custom Reports page.

In the report, the user can only view data from OUs that they have permission to view, which is constrained by the View permission for the type of report they are viewing. Also, only values that contain data are displayed. Note: OUs at a higher level than those that contain data are only displayed as needed.

Permissions

PERMISSION NAME


Assign Training Grants ability to assign learning objects to the transcripts of those for whom the user is the assigned manager, approver or cost center approver. This is a manager/approver permission.

Learning

Employee Goals - Create

Allow user to Create Goals for other employees (other than self and subordinates). The constraints on this permission determine with which employees a user can align their goals. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and User. This is an administrator permission.

Performance - Administration

OU Goals - Create Grants ability to create and assign goals to all users within a selected organizational unit or group. This is an administrator permission.

The constraints on this permission overwrite the constraints on the Goals - Create permission. That is, if a user has both permissions, then the constraints on the OU Goals - Create permission are applied.


450




Performance Review Task Administration

Grants ability to create/assign performance review tasks and manage activity within those tasks. This permission also gives the ability to enable and view co-planners for a task from the administration pages. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, and User.


The Report Information panel is expanded by default, but can be collapsed by clicking the arrow in the upper-right corner of the panel. The following information and options are displayed in the Report Information panel:

o Fields Displayed - This area displays each field name included in the report, organized in the order in which they are displayed in the report. The summarized fields are displayed on top, followed by the non-summarized fields. Each field has a checkbox to the left of it. When the checkbox is selected, the field is displayed in the Report Results panel. If the field is deselected, it is removed from the report display.o All summary calculation fields are selected by default.o Fields by which the report is summarized are not listed in the Fields Displayed

section because they cannot be removed.o Filters Applied - This displays the filters that are applied to the report.

451


o Edit Report - Click this button to edit the report. This opens the report creator in Edit mode. Note: This option is only available to users with the Create permission for the type of report they are viewing.o If the report creator edits the report, the report is simply edited.o If a user edits the report that is not the report creator, the report is copied and the

user edits a copy of the report.

The Report Results section displays the report. All of the selected data fields are included in the report. If the report is summarized by OU, the summary data is only displayed at the top level OUs by default. Users can expand the top level to view details of child OUs if applicable. If View Hierarchy is selected, the Full Name column is empty until you expand an OU that contains users.

To expand an OU, click the arrow to the left of the OU name. Only OUs that the user has permission to view are displayed.

If the View Hierarchy option is not selected, then the data is presented differently. The data is first summarized by the "Summarize by" option. Expand the Summarize by category to view the data summarize by the "Then by" option.

452


ActionsThe Actions drop-down contains the following actions:

o Share Report - Select this option to share the report. This opens the Edit Report - Schedule Report page. This option is only available to the report owner.

o Assign Training - Select this option to navigate to the catalog search page, where you can assign training. This option is only available if you have permission to assign training.

o Create Goal - Select this option to navigate to the Create Goal page, where you can create a goal. This option is only available if you have permission to create employee goals or create OU goals.

o Launch Review - Select this option to navigate to the Performance Review Administration page, where you can launch a review. This option is only available if you have permission to manage Performance Review Task Administration.

o Award Compensation - Select this option to navigate to the Compensation Task Administration page or to an off-cycle compensation task if assigned to the user.

Print and ExportPrint and Export options are available from the View Report Details page.

Click the Print icon to export to either CSV (Comma Separated Values) or TXT (Text) file.

o From the "Format of data" drop-down list, select the appropriate file type.o If the View as Hierarchy option was selected when creating the report, a "Choose OUs"

drop-down list is also available. From this drop-down, you can select which OUs within the report you wish to export.

o Level of OUs included - If the Choose OUs option is enabled, you can then choose the levels of the OU to include.

453


o Include non-summary data - Select this option to include data that is not summarized in the report.

o Include summaries by (xxx) - Select this option to include data that is summarized by the "Then by" summary option that is set when creating the report. This option is only available if a "Then by" summary option was selected. If the View as Hierarchy option was selected when creating the report, then this option is automatically selected.

o Include grand summaries at bottom - Select this option to include grand summary totals at the bottom of the report. This option is only available if the "Include grand summaries at bottom" option was selected when creating the report.

Click the Export to Excel icon to export the data to an Excel file.

454


Create Calculated FieldCustom Reports Deprecation: Cornerstone will be deprecating the legacy reporting solution "Custom Reports" with the February ’21 Release. For more information, see the announcement in the August '20 release notes and in the August '20 Release Summary & Matrix.

Calculated fields enable organizations to generate aggregated reports based on totals of data. Organizations can create configurable calculated fields to generate calculated data totals. Administrators can filter calculations by data points such as gender, location, etc. using conditional statements. Note: Calculated fields are not available for multi-module reports.

Calculated fields can only be used in summarized reports. A report must be summarized by a field prior to adding a calculated field to the report.

Calculated fields can be created when creating new custom reports and when editing existing custom reports.

Permissions

PERMISSION NAME


Calculated Fields - Modify

Grants ability to view, modify, create, and delete any calculated fields that have been created by themselves or public fields in Analytics. This permission cannot be constrained. This permission works in conjunction with other Custom Report - Create permissions.

Reports - Analytics

Locating the Create Calculated Fields OptionTo create a calculated field, go to REPORTS > ANALYTICS and click the Add New Custom Report link. Then, click the plus icon to the right of the Calculated Fields heading. This opens the Calculated Field Wizard.

455




456


Calculated Field Wizard

Enter the following information for the calculated field:

o Name - Enter a name for the calculated field. The character limit is 500.o Type - Select whether the field is Public or Private.

o If a field is private, the field is only visible and accessible by the user who created the field.

o If a field is public, all users with permission to view calculated fields can view, copy, and utilize the field. Other users can also use any public field when creating another calculated field. However, only the user who created the field can edit the field.

457


FormulaThe formula for a calculated field is built using the available fields and field functions in the Fields panel and the operator buttons in the Operators section.

OperatorsOperators can be used to perform a calculation using the available fields (e.g., ({Training.Training Hours}*{Training.Training Price})).The available operators are Add +, Subtract -, Multiply *, Divide /, and Parentheses (). Click an operator button to add the operator to the current position of the cursor within the Formula field. If the cursor is not currently within the Formula field, the operator is added either to the beginning of the formula or to the previous location of the cursor within the Formula field. Note: When using parentheses, for each open parenthesis (i.e., "("), you must also include a closed parenthesis (i.e., ")").

FieldsThe Fields panel displays a list of all available fields in Analytics, grouped by field type. Click a field type to view the fields within the field type. You can also search for a field using the Search field at the top of the Fields panel.

Fields can be added to the Formula field in the following ways:

o Type the field name into the Formula field (e.g., ({Training.Training Hours}*{Training.Training Price})). Each field name should be surrounded by curly brackets.

o Numeric fields appear in the Fields panel with a Numeric Field icon to the left of it and can be added to the Formula field by clicking the field name. This adds the name of the numeric field to the current position of the cursor within the Formula field. If the cursor is not currently within the Formula field, the field is added either to the beginning of the formula or to the previous location of the cursor within the Formula field.

o Non-numeric fields appear in the Fields panel without a Numeric Field icon and can only be used in the Formula field using field functions. See the Field Functions section below for additional information.

458


Field FunctionsFunctions are available for all fields, numeric and non-numeric. Note: Functions may only include a single field, and which field types are allowed is dependent upon the function. Nesting of functions is not allowed.

A "G" at the beginning of the function name indicates that the function always returns group level values, even for individual rows.

To select a field function, hover the cursor over the field in the Fields panel. All available functions are displayed.

For non-numeric fields, only the GCOUNT and GCOUNTUNIQUE fields are available.

FUNCTION FIELD TYPES

ALLOWED

SYNTAX DESCRIPTION

ABS Numeric ABS({numericfield}) This function returns the absolute value for numeric field values.

459



ALLOWED

SYNTAX DESCRIPTION

Example: ABS({Transcript.FinalGrade})

This formula will return the absolute value of a Final Grade custom field.

GAVG Numeric GAVG({numericfield})

This function returns the average of all values for a numeric field. Note: This function aggregates values and returns group values, even for individual rows.

Example: GAVG({Training Price})*5

This formula will return five times the average cost of the training included in the report. Each row in a group will contain the same value.

GSUM Numeric GSUM({numericfield})

This function returns the sum of all values for a numeric field. Note: This function aggregates values and returns group values, even for individual rows.

Example: GSUM({User Salary})

If User Salary is a custom field within a portal, this function returns the sum of salaries of all the users in the report at each of the summary levels.

GMIN Numeric GMIN({numericfield}) This function returns the minimum of all values for a numeric field. Note: This function aggregates values and returns group values,

460



ALLOWED

SYNTAX DESCRIPTION

even for individual rows.

Example: GMIN({User Salary})

If User Salary is a custom field within a portal, this function returns the lowest user salary out of all users that match the field criteria and report criteria.

GMAX Numeric GMAX({numericfield})

This function returns the maximum of all values for a numeric field. Note: This function aggregates values and returns group values, even for individual rows.

Example: GMAX({User Salary})

If User Salary is a custom field within a portal, this function returns the maximum user salary out of all users that match the field criteria and report criteria.

GSTDEV Numeric GSTDEV({numericfield})

This function returns the standard deviation of all values for a numeric field. Note: This function aggregates values and returns group values, even for individual rows.

Example: GSTDEV({User Salary})

If User Salary is a custom field within a portal, this function returns the standard deviation of salaries out of all users that match the field criteria and report criteria.

461



ALLOWED

SYNTAX DESCRIPTION

GCOUNTALL All GCOUNTALL({field}) This function returns the number of non-blank values for a field. Note: This function aggregates values and returns group values, even for individual rows.

Example: GCOUNTALL({Training ID})

This returns the total number of training IDs that match the field criteria and report criteria.

GCOUNTUNIQUE All GCOUNTUNIQUE({field})

This function returns the number of unique, non-blank values for a field. Note: This function aggregates values and returns group values, even for individual rows.

Example: GCOUNTUNIQUE(({Training Status})

This provides the number of unique transcript statuses found within the report.

ConditionsThe Conditions section enables you to filter the data that is included when calculating the field value. For example, using conditions, you can filter the data by OU, date range, field values, or custom field values. Note: If an item in a report does not match the calculated field condition, the item is excluded from the formula calculation. However, the item is still included in the report and a value is not displayed for the calculated field. See the Use Cases section below for additional information on how calculated field conditions affect the report output.

Set the following options for each condition:

o AND/OR - From the drop-down list, select whether the condition uses AND or OR logic. If the condition uses AND logic (intersecting logic), then the data record is included only if both conditions are met. If the condition uses OR logic (combining logic), then the data record is included only if either condition is met.

462


o All AND/OR conditions are with regards to the initial condition. Because of this, the first condition does not have an AND/OR option.

o Field Name - From the drop-down list, select the field that is used in the condition.o Operator - Select the appropriate operator for the condition (e.g., is equal to, is not

equal to, is before, is on or after).o Value - Either enter or select the appropriate value for the condition.

The following are example conditions:

o Training Purpose is equal to HTT.o User Last Hire Date is on or before 10/01/2012.

To delete a condition, click the Trash Can icon to the right of the condition.

Field value if condition is not metIn this field, select the value that is used if the conditions for the calculated field are not met. The following options are available:

o Zero (0) - If this option is selected, then the calculated field returns a value of zero if the conditions are not met.

o Null/Ignore - If this option is selected, then the calculated field returns no value if the conditions are not met.

Field value for calculation errorsIn this field, enter the default value that is used for the calculated field if there is an error when calculating the field value. That is, if there is an error when calculating the field value in the report, this default value is used.

The default value is a simple static text value, and is displayed in reports exactly as entered. No formulas can be entered in this field.

Create, Save, or CancelAfter setting the formula and conditions for a calculated field, click SAVE in the upper-right corner of the pop-up. The system validates the calculated field formula. When a calculated

463


field is created, it then appears in the Calculated Fields section for the corresponding report type. Calculated fields are also available for selection in the Fields panel of the Calculated Field Wizard.

To discard any unsaved changes to the calculated field, click CANCEL in the upper-right corner or close the pop-up by clicking the X in the upper-right corner.

Use CasesIn the following use cases, the following data is used:

Calculated Field Formula = GAVG(UserSalary).

FULL NAME DIVISION SALARY

Curtis Simms Product Management 10000

Kumar Verma Product Management 20000

Jane Smith Product Management 40000

Use Case 1No Calculated Field Conditions

DIVISION FULL NAME SALARY AVERAGE OF SALARIES

Product Management 23333.33

Curtis Simms 10000 23333.33

Kumar Verma 20000 23333.33

Jane Smith 40000 23333.33

In this scenario, the Average of Salaries column displays the average of all three users ((10000+20000+40000)/3=23333.33) because no conditions or filters are set. The same value is displayed in all rows because it is a group level function (GAVG).

Use Case 2Calculated Field Condition: (UserSalary >= 20000)


Product Management 30000

Curtis Simms 10000

Kumar Verma 20000 30000

Jane Smith 40000 30000

In this scenario, the Average of Salaries column displays the average of only the users that meet the calculated field condition ((20000+40000)/2=30000). Because the calculated field condition excludes salaries that are less 20000, Curtis Simms is excluded from the formula

464


and has no value in the Average of Salaries column. However, Curtis Simms is still included in the report because no report filters are set.

Use Case 3Calculated Field Condition: (UserSalary >= 20000); Report Filter: (UserSalary >= 20000)


Product Management 30000

Kumar Verma 20000 30000

Jane Simms 40000 30000

In this scenario, the Average of Salaries column displays the average of only the users that meet the calculated field condition ((20000+40000)/2=30000). Because the report filter excludes salaries that are less 20000, Curtis Simms is excluded from the report and does not affect the Average of Salaries calculation.

465


Users Direct Subordinate ConstraintCustom Reports Deprecation: Cornerstone will be deprecating the legacy reporting solution "Custom Reports" with the February ’21 Release. For more information, see the announcement in the August '20 release notes and in the August '20 Release Summary & Matrix.

The User's Direct Subordinate constraint is available on the Create and View permissions for custom report types that have fields that may contain sensitive information.

The constraint is available for the following custom report types:

o Certification Reporto Compensation Reporto Competency Reporto Connect Communities Reporto Development Plan Reporto Evaluations Reporto Goals Reporto Job Pool Succession Reporto Multi-Module Reporto Observation Checklist Reporto Performance Reporto Performance Review Reporto Recruiting Reporto Resume Reporto Succession Reporto Test Reporto Training Form Management Reporto Training Forms - Curricula Reporto Training Plan Reporto Transcript Reporto User Report

Add Constraint to Create PermissionAdding the constraint to the Create permission will constrain who the user can share the report with on the Sharing tab and for whom the user can filter the data on the User/OU Filters tab.

Add Constraint to View PermissionAdding the constraint to the View permission will constrain the data when a user exports the report and when a user views the chart as a published widget in dashboards. If the user

466




also has the Create permission constrained, then the report preview pane in the Custom Report Builder will be constrained.

Sharing TabWith this enhancement, if the User’s Direct Subordinate constraint is applied to the report permission, then the Sharing tab will display a message that indicates that the availability criteria that is selected will only include employees who are a direct subordinate of the user creating the report.

User/OU Filters TabWith this enhancement, if the User’s Direct Subordinate constraint is applied to the report permission, then the User/OU Filters tab will display a message that indicates that the availability criteria that is selected will only include employees who are a direct subordinate of the user creating the report.

Impact to Security RolesIf a security role, such as the Manager default role, has a general constraint, then that constraint will override the User's Direct Subordinate constraint.

For example, a portal has configured the Manager security role with permissions for custom reports. They have applied the general constraint of Indirect Subordinates to the permissions. If they would like to have the User's Direct Subordinate constraint applied, then they would need to do the following:

1. Remove the custom reports permissions from the Manager role.2. Grant access to the reports in a different role.3. Add the User's Direct Subordinate constraint to the permissions in the different role.

Use Case1. Harry the Human Resources Director, needs to manage the completed goals of his

direct reports. He prefers using the publish custom charts to dashboards feature, as it enables him to keep track of things at a glance.

2. Cassie, the Chief Executive Officer, also prefers using the publish custom charts to dashboards feature and feels that dashboards ensure a consistent experience for all directors.

3. Cassie asks Anna the Analyst to build a dashboard and send it to all users in the Position organizational unit (OU) of Director.A. The User’s Direct Subordinate constraint is not currently applied to custom reporting

permissions.B. The closest existing constraint is User’s Self and Subordinates.C. With this constraint, Harry can see all of the goals of his subordinates in the

dashboards, rather than only the goals of his direct reports.4. Anna applies the User’s Direct Subordinate constraint to the Custom Goal Report - View

permission for the directors.

467


5. Anna informs all of the directors that they will now see only data for their direct reports when they refresh their dashboards.

6. Harry will see only his six direct reports in the Goals widget that Anna created and shared with him.

SecurityThe following Reports - Analytics permissions can apply the User's Direct Subordinate constraint:

PERMISSION NAME




Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics

Custom Compensation Report - Create

Grants ability to create and edit custom Compensation reports. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, User, User's Subordinates, and User's Direct Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics


Grants ability to view results of custom Competency reports created by self or shared by others. This

Reports - Analytics

468


permission can be constrained by User Self and Subordinates, OU, User’s OU, User's Direct Subordinates, and User.



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics

469




Reports - Analytics

Custom Job Pool Succession Report - Create

Grants ability to create and edit custom Job Pool Succession reports. This permission can be constrained by Position and User's Direct Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Job Pool Succession Report - View

Grants ability to view results of custom Job Pool Succession reports created by self or shared by others. This permission can be constrained by Position and User's Direct Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics

Custom Observation Checklist Report - Create

Grants ability to create and edit Observation Checklist Reports in Analytics. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User, User's Self, User's Manager, User's Subordinates, User's Direct Reports, User's Superiors, User's Direct Subordinates, and User Self and Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Observation Checklist Report - View

Grants ability to view Observation Checklist Reports in Analytics. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User, User's Self, User's Manager, User's Subordinates, User's Direct Reports, User's Superiors, User's Direct Subordinates, and User Self and Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

470




Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics

Custom Resume Report - Create

Grants ability to create and edit custom Resume reports. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User, User's Direct Subordinates, and User Self and Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

Custom Resume Report - View

Grants ability to view results of custom Resume reports created by self or shared by others. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User, User's Direct Subordinates, and User Self and Subordinates.

Reports - Analytics

471




Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics

Custom Training Plan Grants ability to create and edit training plan (Training Reports -

472


Report - Create Demand Forecast) custom reports. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User, User's Direct Subordinates, and User Self and Subordinates.

Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics



Reports - Analytics

473


Delivery

474


Create Custom Report - Delivery TabCustom Reports Deprecation: Cornerstone will be deprecating the legacy reporting solution "Custom Reports" with the February ’21 Release. For more information, see the announcement in the August '20 release notes and in the August '20 Release Summary & Matrix.

The report delivery options display on the Delivery tab in the Custom Report Builder. The Report Delivery options are only available if the report is set to run on a recurring basis.

Important Preferences Note: The appropriate FTP or email delivery option must be enabled in Report Delivery Preferences in order for the report delivery functionality to work in custom reports. Report Delivery Preferences are configured by Division Organizational Unit (OU). If the options are not enabled for your OU, then they will not work in custom reports.



Report NameThe naming convention for reports delivered to the FTP folder is the following:


o Report Titleo UserID - This is the UserID of the user who created the report.o UTC Date/Time - This is the UTC date and time at which the report was created in


475




Email MeCheck the Email me box to deliver a copy of the custom report to your stored email address. The email is hardcoded and cannot be modified.

Only the creator of the report will receive an email; users with whom the report is shared will not receive an email. If this option is selected, you have the option to send the report in Comma Separated or Tab Delimited format. This option is only available if you have permission to schedule delivery of a report to an email address. The maximum file size for this report is 3 MB. The report is always sent as a .zip file.

Note: The stored email address is the address on your user record.

See Also:o See Create Custom Report - Sharing Tab on page 70 for additional information.o See Create Custom Report - Schedule Tab on page 478 for additional information.o See Troubleshooting Guide - Custom Report Delivery By Email.

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)Why aren't I getting the report email?1. Make sure that the Allow a copy of reports to be sent to creator's stored email

address option is checked in Report Delivery Preferences for your OU.2. Make sure that the correct email address is on your user record.3. Make sure that the Deliver a copy of the report to my stored e-mail address every

time it runs option is checked on the Delivery tab for the custom report.

476


4. Make sure that you have configured the Schedule tab in the custom report to run the report on a scheduled basis. Or, refresh the report from the main custom reports page by clicking the Refresh option in the Actions column for the report.

5. If the report has been shared with you, an email will not be sent. The email option on the Delivery tab does not apply to shared users.

A report was shared with me. Why aren't I getting the report in an email?Shared reports are not sent via email. The shared report is only available to you in your list of reports on the main custom reports page.

A report was shared with me. Why don't I see it on the main custom reports page?Shared reports are only visible if you have permission to view the report. For example, if a Custom Performance Review Report was shared with you, but you do not have permission to view Custom Performance Review Reports, then the report will not be available to you, even though it was shared with you. Contact your system administrator at your organization regarding permissions to view custom reports.

Why can't I copy a report that was shared with me?You can only copy a report that was shared with you if you have permission to create the same report type. For example, if a Custom Performance Review Report was shared with you, but you do not have permission to create Custom Performance Review Reports, then you will not be able to copy the report. However, you can export the report to Excel, print the report, create a text file, and view the report history and refresh the report.

477


Scheduling

478


Create Custom Report - Schedule TabCustom Reports Deprecation: Cornerstone will be deprecating the legacy reporting solution "Custom Reports" with the February ’21 Release. For more information, see the announcement in the August '20 release notes and in the August '20 Release Summary & Matrix.

The Schedule tab enables you to create a schedule for the report. Reports can be scheduled to run once, daily, weekly, or monthly. By default, reports are not scheduled to run and must be run manually by the user. In order to schedule a report at a specific time or on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis, you must configure the scheduling options on the Schedule tab.


o Schedule - Select Once from the drop-down.o Time - From the drop-down, select the time at which to run the report. The default

setting is one hour from the current time.o Time Zone - From the drop-down, select the time zone in which to run the report. The

default setting is the time zone of the user configuring the report.o Start Date - By default, the start date is the current date. You can modify the start date

by entering a different date in the field. This is a required field.



o Schedule - Select Daily from the drop-down.

479




o Repeat Every - This field enables you to determine the report interval. For example, if "3" is the value in the field, then the report runs every three days. Enter the number of days in the Repeat Every field. The default value is "1." This is a required field.






o Schedule - Select Weekly from the drop-down.o Repeat Every - This field enables you to determine the report interval. For example, if







480



o Schedule - Select Monthly from the drop-down.o Repeat Every - This field enables you to determine the report interval. For example, if



month. This enables a numeric text box to display to the right of the drop-down. In the text box, enter the day of the month on which the report will run.Note: If you would like a report to run on the last day of each month, select "Last" instead of entering a specific date. Otherwise, your report may not run, depending on the date you enter in the text box. For example, if you enter "31" as the date, then the report will only run when a month has 31 days.







481





SummaryFor each report type, the Summary section displays the report schedule. For all but the one-time report, the Summary section displays the date on which the report is scheduled to run next.

Share ReportThe Schedule report for shared users also option allows you to share the scheduled report with the users/OUs that you have selected on the Sharing tab.

This option is only available when the following occurs:

o The report is being shared with 20 or fewer users. If the report is being shared with more than 20 users, then this option is not available.

o The Include Subordinates option is not selected for any user. If the Include Subordinates option is selected for any user or OU, then this option is not available.

o A schedule has been set for the report. If a schedule is not set for the report (e.g., Occurs every 2 days), then this option is not available.

If the report is being shared and scheduled at the same time, then the report is scheduled for all users with whom the report is being shared.

Scheduled Report Idle after 30 DaysFor reports that are scheduled to process daily or weekly, If the report output has not been accessed in the last 30 days, then the system stops processing the scheduled report until

482


the user clicks one of the report output options, such as clicking the Excel icon. Once the user clicks the output option, the report will begin processing again on schedule.

FAQsDoes refreshing the report restore the schedule once the processing goes idle?No. If you refresh the report, the refresh will process but does not restore the report schedule. The only way to restore the report schedule after 30 days is to click one of the report output options.




I want to schedule the report, but I also want the users with whom I'm sharing the report to get the report at the same time that the report is scheduled to run. How do I do that?Check the Schedule report for shared users also option on the Schedule tab. This will send the report to your shared users each time the report is scheduled to run.

483


Transcript Status Groups for ReportingThe Transcript Status Group field, available for use in custom transcript reports, groups all possible transcript status into four categories:

o Completedo In Progresso Not Startedo Other

See the sections below for each status group's complete list of equivalent statuses:

CompletedThe following transcript statuses are categorized as Completed within the context of the Transcript Status Group field:

o Completedo Completed Equivalento Equivalento Exempto Exempt-Internal

In ProgressThe following transcript statuses are categorized as In Progress within the context of the Transcript Status Group field:

o Completion Approval Deniedo Completion Approval Denied / Past Dueo Failedo Failed / Past Dueo In Progresso In Progress / Past Dueo Incompleteo Incomplete / Past Dueo Past Dueo Pending Acknowledgmento Pending Acknowledgment / Past Dueo Pending Completion / Past Dueo Pending Completion Approvalo Pending Completion Signatureo Pending Completion Signature /Past Dueo Pending Evaluation

484


o Pending Evaluation / Past Dueo Pending Gradeo Pending Grade / Past Dueo Pending Observer Completiono Pending Observer Completion / Not Availableo Pending Observer Completion / Not Available / Past Dueo Pending Observer Completion / Past Dueo Pending Post-Worko Pending Post-Work/Past Dueo Pending SF-182 Form Approvalo SF-182 Form Denied

Not StartedThe following transcript statuses are categorized as Not Started within the context of the Transcript Status Group field:

o Approvedo Approved / Past Dueo Exception Requestedo Exception Requested / Past Dueo Exception Requested / Waitlistedo Exception Requested / Waitlisted / Past Dueo No Showo No Show / Past Dueo Not Availableo Not Startedo Not Started/ Past Dueo Payment Deniedo Payment Denied /Past Dueo Payment Refundedo Payment Refunded /Past Dueo Pending Approvalo Pending Approval / Past Dueo Pending Approval / Waitlistedo Pending Approval / Waitlisted / Past Dueo Pending Paymento Pending Payment / Past Dueo Pending Prerequisiteo Pending Prerequisite / Past Dueo Pending Pre-Worko Pending Pre-Work/Past Due

485


o Pending Prior Trainingo Registeredo Registered / Not Availableo Registered / Not Available / Past Dueo Registered / Past Dueo Registration Pendingo Registration Pending / Past Dueo Waitlist Expiredo Waitlist Expired / Past Dueo Waitlistedo Waitlisted / Past Dueo Withdrawno Withdrawn / Past Due

OtherThe following transcript statuses are categorized as Other within the context of the Transcript Status Group field:

o Cancelledo Cancelled / Past Dueo Deniedo Denied / Past Dueo Discontinuedo Discontinued / Past Dueo Expiredo Expired / Past Dueo Not Activatedo Old Versiono Subscription Expired

486